Ultra Drive User Guide: Engineering Center Five Farm Springs Farmington, CT 06032

Engineering Center
Five Farm Springs

Farmington, CT 06032
Original Date: 2010-09-10 Document: 31400_UG

Project Number: D324 CA Number: Sheet 1 of 183
Dwg / Part No:
Ultra Drive User Guide
DISTRIBUTION: Per notification document PDP00161.
ORIGINAL APPROVAL:
Prepared By: Signature and Approved By: Signature and
(Last, F I typed) Date (yyyy-mm-dd) (Last, F I typed) Date (yyyy-mm-dd)
Czerwinski, C. Czerwinski, C.
REVISION APPROVAL RECORD:
Rev Date Project/ Revised By: Approved By: Signature and

(yyyy-mm-dd) PC (Last, F I typed) (Last, F I typed) Date (yyyy-mm-dd)
2016-11-30 D324 Czerwinski, C. Czerwinski, C. 2016-11-22
U.Schoenauer
Description of Parameters, events and SVT monitor related to brake switches 3-5.
Added 2 Vane Sensor Types for Home Elevator and one for PRS8N single sensor
Change Added events, monitor screens and parameters for Belt Slip Mitigation feature.
6.2: Monitor menu overview adaptation.
Added Smooth Stop Operation (SSO)
Updated to A5231400CBC
The P/N for motor type 216 should be TAA20220AB566.
Updated motor types 205, 104, 292, 106, 491, 731-734, 407, 326, 310-311.
Updated motor type 292.
Updated parameter “M Cable Leng 0/2”
Reason for For AP231400CBC release.
Change
This work and the information it contains are the property of Otis Elevator Company (“Otis”). It is
delivered to others on the express condition that it will be used only for, or on behalf of, Otis; that
neither it nor the information it contains will be reproduced or disclosed, in whole or in part,
without the prior written consent of Otis; and that on demand it and any copies will be promptly
returned to Otis.
Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 2 of 183
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Applicable Hardware Configurations ............................................................................................ 5
1.2 Applicable Software Versions ...................................................................................................... 5
1.3 References ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.4 Abbreviations, Acronyms and Terms ........................................................................................... 5
2 Software Release Notes ..................................................................................... 6
2.1 Software Modifications ................................................................................................................ 6
2.2 Known Bugs................................................................................................................................ 6
2.3 Required EEPROM Changes For Drive Software Upgrade .......................................................... 6
3 Drive Operation ................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Drive Modes................................................................................................................................ 7
3.1.1 MCSS Mode .......................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.2 Manual Mode ......................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.3 CAN Mode ............................................................................................................................. 8
3.1.4 Engineering Test Modes......................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Drive States ................................................................................................................................ 8
3.2.1 Drive State Sequence .......................................................................................................... 11
4 Installation and Startup .................................................................................... 12
4.1 Requirements ........................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 Wiring Guidelines for 422 Interface............................................................................................ 12
4.3 Parameter Setup ....................................................................................................................... 12
4.4 Encoder Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 13
4.5 Check of Direction ..................................................................................................................... 14
4.6 LEDs......................................................................................................................................... 14
4.7 Check of 1LS/2LS ..................................................................................................................... 15
4.8 PRS .......................................................................................................................................... 16
4.8.1 Example PRS configuration: PRS2 ....................................................................................... 19
4.9 Learn run .................................................................................................................................. 20
4.9.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 20
4.9.2 Faults during Learn Run ....................................................................................................... 22
4.9.3 Find Bottom Landing Run ..................................................................................................... 23
4.9.4 Viewing the Landing Table ................................................................................................... 23
4.10 Floor Level Adjustment.............................................................................................................. 23
4.11 Start Jerk / Rollback Reduction ................................................................................................. 24
5 Self-Commissioning Operation ....................................................................... 25
5.1 Overview................................................................................................................................... 25
5.2 EEPROM parameters ............................................................................................................... 26
5.3 How do I do this …. ................................................................................................................... 26
5.4 Running Self-Commissioning Tests ........................................................................................... 27
5.4.1 Entering Auto Tune Mode..................................................................................................... 27
5.4.2 Entering Motor Nameplate Data and Number of Poles. ......................................................... 27
5.4.3 Initial Tests with Stationary Elevator (Locked Rotor Tests) – INDUCTION MOTOR ONLY!! .. 28
5.4.4 Checking Motor Phasing ...................................................................................................... 29
5.4.5 Motor Fine-Tuning Tests - INDUCTION MOTOR ONLY!! ...................................................... 29
5.4.6 Inertia Adjustment – Induction Motor or PM Synchronous Motor ........................................... 30
5.4.7 Parameter Display................................................................................................................ 31
5.4.8 Exiting Auto Tune Mode ....................................................................................................... 31
5.5 Troubleshooting Notes .............................................................................................................. 31
6 Service Tool ...................................................................................................... 36
6.1 Menu Tree ................................................................................................................................ 37
6.2 Monitor Menu ............................................................................................................................ 38

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 3 of 183
6.2.1 Display Format ..................................................................................................................... 40

6.2.2 Display Parameter Visibility .................................................................................................. 40
6.2.3 1-1 STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 42
6.2.4 1-2 MOTOR ......................................................................................................................... 44
6.2.5 1-3 MOTION ........................................................................................................................ 46
6.2.6 1-4 INVERTER ..................................................................................................................... 48
6.2.7 1-5 DISCRETES .................................................................................................................. 49
6.2.8 1-6 METRICS....................................................................................................................... 50
6.2.9 1-7 VANES .......................................................................................................................... 52
6.2.10 1-8 ENGINEERING .............................................................................................................. 53
6.3 Event Log ................................................................................................................................. 55
6.3.1 General Description ............................................................................................................. 55
6.3.2 Event-Specific Data.............................................................................................................. 55
6.3.3 Shut Down Error Handling .................................................................................................... 56
6.3.4 Occurrence Counters ........................................................................................................... 56
6.3.5 Software Reset .................................................................................................................... 57
6.3.6 Event Response ................................................................................................................... 57
6.3.7 Event Overview .................................................................................................................... 59
6.3.8 Event Menu Detailed Descriptions ........................................................................................ 61
6.3.9 Information Events ............................................................................................................... 61
6.3.10 Self Commissioning Faults ................................................................................................... 62
6.3.11 Inverter Current Faults ......................................................................................................... 63
6.3.12 Converter Current Faults ...................................................................................................... 66
6.3.13 Voltage Faults ...................................................................................................................... 68
6.3.14 Brake Faults ......................................................................................................................... 71
6.3.15 Motion Faults ....................................................................................................................... 75
6.3.16 Temperature Faults .............................................................................................................. 80
6.3.17 State Faults .......................................................................................................................... 81
6.3.18 Task Overrun Faults ............................................................................................................. 85
6.3.19 Communication Faults .......................................................................................................... 86
6.4 Central Failure Management ..................................................................................................... 88
6.4.1 Plug & See ........................................................................................................................... 88
6.5 Service Tool Parameters ........................................................................................................... 91
6.6 Detailed Parameter Description ................................................................................................. 98
6.6.1 3-1 CONTRACT ................................................................................................................... 98
6.6.2 3-2 ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................................. 104
6.6.3 3-3 BRAKE ........................................................................................................................ 117
6.6.4 3-4 MACHINE .................................................................................................................... 121
6.6.5 3-5 PROFILE ..................................................................................................................... 126
6.6.6 3-6 FACTORY.................................................................................................................... 129
6.7 Engineering Parameters Detailed Description.......................................................................... 129
6.7.1 6-1 ENG ADJUST .............................................................................................................. 129
6.7.2 6-2 ENG TEST ................................................................................................................... 134
6.7.3 6-4 I2C EEPROM ............................................................................................................... 142
6.8 Test Menu Detailed Description............................................................................................... 144
6.8.1 5-1 FAN TEST ................................................................................................................... 144
6.8.2 5-2 TURNOVR TST ........................................................................................................... 144
6.8.3 5-3 BrakeTRQ TST ............................................................................................................ 146
6.8.4 5-5 SAFETY TEST (UD)..................................................................................................... 147
6.8.5 5-5 SAFETY TEST (LVD) ................................................................................................... 149
6.8.6 5-6 BUFFR/LOWPIT .......................................................................................................... 152
6.8.7 5–8 EEPROM Backup Feature ........................................................................................... 154
6.8.8 5-9 EEPROM Restore Feature ........................................................................................... 155
6.8.9 8-1 NTSD TEST ................................................................................................................. 155

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 4 of 183
7 Data Acquisition Tool ..................................................................................... 156

7.1 Signals .................................................................................................................................... 156
7.2 Self Commissioning DAT variables .......................................................................................... 164
7.3 Signal Groups ......................................................................................................................... 164
8 Engineering Test Modes ................................................................................ 165
8.1 Overview................................................................................................................................. 165
8.2 Enabling and Changing Test Modes ........................................................................................ 166
8.3 Exiting Test Modes ................................................................................................................. 166
8.4 Test Mode I/O ......................................................................................................................... 166
8.5 Test Mode Descriptions........................................................................................................... 167
9 Pre-Defined Motor Parameters ...................................................................... 169
9.1 System Inertia Formula ........................................................................................................... 183
9.2 System Inertia Approximation .................................................................................................. 183

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 5 of 183
1 Introduction
1.1 Applicable Hardware Configurations
This document contains information for the Ultra Drive. The board version covered by this
document is:
• Processor Board: K2A26800ABS
1.2 Applicable Software Versions
This document covers software AAA31400AAB. Applicability to other SCN's is uncertain.
1.3 References
1. Otis Document SID00038, "Drive Module Message Interface Standard”.
2. Otis Document D339_DRS, “Ultra Drive Requirements”.
3. Otis Doucument 31400_SRS, “Ultra Drive Software Requirements Specification”.
4. Otis Doucument 31400_SDD, “Ultra Drive Software Design Document”.
1.4 Abbreviations, Acronyms and Terms
The following abbreviations, acronyms and terms are used in this document:
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
CAN Controller Area Network
CRC Circular Redundancy Check
DBD Drive Block Disconnect
DIB Down Inspection Button
DDP Delayed Drive Protection
DSP Digital Signal Processor
GDCB Global Drive Control Board (Axx26800AKT)
eI2C enhanced I2C EEPROM storage capability
ESTOP Emergency Stop
LS Limit Switch
LWSS Load Weight Subsystem
MCSS Motion Command Subsystem; Applies to MCSS and LMCSS
NTSD Normal Terminal Stopping Device
PLL Phase Lock Loop
PRS Position Reference System
PTR Prepare To Run signal from MCSS
RTR Ready to Run signal declared by DBSS and sent to MCSS.
SCN Software Configuration Number (i.e. AAA31400AAA)
SVT Service Tool
TCB Traction Control Board
UIB Up Inspection Button

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 6 of 183
2 Software Release Notes

2.1 Software Modifications
Refer to the applicable Software Configuration Release Document’s.
2.2 Known Bugs
3 levels of software bug severity are identified:
MAJOR: Misoperation could cause callback or impact safety.
MINOR: Possible misoperation will not cause callback or impact safety.
TRIVIAL: No impact on performance or operation.
All known bugs are listed. Software release criteria dictates that a release shall not take place if a
Major bug is known to exist.
1. TRIVIAL: There is a minor bug with the SVT display for the fault “516 Corr failed”. The
fault response in the SVT is shown as ESTOP, when it is actually DECEL. This will be
corrected by SCR# 30924-1067.
2. TRIVIAL: There is a minor bug with the SVT display for the fault “702 Prechrg Time”. The
fault response in the SVT is shown asWARN, when it is actually ESTOP. This will be
corrected by SCR# 30924-1068.
3. TRIVIAL: The saved event log may not be correct after a software upgrade. It the event log is
needed it is recommended to record the event log before software upgrade. It is also
recommended to clear the event log after software upgrade. SCR 2039 was enetered for this
issue.
2.3 Required EEPROM Changes For Drive Software Upgrade
Drives being upgraded to this Software Configuration Number may require some EEPROM
parameter values to be changed or added. It is strongly recommended that a copy be made of
the currently working EEPROM. After copying, set aside the original EEPROM and install the
newly made copy. Initially, the following fault may occur in menu 2 EVENT LOG:
705 E2 Invalid
000:00:00:00.04
The reason for this is the data in the EEPROM is set to values incompatible with the current SCN
or that new EEPROM parameters have not yet been set. The invalid or blank values must be
corrected. See the description of this fault in Section 6.3.7 of this manual.
A specific parameter can be easily set to its default value as described below:
- press SHIFT-7 (D) to prepare a default value to be entered in the SVT edit field,
- press ENTER to accept this value (same as the value would have been entered manually).
Note: this procedure works only if the specific parameter has a defined default value. See also
parameter tables in section 6.5 of this manual.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 7 of 183
3 Drive Operation
3.1 Drive Modes
The Gen2 Regenerative Drive is designed to be compatible with both MCSS-type and TCBC-type
controllers. As a result, two of the fundamental operating modes of the drive are MCSS mode and
CAN mode. The setting of the service tool parameter Interface Type specifies which controller is
to be used and determines the fundamental operating mode. The mode determines the source of
the motion commands and other functionality of the drive. Additionally, there are sub-modes,
each of which is described below.
3.1.1 MCSS Mode
THIS SECTION NOT APPLICABLE TO THE ULTRA DRIVE
MCSS mode is the normal operating mode when the drive is to be used with an MCSS-type
controller. The mode has to be selected using the service tool parameter Interface Type. In
MCSS mode, the velocity reference is obtained from the MCSS-type controller according to the
MCSS ICD [1]. The drive has to be connected to the MCSS-type controller via the RS-422 serial
interface.
3.1.2 Manual Mode
THIS SECTION NOT APPLICABLE TO THE ULTRA DRIVE
Manual mode is a sub-mode, available only when MCSS mode is selected. Manual mode is
intended for use only during installation. The Manual Mode velocity profile is determined by the
setting of EEPROM parameters in menu 3-5 PROFILE. There are no acceleration or
deceleration limits other than these EEPROM settings. An overspeed trip is also provided and is
based on the following parameters in menu 3-5 PROFILE
Man Speed mm/s
<>
and menu 3-2 ADJUSTMENT:
MAN Overspeed %
<>
The safety chain must be provided to the drive and the manual mode pendant should be wired as
shown in the following diagram or Manual mode operation is not possible.
CONSTRUCTION RUN BOX Regen Drive GDCB Wiring
P11-1
ES COM
DN UP
P11-5
DN UP
P11-7
P11-10
P6-1
PE P6-5
110VAC 110VAC
RETURN
P6-7 or P6-9
110VAC Power for Safety Chain
and Pendant Operation

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 8 of 183
Two restrictions are placed on the operation of the up and down command inputs:
1. Both up and down inputs cannot be asserted at the same time. If stopped, the drive will not
run; if moving the drive will decelerate and stop even if the opposite direction input is de-
asserted while the drive is decelerating.
2. While running, if the asserted input is released the drive will decelerate and stop even if the
input is reasserted while the drive is decelerating.
3.1.3 CAN Mode
CAN mode is the operating mode when the drive is to be used with a TCBC-type controller. The
mode has to be selected using the service tool parameter Interface Type. In CAN mode, start and
stop commands are obtained from the controller according to the CAN ICD [2]. The drive has to
be connected to the TCBC-type controller via the CAN serial interface. There are several sub-
modes when the drive is set to CAN mode which include: Normal, TCI / ERO, Correction,
Rescue, and Learn.
3.1.4 Engineering Test Modes
Special test modes can be activated by using the engineering version of the Data Acquisition Tool
(DAT), Software Configuration Number AAA30959XXX. For a complete list of the test mode
operating instructions, see Section 8.
3.2 Drive States
The drive has several states that characterize the status of the drive and the distinct portions of
the motion profile. The table below describes the drive states. The drive state can be monitored
using the service tool menu 1-1 STATUS.
Internal
Description Actions
Drive State
• Indentify drive type by reading
EEPROM in power section, if
Init Initialization state.
available. If not, use SVT EEPROM
parameter Drive Type.
In this state, the power section is disconnected
from the AC mains. This state is entered when
the drive is first powered-on. If the AC line is • Disable PWMs
valid, then the state advances to the Pre-
• De-energize Safety (SX) relays
charge state.
Power • Open main (MX) contactor.
Down
In CAN mode, this state can also be entered • Open pre-charge (PX) contact.
when commanded to via the DrivePowerDown • Close discharge (DX) contact.
message to save energy (sleep mode). The
drive exits PowerDown when commanded by
the DrivePowerDown message
This is the state of the drive while the DC bus
is charging. When precharge is complete, the • Close pre-charge (PX) contact.
Pre- state advances to either Wait for Safety or • Open discharge (DX) contact.
charge Idle, depending on the safety chain. If the bus • Close main (MX) contactor when
does not charge in a certain amount of time, pre-charge complete.
the Power Down state is re-entered.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 9 of 183
This state is entered after certain faults have

occurred (see DECEL, ESTOP, COMP faults).
• Send stop and shutdown request
The drive stays in this state until motion has
(SAS) to MCSS if certain critical
stopped and 2 seconds have elapsed. The
faults have occurred.
drive will NOT attempt another run until the
ShutDown • Disable PWMs
fault condition clears. When the fault clears,
the state advances to Wait for Safety or Idle • De-energize Safety (SX) relays
.depending on the safety chain. Also, if the • Main contactor (MX) may be
drive was previously commanded to Power dropped for certian critical faults.
Down, the drive will advance to PowerDown.
This state is entered when the safety chain is
Wait for • Disable PWMs
open. If the safety chain closes, the state will
Safety
advance to Idle. • De-energize Safety (SX) relays
This state is entered when there is no demand,
the safety chain is made, and certain faults • Disable PWMs
Idle
have not occurred. If there is demand, the • De-energize Safety (SX) relays
state advances toPrepare To Run.
• Energize Safety (SX) relays
• Enable PWM
This state is entered when prepare to run
Prepare To
(PTR) command is activated. When complete, • Establish flux in machine (ramp
Run magnetizing current in induction
the drive advances to Ready To Run.
motor or run locked-rotor test if
necessary for PM motor)
In this state, the drive waits for the lift brake
command. When the lift brake command is
received, the state advances to Lift Brake.
Ready To
Run
In CAN Mode w ABL: • Set ready to run (RTR) true.
Waits for Lift Brake Command
In CAN mode w/o ABL:
Automatically advaces to Lift Brake
This state is entered when the lift brake (LB) • Torque current ON
command is activated. After the brake is lifted,
• Velocity regulator ON
the drive transitions to the Runningstate.
• CAN & Manual Mode only: Position
In CAN Mode w ABL:
Lift Brake regulator ON
Waits for DriveGoToLanding
• Set pretorque level
Command
In CAN mode w/o ABL: • Lift brake
Automatically advaces to Running • Set brake lifted (BL) flag true
• Allow non-zero velocity reference
This state is entered immediately after leaving
Running
the Lift Brake state. • CAN & Manual Mode only: Profile
generator ON
CAN & Manual Mode only: This state is
• Allow non-zero velocity reference
entered immediately after leaving the Running
Decel • Drive's profile generator is in the
state when the drive's profile generator begins
decelerating state
deceleration

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 10 of 183
• Drop brake
This state is entered when: • CAN & Manual Mode only: Position
• MCSS mode: LB command is de-asserted. regulator & profile generator OFF
• CAN & Manual Mode: position and velocity • Ramp torque down to zero
Drop meet the stopping criteria at the • Notifies the brake has dropped
Brake end of the run. • MCSS mode: Remains here until
PTR is de-asserted.
Remains in this state until the brakes have • CAN Mode w ABL:
dropped and post-torque ramp down has Waits for EndRun command.
completed. It then advances to Idle. • CAN Mode w/o ABL:
Advances directly to Idle
This state is applicable to all system when the
Brake Maintenance tool is used.
This state is entered when
• MCSS mode: Brake Test of Drive
command is set with SVT and Brake Test
Brake of MCSS command is received. • Set ready to run (RTR) true.
Torque • Manual mode: Brake Test of Drive • Torque current ON
Test command is set with SVT. • LB OFF
• CAN Mode: Brake Test of Drive command
is set with SVT and Brake Test of OCSS
command is received.
When Brake Test mode is ended, the Drive
state advances to Idle.
This state is applicable only for JIS application
Brake
when the Brake Open tool is used.
Open • LB ON
When Brake Test mode is ended, the Drive
Test
state advances to Idle.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 11 of 183
3.2.1 Drive State Sequence

UD401/402/403/404 – CAN interface
DriveGotoLanding
-- Landing(target floor) / profile(normal) --
(GECB -> UD
DriveState
Idle PTR RTR LB Running Stop Drop Brake Idle
(UD -> GECB)
DriveSubstate
Idle Available PTR Ready BLift Accel Const Decel Stop Dropping Dropping/Untorque Idle
(UD -> GECB)
UIB
DIB
PTR Bus min charge time + Bus pre charge drop time = 230msec
RTR Lift Brake Delay(E2_LIFT_BRAKE_DELAY]) Zero speed (E2_ZERO_SPEED_TIME])
max 10ms
LB
BL Profile Delay (E2_PROFILE_DELAY])
SW OUT
SAF_OK
BY
INV
Ramp down ~200msec

Brake
Pick Max ramp down time – 5sec
Brake
Brake settle Time

BS1&BS2 (E2_BRK_SETL_TIME)
Brake Lift Delay

(E2_BRAKE_LIFTED_DELAY/E2_BRK_PICK_TIME)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 12 of 183
• In UD 401/402/403, the drive does do not know the state of the safety chain since there is no
UIB/DIB monitoring circuit. Hence the drive stays in IDLE state even if there is no safety chain.
• Brake Lifted Delay – uses either E2_BRAKE_LIFTED_DELAY if brake control type is 2 or 3 and
E2_BRK_PICK_TIME if brake control type is 0 or 1.
• Hovering is not included
4 Installation and Startup

4.1 Requirements
Starting up the Gen2 Regenerative Drive should be performed by authorized personnel only. The
mechanical assembly of the hoistway and the cab as well as the electrical installation in the
hoistway, controller, and E&I panel have to be finished to ensure successful inspection run. The
encoder has to be mounted at the machine and properly connected to the drive. The electrical
connections have to be completely installed and checked.
4.2 Wiring Guidelines for 422 Interface
THIS SECTION NOT APPLICABLE TO ULTRA DRIVE.
The regenerative drive can be located at a significant distance from the controller without extreme
wiring measures by using the following basic guidelines:
1) Treat the drive chassis, machine, and encoder cable as noise sources.
2) Treat the controller cabinet as a quiet ground reference.
3) The encoder cable shield should be connected to the drive chassis (via GDCB connector P9-
8).
4) Do NOT connect the encoder cable shield to the controller cabinet.
5) RS422 communication wires between the controller and the drive should be shielded twisted
pairs.
6) Connect the RS422 communication cable shield to the controller cabinet (quiet ground
reference).
7) The Drive to MCSS differential encoder signals should be shielded twisted pair wires.
8) Connect the Drive to MCSS differential encoder cable shield to the controller cabinet (quiet
ground reference).
In addition to the preceding guidelines, the routing of the earth ground connection must be
considered. The earth ground connection should first go to the drive, then to the controller. This
allows any common mode noise current to be shunted to earth without having the opportunity to
induce a common mode voltage between the drive and the controller.
4.3 Parameter Setup

Most parameters have already been set to default values. However, in order to enable the drive
to run, the following parameters must be set according to the contract:
• All parameters in service tool menu 3-1 CONTRACT

• All parameters in service tool menu 3-5 PROFILE

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 13 of 183
Refer to Section 6.6 for the detailed descriptions for the parameters in the above menus.
Since the Gen2 Regenerative Drive is compatible with MCSS-type and TCBC-type controllers,
some parameters are not applicable and do not have to be set, depending on which controller is
used. The parameter Interface Type specifies the type of controller being used. If certain
parameters do not have to be set, they will not be visible in the service tool.
All applicable parameters noted above must be set before the drive is allowed to run. If not, the
following error message will be visible in the event log:
705 E2 Invalid
000:00:00:00.04
If this occurs, press SHIFT-ENTER to determine which parameter has not been set.
4.4 Encoder Adjustment

THIS SECTION NOT APPLICABLE TO INDUCTION MOTORS.
The Gen2 Regenerative Drive performs an automatic encoder calibration at the beginning of the
first run after power-up. During the calibration, the brake remains dropped and a test current is
commanded in the motor to determine the magnet position of the rotor relative to the encoder.
The test lasts for about 4 seconds, and is illustrated relative to other events in the timing diagram
in the following Figure.
UP TRIAC switches
S1,S2
DBD
BY1/BY2
Encoder Encoder Calibration occurs only
Calibration on first run command after drive
power up or after certain faults
Torque Holding Torque Current
Current
Brake PICK
BS1/BS2 Check:Brake Closed? Check:Brake Open?
UP
Output-
frequency
Figure 1 Timing Diagram Showing Encoder Calibration (PM motors only)
During the test, a tone may be heard from the motor. This is normal and to be expected. No user
intervention is required during the automatic calibration. Note that the adjustment is automatically
repeated after certain faults are detected.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 14 of 183
When running the car on inspection after power-on, the inspection button must
be held in for a minimum of 5 seconds in order for the Encoder Adjustment to complete.
Inspection runs are not possible until the Enoder Adjustment is complete. The brake
remains dropped during the encoder calibration procedure. Note: this is applicable for
PM motor applications only.
4.5 Check of Direction

After setting the contract parameters, the direction and motor phasing needs to be checked by
performing an inspection or manual run, depending on the controller being used:
• If Interface Type is set to MCSS-type, perform a manual run using the manual pendant.
• If Interface Type is set to TCBC-type, perform an inspection using ERO box.
If the car:
1. starts correctly in both directions and is following the inspection or manual mode profile:
-> continue with the next step in the startup routine.
2. starts in the incorrect direction but is following the profile:
-> change the following parameter in service tool menu 3-2 ADJUSTMENT:
Car Dir 0/1
<>
then continue with the next step in the startup routine.
3. does not follow the profile and/or results in an ESTOP with any of the following faults:
501 Pos Tracking 502 Vel Tracking 100 Inv SW Oct

000:00:00:00.04 000:00:00:00.04 000:00:00:00.04
-> it is likely that the motor phasing (relative to the encoder) is incorrect. The phasing can
be changed manually by swapping two motor phases OR by changing the service tool
parameter in menu 3-2 ADJUSTMENT:
Motor Phase 0/1
<>
After changing this parameter, repeat the test.

4.6 LEDs
There are 2 LEDs on the Ultra Drive Control Board near the service tool connector. If these LEDs
are visible, depending on where the drive is located, the status of the LEDs can be checked. The
LEDs have the following meanings:
Green Red
Status
(LED1) (LED2)
NOT NOT
DSP is in Reset
FLASHING FLASHING
DSP is Running FLASHING ANY STATE
Events in Log FLASHING FLASHING

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 15 of 183
4.7 Check of 1LS/2LS

The required minimum length of 1LS / 2LS is determined by the adjusted Nom Speed mm/s and
Decel mm/s2. The deceleration rate at correction runs or NTSD is increased by typ. 20%.
Nom Speed Decel Minimal 1LS / 2LS distance

[mm/s] [mm/s2] [mm]
400 500 250
630 500 500
1000 500 1090
1600 500 2535
1750 500 2990
2000 500 3830
2500 500 5825
3000 500 8235
3500 500 11065
4000 500 14310
400 800 200

630 800 380
1000 800 780
1600 800 1740
1750 800 2035
2000 800 2585
2500 800 3875
3000 800 5430
3500 800 7240
4000 800 9315
400 1000 185

630 1000 340
1000 1000 680
1600 1000 1470
1750 1000 1720
2000 1000 2170
2500 1000 3225
3000 1000 4490
3500 1000 5965
4000 1000 7650
400 1200 175

630 1200 310
1000 1200 610
1600 1200 1295
1750 1200 1505
2000 1200 1890
2500 1200 2795
3000 1200 3865
3500 1200 5115
4000 1200 6540

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 16 of 183
If the drive is being used with TCBC-type controller (see parameter Interface Type), then the drive
reduces speed when the car reaches the 1LS or the 2LS even on TCI and ERO runs.
To determine the minimum length for LS during installation, the following is recommended:
1. Set the profile to the contract speed and nominal deceleration, SVT parameters Nom Speed
mm/s and Decel mm/s2 in M235.
2. Check the SVT parameter M217, LS length min mm to determine the minimum length for LS.
3. Set 1LS and 2LS to the required minimum length, plus an additional 20% (not to exceed
80%) for margin (this will avoid having to enter into the hoistway again after the installation if
it is decided to decrease decel or jerk).
4. Perform the learn run.
5. Verify the learned lengths are correct via SVT parameters LS1 length mm and LS2 length
mm in M217. Note: if they are incorrect, the drive should log the error 528 Profile Err
in the event log indicating LS is not long enough for the selected deceleration rate. The fault
is a log-only fault.
6. If a higher than nominal deceleration is desired, then increase the deceleration rate. A new
learn run is not required.
7. If a lower than nominal deceleration is desired, then decrease the deceleration rate. Note
however, the drive may log the error 528 Profile Err in the event log indicating LS is
not long enough for the selected deceleration rate.
4.8 PRS
If the drive is being used with a GECB/TCBC-type controller (see parameter Interface Type), then
a PRS has to be mounted, corresponding to a configuration from the table below. The
magnets/vanes have to be located at the same level in each landing (relative to the hoistway door
sill).
At shorter landings, the distance between door zones (= DZ magnet/vane edge-to-edge) must be
at least 180 mm where the car is supposed to reach normal speed (>1.6m/s)., otherwise the door
zones can not be separated with normal speed. In low-speed zones (e.g. end of hoistway),
minimum gaps between DZ magnets must be guaranteed according to the table below.
Configuration #4: Configuration #3: Configuration #1:

Magnet / Magnet / Magnet /
Sensor head Sensor head
Vane Vane Vane
Sensor head
UIS UIS
B B
1LV 1LV
A Vane A Vane Vane
1LV
length length length
A
2LV
C
B
Form
DISPA1021 DIS Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company
Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 17 of 183
The sensor heads are shown in the position where the car is level with the hoistway sill
Vane Vane Minimum 3 Toleran

Con 2 A, B, C ) 8 Output
Sensor PRS Name length vane gap ) ce ) 4
1 fig # [mm] logic )
Type ) [mm] [mm] [mm]
A=15
0 PRS2 with ADO/RLEV 4 250 130 15 N.O.
B=100
A=15
1 PRS2 w/o ADO/RLEV 3 250 160 B=100 15 N.O.
C=115
2 PRS2, 1Sens, 250mm 1 250 50 - 15 N.O.
3 RPD-P2, 1Sens, 250mm 1 250 50 - 15 N.C.
CEDES Photo, 1Sens, 9

4 9 1 250 ) 50 - 15 N.O.
250mm )
CEDES Photo, 4Sens, A=15
5 250mm
4 250 130 15 N.O.
B=100
A=15
6 RPD-P3 4 250 130 15 N.O.
B=100
7 PRS5 1 170 50 - 30 N.O.
8 PRSxx, 1Sens, 130mm 1 130 50 - 30 N.O.
PRS2 1LV+2LV, no 6
9 RLEV 2 ) 250 60 A=15 15 N.O.
RPD-P7A, 4Sens, A=15

10 150mm
4 150 80 15 N.O.
B=50
RPD-P8A, 4Sens, A=15
11 180mm
4 180 95 15 N.O.
B=65
170 A=15
12 PRS8N, 4Sens, 170mm 4 7 92 15 N.O.
[180] ) B=62
13 PRSxx, 1Sens, 140mm 1 140 50 - 30 N.O.

A=0
14 PRSxx, 3Sens, 140mm 3 140 95 B=60 30 N.O.
C=60
170
15 PRS8N, 1Sens, 170mm 1 7 50 - 30 N.O.
[180] )
5 cust custom Max sensor custom custom
99 Custom PRS ) 5 5 5 80 5
om ) ) interval + 30 ) )
Notes:
1) See SVT Contract Parameter “Vane Sensor Type”.
2) Measured between upper edge of one vane to lower edge of next vane, value includes ~20mm
margin to minimum threshold checked at Learn Run.
3) A, B, C: See corresponding Configuration # in diagram above..
4) N.O. = “Normally Open”: If sensor on vane => PRS output closed = ca.+24V.
N.C. = “Normally Closed”: If sensor on vane => PRS output open = high impedance or ca. 0V.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 18 of 183
5) For “Vane Sensor Type”=99, a PRS configuration can be customized with individual
parameters, see 6.6.2. When entering “Vane Sensor Type”=99, the custom configuration is
initialized to copy the previously selected standard PRS configuration (0...8).
6) Configuration with 2 sensors: 1LV is A mm above center, 2LV is A mm below center.
7) Expectation of perceived vane (=field) length differs from geometric vane length given.
8) Learn run fails if adjacent sensor transitions deviate from nominal by more than tolerance mm.
9) Actual implementation of vane length is 250mm for "Vane Sensor Type”= 4. Nevertheless this
type can still be used for an existing PRS with vane length = 150mm (as accidentially shown in
previous version of this document).
The minimum distance between landings is = Minimum vane gap [mm] + Vane length [mm].
Examples:
for Vane Sensor type = 0: Min. distance = 130mm + 250mm = 380mm.
for Vane Sensor type = 7: Min. distance = 50mm + 170mm = 220mm.
The maximum distance between vanes is 12m ! If the required distance between landings is
larger, dummy vanes need to be inserted.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 19 of 183
4.8.1 Example PRS configuration: PRS2
2LS magnet
Floor level
Top Floor
DZ magnet
Tape
Sensor Unit
12mm 2LS
UIS
SAC1
DZI
1LV
250mm 30mm
2LV
Floor level
DIS SAC2
DZ magnet
1LS
DZ magnet
Floor level
Bottom Floor
1LS magnet

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 20 of 183
4.9 Learn run

If the drive is being used with TCBC-type controller (see parameter Interface Type), then the
learn run has to be performed before the first normal run. The learn run must be repeated if a
door zone magnet was moved. Before starting the learn run, the parameters Number of DZ,
Bottom DZ, and DZ in 1LS have to be set correctly, as well as Car Dir 0/1 and Motor Phase
0/1 (see Section 4.5).
NOTE: In CAN systems with GECB software >= GAA30780DAD, the learn run may already be
included in the automatic system installation routines (no extra Learn Run from SVT necessary).
The learn run can be started from anywhere in the hoistway. If the car is positioned in a door
zone within 1LS, the drive assumes this is the bottom landing and starts the learn run from there.
Otherwise, it performs a “find bottom landing” run before the learn run.
In the “find bottom landing” run, the car is automatically moved up out of 1LS (0.2m/s) if it was
positioned in 1LS. When outside of 1LS, it is moved down with 0.5m/s until it enters 1LS. Then it
is moved down with 0.2m/s counting landing vanes (starting from parameter “DZ in 1LS”) until it
enters the vane of landing 0. There it stops, ready for a learn run.
For the learn run, the car runs up from the lowest LV to the highest LV zone with 0.2 m/s within
the 1LS and 2LS and with 0.4m/s between the LS. The drive stores the center position of each LV
zones and the length of all LV zones. The center of the lowest LV zone is set to the position of
10.000m.
The learn run menu can be left during an ongoing learn run via the <MODULE>, <FUNCTION> or
<SET> keys on the SVT in order to visit other SVT menus in the drive or in other components of
the elevator, the learn run continues. At the end of the learn run, the learn run menu must be
entered again to acknowledge the result. Also, after the completion of the “find bottom landing”
run preceding a learn run, the start of the learn run must be acknowledged in the learn run menu
(opportunity to verify visually that the car is in fact in the bottom landing).
Notes regarding parameter “DZ in 1LS”:
• A landing is counted as “in 1LS” if any one of the PRS sensors (even UIS alone) is on the
landing vane while the LS sensor is on the 1LS vane.
• When the parameter is set to a value smaller than the correct value, the “find bottom landing”
run will end in a landing above the bottom. A subsequent learn run would then run the car
into the final limit switch 8LS.
• When the parameter is set to a value greater than the correct value, the “find bottom landing”
run will run the car into the final limit switch 7LS.
• => WHEN IN DOUBT, the smaller value could be chosen and then be increased in case the
“find bottom landing” run ends above the bottom landing.
Note: The Learn Run uses the compensation mechanism for mm-position error effects as
configured by parameters “Custom HwCmp 0/1” (SVT menu 3-2 ADJUSTMENT).
4.9.1 Procedure
1. To avoid trouble with passengers, switch off the door operator (e.g. by DDO) and disable hall
calls (e.g. by CHCS).
2. Optionally: Move the car to the bottom landing via ERO (into LV zone).
3. The learn run is started in SVT menu ”Learn 4-1”:
Start Dialog
SWITCH TO NORMAL Safety chain detected OPEN,

<SET> aborts! must be closed to proceed.
LEARN RUN Start Press <GO ON> on the SVT.

<SET> aborts! >
Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 21 of 183
Num of Ldgs: 007 Press “1” if the indicated number of

CORRECT? y=1/n=0 landings (e.g. 7) is correct.
Press “0” to exit the learn run
and correct the parameter.
Press “1” if the indicated number of

Ldgs in 1LS: 001 landings in 1LS is correct.
CORRECT? y=1/n=0
Press “0” to exit the learn run
and correct the parameter.
Calibrate Hitch Visible only when Load Weigh

Type = 2:
LoadW? y=1/n=0
Press “1” if hitch load weighing
should be calibrated.
Press “0” if hitch load weighing calibration should be
maintained.
Switch to ERO Switch on ”ERO” on ERO-Box
To start learn- FIND BOTTOM LNDG

run press ENTER RUN: press ENTER Press <ENTER> on
or
Service Tool
Switch back to Switch back to ”NORMAL” on

NORMAL ERO-Box.
IF the car is inside 1LS but outside of a door zone:

Find Bottom Landing Run
FIND BOTTOM LDG, The car moves up, the “--“

moving up: -- changes to “DZ” whenever the
car is in a door zone.
IF the car is outside 1LS:

The car moves down, the “--“
FIND BOTTOM LDG, changes to the landing
moving down: --
number after the first vane is encountered in 1LS.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 22 of 183
BOTTM LDG: start The car has reached the bottom

learn? y=1/n=0 landing according to the
parameter “Landings in 1LS”.
IF the car is inside 1LS and inside of a door zone:

Learn Run
Learn active The car starts moving up.

CAR MOVES UP
L001 21065.9mm While moving up, the SVT display

Vane 249.8mm shows the last learned data:
Landing number (bottom = 0) and
position.
Vane length at this landing.
TABLE STORED IN Learn run was successful, new

E2PROM > landing table has been stored.
Press <GOON> on the SVT to
go to NORMAL operation.
HITCH LOADW CALI Visible only

DONE > when Load Weigh Type = 2
and HitchLw
calibration was confirmed before:
Calibration was successful, new values have been stored.
Otherwise: “FAILED “ is displayed and the old values are maintained.
Press <GOON> on the SVT to go to NORMAL operation.
LEARN RUN 4-1

<>
4.9.2 Faults during Learn Run

When a fault is detected during the learn run, a corresponding message is displayed. After
pressing <GOON>, the learn run is then aborted.
Fault display Description
Drive NOT in CAN The setup parameter Interface Type is not correct, should be a CAN
mode => abort > controller.
DRIVE NOT READY The drive is not yet ready to run. If this display appears for more than 1s
<SET> aborts! > the drive may be blocked by a fault.
No LS signals The CAN connection to the drive has been interrupted, no LS signal
=> abort > information has been received for >2s.
RUN IN PROGRESS Learn Run start is attempted while car is running.
=> abort >
SIG NOISE/BOUNCE Noise or excessive bouncing in hoistway signals (1/2LV, UIS, DIS).
=> abort >
PRS_SIG != 1VANE PRS sensors are on two vanes or on no vane when the actual learn run

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 23 of 183
=> abort > motion is about to start.
TRANSITN OVERDUE Sensor transition on/off the vane does not occur when expected.
=> abort >
DETECTED ## LDGs When car leaves 1LS, the number ## of encountered landings does not
in 1LS: abort > match the setup parameter
### LDGs before According to the setup parameter, the top landing (###-) was reached
2LS: abort > before 2LS.
INVAL PRS SIGNAL Pattern of active and inactive PRS sensors is not possible on 1 or 2 vanes
COMBI => abort > with the selected Vane Sensor Type.
1LS: ON->OFF->ON After leaving 1LS, the 1LS signal became active again => Gap in 1LS
gap => abort > magnet/vane or bouncing in 1LS signal.
2LS OFF->ON->OFF After entering 2LS, the 2LS signal became inactive again => Gap in 2LS
gap => abort > magnet/vane or bouncing in 2LS signal.
1LS/2LS OVERLAP! 1LS and 2LS inputs are active at the same time.
=> abort >
VANE GAP SHORT: The gap between two vanes of xxxx mm is too short for the selected
xxxxmm! abort > Vane Sensor Type.
LR ABORTED! The Learn Run was aborted by a non learn run error. Look in the event
see fault log > log for detailed information.
LR ABORTED The Learn Run was aborted by switching to ERO or TCI.
by ERO/TCI! >
4.9.3 Find Bottom Landing Run

The Find Bottom Landing run can be started via SVT menu 4-3 from any position in the hoistway.
It positions the car in the bottom landing, e.g. for starting a subsequent door check sequence run
(required by controller in CAN mode at installation time). In order to allow this run to establish
valid position, a successful learn run must have been executed before.
The user interaction during the Find Bottom Landing run and the preceding Start Dialog is
described above (see 0)
4.9.4 Viewing the Landing Table
The landing table can be viewed in SVT menu 4-2. It shows each landing position and the
learned vane length at each landing. The first landing is arbitrarily set to 10,000 mm. The display
will look as shown below:
L001 21065.9mm
Vane 249.8mm
4.10 Floor Level Adjustment

If the drive is being used with TCBC-type controller (see parameter Interface Type), then the
landing performance can be adjusted. Before adjusting, the hoistway signals should be verified
during an inspection run through the hoistway. The switching of the following signals should be
checked using the service tool menu 1-5 DISCRETES: UIS LV1 LV2 DIS 1LS 2LS UIB DIB.
After this test, the level performance can be adjusted. Move the car to a floor in the middle of the
hoistway. Check the floor level in the up and down direction. Stopping error can be reduced by
adjusting the parameter VaneBias (10) mm in menu 3-2 ADJUSTMENT. If the car is stopping
above the floor, then the value has to be reduced. Conversely, if the car is stopping below the
floor, then the value has to be increased. The nominal value for this parameter is 10, in which no
adjustment is applied.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 24 of 183
If the magnets are adjusted in the same manner at each floor, the car should stop correctly in
each landing, otherwise the magnets should be adjusted accordingly.
4.11 Start Jerk / Rollback Reduction
If discrete load weighing is being used, start jerk can be reduced by adjusting the parameters
Start Gain Ot PU, Start filt BW PU, Start Gain In PU in menu 3-2 ADJUSTMENT.
Increase the parameter until either the start jerk is acceptable or the machine starts to produce
noise at the start of the run. This parameter has two associated parameters SG Period sec and
SG Ramp Down sec to control the duration of the bandwidth velocity control and the rate at which
the nominal bandwidth is resumed respectively. Please see the figure below. A further reduction
of the start jerk is possible by upgrading to an analog load-weighing device.
Note: Acceptable start jerk performance may not be acceptable for any settings of the start gain
parameters when using an incremental encoder in a gearless system with discrete loadweighing.
A sine/cosine encoder can be used to get good start jerk performance with discrete loadweighing.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 25 of 183
5 Self-Commissioning Operation
5.1 Overview
The Self-Commissioning software functions are designed to automatically measure the induction
motor parameters and adjust the service tool parameters in the drive to achieve a properly tuned
drive/motor combination, with the correct magnetizing current, rotor time constant, and inertia
(note: inertia can be determined for PM motor applications as well). The benefit of self-
commissioning software is that it achieves this without the need to unrope the elevator, remove
the motor or employ special test equipment. The software requires four values from the motor
nameplate: Rated voltage, power, rpm, and frequency. All other parameters are computed or
measured by the drive to achieve correct elevator operation at the contract speed.
Self-commissioning tests are run in three stages:

• The first stage is the locked rotor tests, where the drive adjusts the current regulator and
measures the motor parameters. The motor does not turn during these tests, and the brake
is not lifted. This stage is required if the motor parameters are not known beforehand.
• The second stage is a fine-adjustment of the rotor time constant and magnetizing current, to
ensure that the rotor time constant and magnetizing current are set to correct values for
running at contract speed. The second stage requires the installer to command high speed,
multi-floor runs under control of the motion subsystem. It is important that the elevator reach
contract speed during these runs, and that the car be empty. To ensure consistent and
accurate measurements, all runs must be between the same two landings, e.g., from bottom
to top, or from floor 2 to 8, etc.
• The third stage of self-commissioning is the inertia adjustment. The operator requirements
for this stage are identical to those for the second, i.e., to command multi-floor runs under
control of the motion subsystem.
THE ONLY SELF COMMISSIONING TEST THAT CAN BE PERFORMED WITH A PM
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR IS THE INERTIA TUNING!!
If the only available data on the motor is the nameplate data, the complete set of self-
commissioning tests should be run. On new equipment installations, where the motor parameters
are factory-set, it is possible to run only the inertia adjustment.
The elevator runs during the second and third stage of self-commissioning may be commanded
using the service tool interface to the controller. It is also possible, and may be preferable, to use
the service tool to set up the controller to cycle the elevator up and down automatically. Allow for
a 15 second interval between runs, and make sure that the elevator reaches full contract speed
for at least 3-5 seconds during the run. The elevator controller may be set to ‘Inspection” to
temporarily halt the cycling, for example when it is time to save the service tool parameters (this
is further described in the step by step procedure).
The self-commissioning stages were designed to run in sequence or as standalone tests. Each
stage, however, relies on certain EEPROM parameters. These parameters should be obtained
either through self commissioning tests or entered into the EEPROM by the installer. For
example, the Fine-Tuning stage requires (Lσ), also known as the motor transient inductance, in
service tool parameter “Mtr Lsigma mH”‘ in menu M34. This value can either be computed from
locked rotor tests or, if known, entered manually by the installer. Either method is acceptable.
At the end of each self commissioning test, the user is given the opportunity to save the
determined parameters to EEPROM automatically or to abort without saving. The determined
parameters are available for inspection in menu M12 until the processor board is reset or the
drive powered down.
NOTE 1: Do not unplug the service tool from the drive during the self-commissioning tests. The
tests will abort when the SVT is reconnected, and all test data will be lost.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 26 of 183
NOTE 2: The drive service tool CANNOT be used to view dynamic displays such as current,
torque or motor voltage while the self tuning tests are in progress (see following note).
NOTE 3: To abort self-commissioning tests hit Module, Function or Set key on the service tool.
NOTE 4: The drive will NOT accept PTR from the controller while in self commissioning mode
unless it specifically asked for through the service tool during fine tuning and inertia
tests. You MUST exit the self commissioning mode (see section 5.4.8 below) to run
the elevator in normal, inspection or manual mode.
5.2 EEPROM parameters

The following is a list of all the EEPROM parameters determined by self commissioning (listed by
test):
Test Menu Parameters

Locked Rotor M31 Inertia kg-m2 (estimate)
M34 Rtr Time Const s, Rated Mag I A, Peak Mag I
A, Rated Trq I A, Rated Trq Nm, Mtr
Lsigma mH, Ld mH, Lq mH, R
Ohm.
Fine Tuning M34 Rtr Time Const s, Rated Mag I A, Peak Mag I
A, Rated Trq I A, Rated Trq Nm
Inertia M31 Inertia kg-m2
All other EEPROM parameters, such as limit current, drive rating, pretorque trim, etc, must be set
correctly as they are not self-tuned.
5.3 How do I do this ….
The following table is intended to help the user determine which self commissioning tests to run
based on the available motor and hoistway data.
Situation Tests to Run Steps to take

Modernization job, no data Locked Rotor Start with section 5.4.1. Stop before section
available except for motor 5.4.5.
nameplate data and duty
data. No controller
connected, only manual
mode elevator operation
required.
Modernization job, no data Locked Rotor, Start with section 5.4.1. Perform all self
available except for motor Fine Tuning, commissioning tests.
nameplate data and duty Inertia
data. Controller is
connected and operational
Have reasonable estimate Locked Rotor, Start with section 5.4.1. Perform all self
of motor parameters and Fine Tuning, commissioning tests.
current regulator Inertia
parameters but do not
know motor Lsigma
(transient inductance)
Have reasonable estimate Fine Tuning, Enter the following SVT parameters :
of motor parameters and Inertia M34 - Ld mH, Lq mH, R
current regulator Ohm, Number of Poles, Rtr Time

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 27 of 183
Situation Tests to Run Steps to take

parameters and have Const s, Rated Mag I A, Peak Mag I
reasonable estimate of A, Rated Trq I A, Rated Trq Nm,
motor Lsigma (transient Mtr Shft Pwr kW, Rtd Mtr Spd RPM,
inductance) and inertia. Rtd Mtr Ln-Ln V, Rtd Mtr Freq Hz,
Mtr Lsigma mH.
M31- enter your best guess for inertia.
Check that elevator runs in inspection or
manual mode. If it does not start with section
5.4.1, else start with section 5.4.5.
Elevator runs ok, but Inertia Enter your best guess for inertia in M31.
require better inertia Start with section 5.4.6.
estimate
5.4 Running Self-Commissioning Tests

5.4.1 Entering Auto Tune Mode
1. Use the SVT to access category M31 and hit the go-on key unti the parameter “Motor
Type” is displayed. Set the parameter to 901.
2. Use the SVT to access category M31 and hit the go-on key until the parameter “Self
Tune 0/1” is displayed. Set the parameter to 1.
3. Hit the go-on key to display the parameters:
Parameter Default Value
*LR Ampl KP/Ki PU 0.2
*LR Ampl RTC PU 0.35
Make sure that these parameters are set to their defaults. These parameters control the
amplitude of the test current. 0.2 corresponds to 20% of drive rated current.
4. Verify that ‘Motor Nameplate Data’ and ‘Number of Poles’ (see section 5.4.2) are entered
correctly.
5. Go to section 5.4.3 to perform the ‘Locked Rotor Test.’
5.4.2 Entering Motor Nameplate Data and Number of Poles.

1. Use the SVT to access category M34 and hit the go-on key to display the “Number of
Poles” parameter. Enter the number of poles in the motor. The number of poles in a
motor can be determined with the following formula :
 Rated _ frequency 
number _ of _ poles = floor 120 * 
 Rated _ RPM 
where Rated_frequency and Rated_RPM are the nameplate RPM speed and frequency
respectively. If number_of_poles results in a decimal number then round the
number down to the nearest even integer (4.11 would be entered as 4). Alternatively
you can use the following graph to look up the rated RPM and frequency and match it to
the closest ‘pole’ line:

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 28 of 183
RPM vs Frequency for different pole configurations
1900
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
RPM
900
800
700
600
500
400
4 Pole Machine
300
6 Pole Machine
200
8 Pole Machine
100
0
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64
Frequency (Hz)
2. Hit the go-on key until the parameter “Mtr Shft Pwr kW” is displayed. Enter the rated
power in kilowatts from the motor nameplate.
3. Hit the go-on key to display the “Rtd Mtr Spd RPM” parameter. Enter the rated speed in
rpm from the motor nameplate.
4. Hit the go-on key to display the “Rtd Mtr Ln-Ln V” parameter. Enter the rated motor line-
to-line rms voltage from the motor nameplate.
5. Hit the go-on key to display the “Rtd Mtr I Arms” parameter. If available, enter the rated
motor current from the motor nameplate. If not known, leave the parameter to its default
setting of zero.
6. Hit the go-on key to display the “Rtd Mtr Freq Hz” parameter. Enter the rated frequency
in Hz from the motor nameplate.
7. Hit the go-on key to display the “Mtr Lsigma mH” parameter. Enter the motor transient
inductance (Lsigma) if known or 0.001 if not known. The drive will determine this value
during the locked rotor phase of the tests.
8. Hit the go-on until the “Low Volt Op 0/1” parameter is displayed. Enter 1 if the rated
motor line to line voltage is less than or equal to 400 Vrms. Otherwise, set the parameter
to zero.
WARNING: THE PARAMETERS TO BE ENTERED ARE THE MOTOR NAMEPLATE

PARAMETERS. DO NOT ENTER THE CONTRACT PARAMETERS.
5.4.3 Initial Tests with Stationary Elevator (Locked Rotor Tests) –

INDUCTION MOTOR ONLY!!

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 29 of 183
1. Power down the drive.

2. Establish the safety chain at the drive according to correct local practices. This may
involve adding jumpers in the controller depending upon which controller is used. Do not
forget to remove these jumpers once the locked rotor tests are finished.
3. Power on the drive.
4. After the safety chain is established, the signal “SAF” must indicate 1 in SVT menu M15
for 422-based controllers. For CAN-based controllers, both UIB and DIB must indicate 1
in SVT menu M15.
5. Use the SVT and access menu M71. To start the test, hit ‘Go-On’ on the SVT. The drive
will now automatically tune the current regulators and measure the motor parameters.
During the tests, the drive will display its progress on the service tool screen.
6. When the tests are finished, the SVT will display ’Lckd Rotor Tests / Complete Hit >’. Hit
the go-on key to proceed.
7. The service tool will now display the data determined during the locked rotor test. To
save the data to EEPROM, hit SHIFT-ENTER (this can be done at any time while
vieweing the data). Otherwise hit the module, function or set keys to abort the test. If the
saving operation is aborted, the determined parameters will not be saved to EEPROM
but will be available for inspection in M12 (see section 5.4.7).
8. If a jumper was required to satisfy the safety chain in Step 2, power down the
drive and remove the jumper. If you need to power the drive down to remove jumpers,
first access M12 and write down the locked rotor test results as required in the data-
sheet. These results will not be displayed in M12 once you cycle power to the drive (of
course if you saved them to EEPROM, you can search for them in the regular service tool
tree).
5.4.4 Checking Motor Phasing

1. After the locked rotor tests, the elevator should move in manual mode or inspection
mode. Power up the drive, exit auto tune mode (see section 5.4.8) and check that the
elevator runs by using manual or inspection mode.
2. If the elevator fails to move and a motor overcurrent fault is logged, check the phasing of
the motor with the appropriate procedure. One such procedure is outlined in
[TIP1.1.12.0-1]
STOP HERE if you plan to run in manual mode only.
5.4.5 Motor Fine-Tuning Tests - INDUCTION MOTOR ONLY!!

1. If necessary, power on the drive. Ensure that the drive is in auto-tune mode see section
5.4.1
2. Disable hall calls, car calls and parking operations before proceeding. Also, disable
doors so that passengers cannot enter the car.
3. Make sure that the four correct motor nameplate parameters are entered in M34.
4. If the locked rotor tests were not run or the parameters obtained not saved, make sure
that the correct value of Lsigma (transient inductance) is entered in service tool
parameter “Mtr Lsigma mH” in menu M34.
5. Before starting the test, select two floors between which you want to run. Ensure that the
car is at the lower of the two floors (first requested run is up). If this is not the case, put
the drive in normal mode and move the car as necessary. Then re-enter auto tune mode
(see section 5.4.1)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 30 of 183
6. Access menu M72, and hit ‘go-on to start the test.

7. When prompted by the SVT, issue an up call through the controller. Then, When
prompted by the SVT, issue a down call through the controller.
OR - allow the elevator to cycle up and down while the drive collects data and adjusts the
SVT parameters (cycle the elevator between the two selected floors).
It is required that the car reach contract speed for 3-5 seconds during these runs,
and that the car be empty.
8. The last step will repeat several times (at least 4 cycles of up and down runs). A
minimum of three cycles is required to determine the rotor time constant. One additional
cycle is required to check the magnetizing current and determine the magnetizing
inductance. If the magnetizing current requires adjustment, the rotor time constant must
be re-checked, requiring additional up/down runs.
9. When the tests are finished, the SVT will display the results of the test. Hit the go-on key
to proceed. At any time the data can be saved by hitting SHIFT-ENTER.
10. To save the data to EEPROM hit SHIFT-ENTER. Otherwise hit the module, function or
set keys to abort the test. If the saving operation is aborted, the determined parameters
will not be saved to EEPROM but will be available for inspection in M12 (see section
5.4.7).
START HERE to run Inertia test only
5.4.6 Inertia Adjustment – Induction Motor or PM Synchronous Motor

(ONLY ACCEPTABLE TEST FOR PM SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR)
1. If necessary, power on the drive. Ensure that the drive is in auto-tune mode see section
5.4.1
2. Disable hall calls, car calls and parking operations before proceeding. Also, disable doors
so that passengers cannot enter the car.
3. Before starting the test, select two floors between which you want to run. Ensure that the
car is at the lower of the two floors (first requested run is up). If this is not the case, put
the drive in normal mode and move the car as necessary. Then re-enter auto tune mode
(see section 5.4.1)
4. Access SVT menu M73 and hit the ‘go-on’ key to start the test.
5. When prompted by the SVT, issue an up call through the controller. Then, when
prompted by the SVT, issue a down call through the controller.
OR - allow the elevator to cycle up and down while the drive collects data and adjusts the
INERTIA parameter (cycle the elevator between the two selected floors).
6. Last step will repeat several times (at least 2)

7. When the tests are finished, the SVT will display ‘Inertia Tuning / Complete Hit >’. Hit
the go-on key to proceed.
8. The service tool will now display ‘Hit Entr to Save’. To save the data to EEPROM hit
SHIFT-ENTER. Otherwise hit the module, function or set keys to abort the test. If the
saving operation is aborted, the determined parameter will not be saved to EEPROM but
will be available for inspection in M31 (see section 5.4.7).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 31 of 183
5.4.7 Parameter Display

1. Access SVT menu M12 to display parameters which were determined during the self-
commissioning tests.
2. Hit go-on or go-back to move back and forth between the different display parameters.
Please note that some parameters may be zero if the test has not been performed yet or
if the processor board was reset between tests.
5.4.8 Exiting Auto Tune Mode

1. Use the SVT to access M31 and hit the go-on key until the parameter “Self Tune 0/1” is
displayed. Set the parameter to 0.
5.5 Troubleshooting Notes
The following is a list of the most common problems encountered while self commissioning the drive.
Please refer to this list if there is a problem.
Symptom Possible Cause Steps to take

The locked rotor test will not The safety chain is not Repeat Step 2 in section 5.4.3.
start. established.
Locked rotor test aborts. Nameplate data is Verify that the motor nameplate data are
incorrect entered correctly. Re-run locked rotor test
(M71).
Also see note 1 at the end of Section 5.5.
Drive does not accept a run The SVT ‘Module’ key Re-run the test. Hitting the ‘Module’ key will
command from the controller has been hit. abort the self-commissioning test and put the
and no faults are declared. drive into shut-down mode.
The SVT was Re-run the test. Unplugging the service tool
unplugged during the has the same effect as hitting the ‘Module’
test and plugged back key.
in.
Fault: Inverter OCT Motor is phased Check motor phasing and re-run test.
Motor Overload improperly.
Motor nameplate data Check for errors in motor nameplate
is incorrect, or the parameter data M34. Specifically, make sure
elevator duty is greater that the data entered is the nameplate data
than the motor rating. and not the contract data (unless they are the
same). Also, verify that the car is empty
during tests.
Fault: Car is not empty The car is not empty or Check that the car is empty and/or the
the overbalance is overbalance and run the test again
wrong
Fault: PTR time out The user waited longer Start test over. The user has two minutes to
than two minutes to enter a car call and run the elevator or a fault
enter a PTR command will be logged.
from the controller
Fault : LR RTC is zero A serious problem with Restart locked rotor tests.
internal drive software Also see note 1 at the end of Section 5.5.
has occurred
Fault : FT Itrq not comp The torque current was Restart fine tuning tests.
not computed at the
end of fine tuning tests.
Possible problem with
magnetizing

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 32 of 183
Symptom Possible Cause Steps to take

inductance.
Warning : Run in wrong dir The car moved in the Run the car in the direction asked for by the
up direction when the service tool. It may be advantageous to
drive SVT asked for a restart the test.
down run or viceversa
Fault: Run is too short The run was too short Run the car between two floors that are
so that there was not farther apart so that the car reaches constant
enough time at speed. speed for at least 2 seconds.
The following faults can occur during locked rotor tests. The occurrence of any of these faults indicate a
serious problem with the drive and they should, in theory, never be observed:
Fault Possible Cause Steps to take

Kp Not Computed The cause of any of There is no action to be taken by the user.
Ki Not Computed these faults is a bad A fault of this nature should be reported to
Lsig Not Comptd feedback from the DSP Engineering
LR RTC Not Init This usually indicates a Also see note 1 at the end of Section 5.5.
LR RTC Not Comp severe problem.
The following warnings indicate that the locked rotor tests have taken longer to converge than usually
required. The usual course of action for these warnings is to complete the tests, save data to EEPROM
and try the fine tuning tests. If the obtained parameters are not too far off the actual parameters, the fine
tuning stage will recover and converge to the correct parameters. As a last resort, the parameters “MAX
Lr Ampl PU” can be increased from 0.2 to 0.25 and the tests run again.
.
Warning Possible Cause Steps to take
Kp did not conv Bad nameplate data. Finish the tests and save the
Ki did not conv Bad signal to noise obtained data to EEPROM. Fine tuning
LR RTC not conv ratio when getting data. will recover from slightly off locked rotor data.
The following faults indicate a serious problem with the calculation of the operating point for the motor
(the relationship between voltage, speed and frequency) during the final stage of locked rotor tuning.

Id & V Diverge Possible problems with To invoke an alternative calculation, hit
magnetizing or SHIFT-ENTER.
transient inductances -or-
calculated in previous Set “Rated mtr I Arms” (if known) and try to
tests. rerun entire locked rotor tests.
ID or iQ diverge Possible problems with To invoke an alternative calculation, hit
magnetizing or SHIFT-ENTER.
transient inductances -or-
calculated in previous Set “Rated mtr I Arms” (if known) and try to
tests. rerun entire locked rotor tests.
Op Pnt Not Found The nameplate data is Check nameplate data, rerun entire set of
not correct or there is a locked rotor tests.
problem with Also see note 1 at the end of Section 5.5.
magnetizing or

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 33 of 183

transient inductances
calculated in previous
tests.
Imag > Drive Rtd The nameplate data is Check nameplate data, rerun entire set of
not correct or there is a locked rotor tests.
problem with Also see note 1 at the end of Section 5.5.
magnetizing or
transient inductances
calculated in previous
tests.
The following faults indicate a problem in the convergence of the fine tuning or inertia tests. The fine
tuning and inertia tests perform up and down runs to gather data. One set of up and down runs is
considered one try. The number of tries (and therefore up and down runs) is limited because the tests
should converge fairly quickly. If these tests do not converge then there is probably a problem in the fine
tuning tests. The steps to take for these faults are difficult to determine until we get some more
experience.

FT RTC not conv Rotor time constant Restart fine tuning tests.
fine tuning took longer
than ten tries.
FnTune not conv The drive took longer Restart fine tuning tests.
than five rotor time
constant/magnetizing
current sets to fine
tune.
FT Id not conv Magnetizing current Restart fine tuning tests.
fine tuning took longer
than ten tries
Inertia not conv Inertia tuning took Restart inertia test.
longer than 10 tries
Note 1: Troubleshooting when Low Voltage Operation is Active

If the parameter “Low Volt Op 0/1” is set to 1 and the locked rotor test fails, try changing the parameter
“Low Volt Op 0/1” to 0 and repeating the locked rotor test. After the locked rotor tests, the “Low Volt Op
0/1” parameter should be set back to 1.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 34 of 183
1. Installation Data
Location :
Date :
Installer :
2. Hoistway Data
Duty Load : kg Machine (e.g. 18ATF) :
Duty Speed : m/s Rise : m
Gear Ratio : Sheave Diameter : m
Roping (1:1 or 2:1) : Guides (Slide/Roll) :
3. Drive Setup Data
M11 Drive App SCN : M31 Drive Type : Amps
M31 Rated rpm : rpm M31 AC Main Vrms : Vrms
If you already have parameters for this system, i.e. you are only testing the software or
you want to double check your parameters with self-commissioning complete the
following section with the existing parameters. If this is not the case then proceed
directly to the Motor Data Section
4. Existing Drive Parameters Affected By Self Commissioning
M31 Inertia kg-m2 : kg-m2 M34 Rtr Time Const s : s
M34 Rated Mag I A : A M34 Rated Trq I A : A
M34 Rated Trq Nm : N-m M34 Ld mH : mH
M34 R Ohm : Ohms M34 Lq mH mH

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 35 of 183
5. Motor Data (from nameplate - enter in SVT M34)
Manufacturer : Model No. :
M34 Mtr Shft Pwr kW : kW M34 Rtd Mtr Ln-Ln V : V
M34 Rtd Mtr Spd RPM : rpm M34 Rtd Mtr Freq Hz : Hz
M34 Rtd Mtr I Arms Arms M34 Low Volt Op 0/1 0/1
6. Self-Commissioning Process Data
Test M72 RTC Fine Tuning Test M73 Inertia Tuning
Length of Run : Length of Run :
# UP/DOWN runs : # UP/DOWN runs :
7. Self-Commissioned Parameter Values
M12 LR Motor L : mH M12 LR Motor R Ohm : ohm
M12 LR Lsig mH : mH M12 LR Rtc Re s : sec
M12 LR Rtc Im sec M12 LR Lphi Im mH
M12 LR Lphi Re mH : mH M12 LR Rated Mag I A : A
M12 LR Rated Trq I A : A M12 LR Rated Trq N-m
M12 LR Inertia kg- kg-m2
M12 Fine Tune RTC : S M12 Fine Tune Imag A : A
M12 Fine Tune Lphi : H M12 Fine Tune Itrq A : A
M31 Inertia kg-m2 : kg-m2 M34 Rated Trq Nm : N-m
M12 Fine Tune Volt V : V
8. Installer Comments
After self-commissioning, is the elevator performance OK? YES NO

If NO, what is wrong?
How difficult was self-commissioning to use? Easy 1 2 3 4 5 Hard
List any faults that occurred during Self-Commissioning:

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 36 of 183
6 Service Tool
The Service Tool (SVT) is the user's access to the subsystem software and is used to view and change
parameters in EEPROM, to view run-time data, and to examine the Event Log. The menu categories are
displayed in the following format:
MONITOR 1
<>
In this example, the user is currently in menu category 4 and has the choice of entering menu category
41 by either pressing 1 or by pressing the ENTER key sequence. Other menu categories are accessible
by pressing the GO ON key or by navigating with any of the following keys:
Key Example: Before Example: After

Description
Sequence Key Sequence Key Sequence
Resets the display to the main system
menu. This key (designated “M”)
followed by “4” (in 422 type systems; DRIVE SYSTEM
MODULE -
“2” for CAN systems) navigates to the <>
first category of the first-level drive
menu (see table on next page).
Resets the display to the first category
of the first-level drive menu (except MONITOR 1
FUNCTION -
when the display is at the system <>
menu).
Navigates up one level in the menu Duty Speed mm/s SETUP 3-1
SET
tree. 1780 <>
Scrolls forward through menu MONITOR 1 EVENT LOG 2
GO ON
categories. <> <>
SHIFT- Scrolls in reverse through menu EVENT LOG 2 MONITOR 1
GO BACK categories. <> <>
SHIFT- Navigates down one level in the menu MONITOR 1 STATUS 1-1
ENTER tree. <> <>
Navigates down one level in the menu
MONITOR 1 SETUP 3-1
1 through 9 tree according to the selected number
<> <>
(‘3’ is used as the example).
Clears one digit when entering a new Duty Load k Duty Load k
CLEAR
parameter value. 1000> 123XX 1000> 12XXX
Note: In CAN-based systems, the drive supports the ZKIP (Zero Knowledge Interactive Proof) concept
allowing remote SVT access from the drive’s SVT port to other components that require authentication
(e.g. GECB).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 37 of 183
6.1 Menu Tree

The following table shows the service tool menu tree for the drive subsystem.
System Level First Level Second Level Access

Menu Drive Menu Drive Menu Level
DRIVE SYSTEM 1 MONITOR 1-1 STATUS 1
1-2 MOTOR 1
1-3 MOTION 1
1-4 INVERTER 1
1-5 DISCRETES 1
1-6 METRICS 1
1-7 VANES 2
1-8 ENGINEERING 3
2 EVENT LOG 2-1 VIEW CURRENT 1
2-2 VIEW SAVED 1
2-3 CLEAR LOG 1
2-4 CLEAR BLOCK 1
2-5 RESET DSP 1
2-6 CLEAR COUNTS 2
3 SETUP 3-1 CONTRACT 2
3-2 ADJUSTMENT 1
3-3 BRAKE 2
3-4 MACHINE 2
3-5 PROFILE 2
3-6 FACTORY 2
4 LANDINGS 4-1 LEARN RUN 1
4-2 LANDG TABLE 2
4-3 FIND BOTLDG 1
5 TEST 5-1 FAN TEST 1
5-2 TURNOVR TST 1
5-3 BRAKETRQ TST 2
5-4 RESERVED -
5-5 SAFETY TEST 1
5-6 BUFFR/LOWPIT 1
5-7 OPT ARO TEST 2
5-8 BACKUP E2 2
5-9 RESTORE E2 2
6 ENGINEERING 6-1 ENG ADJUST 2
6-2 ENG TEST 3
6-4 I2C EEPROM 2
6-5 BLANK EEPROM 3
7 SELF-COMM 7-1 LOCKED ROTOR 2
7-2 FINE TUNING 2
7-3 INERTIA 2
8 TEST 2 8-1 NTSD TEST 1

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 38 of 183
6.2 Monitor Menu

The Service Tool can be used to display parameters, which are either measured values of external
quantities or values that are computed internally. The service tool does partial updates to the display
every 40ms. An overview of all parameters is shown below.
Display Text Access LR Rated Mag I A SELF 2

Visibility
Level LR Rated Trq I A SELF 2
1-1 STATUS LR Rated Trq Nm SELF 2
NORMAL IDLE UP ALL 1 LR Inertia kg-m2 SELF 2
Regen 15A Ver 3 ALL 2 Fine Tune RTC s SELF 2
Package Partnum UD/LVD 2 Fine Tune Imag A SELF 2
Package s/n ALL 2 Fine Tune Lphi H SELF 2
DCPB Partnum UD/LVD 2 Fine Tune Itrq A SELF 2
DCPB s/n ALL 2 Fine Tune Volt V SELF 2
LVD_CB Partnum ALL 2 1-3 MOTION
LVD_CB s/n ALL 2 Vel: Ref Fbk ALL 2
Drive App SCN ALL 1 Pos: Fbk Target CAN 2
Drive App CRC ALL 1 Fehler! 2
Primary Ldr SCN ALL 1 Verweisquelle
Primary Ldr CRC ALL 1 CAN
konnte nicht
FPGA Version ALL 1 gefunden werden.
Micro Version UD/LVD 2 ESTOP @ mm/s -> ALL 1
CAN ICD type CAN 2 BrkDelay BrkStop ALL 2
Hitch LoadW SCN CAN+ 2 RopeSlip TotSlip CAN 1
LW2 BLOn Max Min Act ALL 1
UCM-EN LIB SCN CAN and 2 BLOffMax Min Act ALL 1
UCM-EN Pos: DTG Start CAN 2
on/off=1 EncPulse RPM ALL 2
es MONITOR_UCM CAN+ 2 PG: Acc SD CAN 2
UCM-EN LWabs:kg % CAN 1
on/off=1 LWimbal:kg % ALL 2
Clock ALL 1 LW: Fbk % Adj % DLW 2
1-2 MOTOR BeltCmp:Iq A CAN 2
Motor: RPM ALL 1 BeltCmp:Slp mA/m CAN 2
Mtr:Arms Vrms ALL 1 BeltCmp:Offset A CAN 2
BrkTrq:%Load Iq BTT 2 Rllbck: mm Num CAN 1
BT/kgm:Rate Ref BTT 2 RbTrgt: mm Num CAN 2
P(m) m/m A V ALL 1 Vel Entering DZ CAN 1
I% IA IR% IRA JIS 2 Braking Dist mm ALL 2
PwrFS(.1Kw) Pwr% CAN 2 HitchLw: Empty: CAN 2
Mtr: Hz kW ALL 1 and
Mtr: Id Iq ALL 1 LW2
Mtr: Vd Vq ALL 2 HitchLwSensor: CAN 2
Lrt: Ld Lq mH PM 2 and
Lrt:L min/max mH PM 2 LW2
LR Motor L mH SELF 2 PT LdT Iref Ld% CAN 2
LR Motor R Ohm SELF 2 1-4 INVERTER
LR Lsig mH SELF 2 Fehler! 1
LR Rtc Im s SELF 2 Verweisquelle
CNV
LR Rtc Re s SELF 2 konnte nicht
LR Lphi Im mH SELF 2 gefunden werden.
LR Lphi Re mH SELF 2 DC Link Vdc ALL 1
DBR duty cycle % LVD 2
Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 39 of 183
Ac/Dc cal fctr % LVO 2 Runs Since Event ALL 1

Cnv:Vrms Arms ALL 2 Max AC Main Vrms CNV 2
Cnv: Id Iq ALL 2 Max HeatSnkTmp C ALL 2
Temp:Cnv Inv CNV 1 Max DC Bus V ALL 1
Temp: Inv ALL 1 Max Motor Arms ALL 2
Temp: Pcb UD/LVD 1 Max Cnv Arms CNV 2
Fan Duty % ALL 2 Cap Time In Use ALL 2
Fehler! 2 Fan Time In Use ALL 2
Verweisquelle Tot. Time In Use ALL 2
CNV
konnte nicht Metric E2 Writes ALL 2
gefunden werden. Event E2 Writes ALL 2
Inv BW nominl Hz ALL 2 Position @pwroff CAN 1
Inv BW dshft1 Hz ALL 2 OMU Prohibited ALL 2
Inv BW dshft2 Hz ALL 2 LW % @pwroff CAN 1
Max I Reg Frq Hz ALL 2 SSO Active Count SSO 1
Brake Current A IBRK 1 SSO SuccessCount SSO 1
Battery Volts V BAT 1 1-7 VANES
Brake Cmd Duty % ALL 2 SlipMax mm ldg h CAN 2
BkCur:Ref Fbk Brk I reg 2 SlipRateMax mm/h CAN 2
Brk Vdc Fbk V OVF 2 Slip Mitigation CAN 2
1-5 DISCRETES RestTime now|max CAN 2
PTR RTR LB BL ALL 1 PrsSpikesFilterd CAN 2
DL DF SAS ALL 1 last SpikeLength CAN 2
BS1 BS2 BY BST ALL* 1 lastDeviation CAN 2
BS1 2 3 4 5 GDCB2 1 lastCorrection CAN 2
SX DBD SNO SAF ALL 1 avgDevInRun CAN 2
MAN MUP MDN 422 1 avgCorrInRun CAN 2
MX PX DX BX ALL 1 maxDevInRun @ldg CAN 2
UP DN RG DS ALL 1 maxCorInRun @ldg CAN 2
UIS LV1 LV2 DIS CAN 1 Offset UIS 0.1mm CAN 2
FLR NCF CTF ATF CAN 1 Offset 1LV 0.1mm CAN 2
1LS 2LS UIB DIB CAN 1 Offset 2LV 0.1mm CAN 2
SHK BAT EAR BT JIS 1 Offset DIS 0.1mm CAN 2
RLV SUS BTT BTM JIS 1 LS1 length mm CAN 2
MOC DWS CZO FAN ALL 1 LS2 length mm CAN 2
UDX ETS SSB OEN OVF 1 LS length min mm CAN 2
RSW PFL ALL 1 1-8 ENGINEERING
DS DS1 DS2 FLR ALL 2 Test Variable 1 ALL 3
UPS DBRFehler! 1 Test Variable 2 ALL 3
Verweisquelle SMART Test Variable 3 ALL 3
konnte nicht DBR Test Variable 4 ALL 3
gefunden werden. Test Variable 5 ALL 3
SSX SMG SR1 JIS 1 Test Variable 6 ALL 3
AR1/2 CrF CrS OARO 1 CPU:Max% Avg% ALL 3
SLV RCF LV1 LV2 CAN 1 1ms% 10ms% 40ms% ALL 3
OCB S1F BYM LVD 1 Cnv% Inv% All% ALL 3
SOP LV1 LV2 JIS 1 E2 Load Time ms ALL 3
FLR MFR ARC SCR JIS 1 Stack Used Max% ALL 3
1-6 METRICS Vel Scale mm/s ALL 3
ALWA_DISPLAY ALWA 1 Drv I Scl Rated ALL 3
Flight Time ALL 1 Mag Pos Err eDeg ALL 3
Flight Length mm ALL 1 MagPos /LRT eDeg ALL 3
Number of Runs ALL 1 Reactor I Arms CNV 3
Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 40 of 183
Inert used kg-m2 ALL 3 VTE MaxDevFrmNom CAN 3

VTE Parameters CAN 3 VTE MaxResidl SE CAN 3
VTE Dtbc:est mea CAN 3 VTE MaxResidl OE CAN 3
VTE Dbc:HyAcLgLd CAN 3 BSLP 3Margin mm CAN 3

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 41 of 183
6.2.1 Display Format

The display menu can show 1, 2, or 4 variables at the same time. The display will look like the
following when one parameter is displayed:
Drive App SCN
AAA30924CAA
When two parameters are displayed:

Mtr:Arms Vrms
32.0 500.0
When four parameters are displayed:

PTR RTR LB BL
1 1 1 1
6.2.2 Display Parameter Visibility

Some of the display parameters are not always visible in the SVT. The configurations under
which the parameters are visible are given in the following tables in the visibility column. The
legend for that column is given below:
Abbreviation Visibility
ALL All configurations.
422 Only if Interface Type = 0
JIS Only for “JIS Function” = 1
or 416G, 428G or 460G drives .
422_JIS Only if Interface Type = 2 or 3
CAN Only if Interface Type = 1
eI2C Only if drive uses powerboards with
enhanced I2C EEPROM storage capability
LW1 Only if Load Weigh Type = 1
LW2 Only if Load Weigh Type = 2
IBRK Only if internal brake current feedback is
supported in the drive hardware
BAT Only if battery mode
PM Only if PM motor
SELF Only if Auto Tune = 1
DLW Only if Load Weigh Type = 3
ALWA Only if ALWA Config = 1
LVO Only when Low Voltage Operation active
OVF Only for 428 and 460 drives
OVF_BRK Only for 428G and 460G drives with Brake
control by “BCM present 0/1 = 1”
OARO Only if Optimized ARO enabled.
BTT Only if Brake Torque test active
JIS_CAN Only for “JIS Function” = 1
And “Interface Type = 1”
Except OVF412RCR drive
CNV Only for drives with converter
LVD Only for LVD (Low Voltage drives)
GDCB2 Only for GDCB2 drives
SSO Visible only when smooth stop feature is

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 42 of 183
enabled
UD/LVD Only visible with UD or LVD

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 43 of 183
6.2.3 1-1 STATUS

SVT Display Description
NORMAL IDLE UP Motion Command Mode (cccccc)
<RSC UP> 00 INVAL - Invalid drive parameter setup
NO_RUN - No run command
NORMAL - Drive waits for a run command
cccccc llllll dd from TCBC-type controller.
<ttt yy> ff RELEVEL - Relevel run
ERO - Electrical Recall Operation
CORR - Correction Run
RESCUE - Rescue Run
LEARN - Learn Run
MRO - Manual Rescue Operation
TCI - Top of Car Inspection
MCSS - Run command from MCSS-type controller
DAT - Run command from Data Acquisition Tool
Motion Logic State (llllll)
INIT - Initialization RTR - Ready to Run
PWR_DN - Power Down LF_BRK - Lift Brake
PRECHG - Precharge RUN - Running
SHUTDN – Shutdown DECEL - Stopping
NO_SAF - Wait For Safety DR_BRK – Drop Brake
IDLE - Idle BRK_TST - Brake Test
PTR - Prepare to run
Car Direction (dd)
UP - Up direction
DN - Down direction
-- - No direction
Motion Command from TCBC-type controller (tttt)
<WT - WAIT, the drive waits for the next run command
<TCI - Top of Car Inspection
<ERO - Electrical Recall Operation
<COR - Correction Run
<RSC - Rescue Run
<GOTO - Normal run to floor number
<REL - Releveling
Commanded Direction (yyy)
UP> - Up direction
DN> - Down direction
ST> - Stop
EN> - Enable
Current Floor (ff)
Displays the current floor of the car

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 44 of 183
Regen 15A Ver 3 1st line: Currently selected drive type:
400V/ 15A Regen 10A Ver 3 - 10A Regenerative UD (Ultra Drive) (eI2C)
Regen 10A Ver 3.1 - 10A Regenerative UD for LVA India (eI2C)
Regen 15A Ver 3 - 15A Regenerative UD (Ultra Drive) (eI2C)
LVD 110A Ver 4 - 110A LVD (Low Voltage Drive) (eI2C)
LVD 160A Ver 4 - 160A LVD (Low Voltage Drive) (eI2C)
2nd line: indicates max. line voltage and max. output current.
Note: (eI2C): auto-adjusted; for drives with eI2C EEPROM

storage capabilities.
If drive type auto-adjusting fails then an error
message will be displayed instead:
Package setting
undefined
Package Partnum Only for UD/LVD drives.
KAA21310AAX2 Package part number (example).
If the EEPROM is unreadable or if the stored string is non-ASCII then a row
of stars are displayed instead of the serial number.
Package s/n Package serial (barcode) number (example)
244629000003 If the EEPROM is unreadable or if the stored string is non-ASCII then a row
DCPB Partnum Only for UD/LVD drives.
st
KAA26800ABS2 1 line: Name of power board 1
DCPB - for all UD (Ultra Drive) types
LVD_PB - for LVD (Low Voltage Drive) power board
nd
2 line: Partnumber of this board (example).
st
DCPB s/n 1 line: Name of power board 1
244629000003 DCPB - for all UD (Ultra Drive) types
LVD_PB - for LVD (Low Voltage Drive) power board
nd
2 line: serial (barcode) number of this board (example).
st
LVD_CB Partnum 1 line: Name of control board (LVD only):
GAA26800PP1 LVD_CB - for LVD
nd
2 line: Partnumber of this board (example).
of stars are displayed instead of the part number.
st
LVD_CB s/n 1 line: Name of control board (LVD only):
244629000003 LVD_CB - for LVD
nd
2 line: Serial (barcode) number of this board (example).
Drive App SCN Software version number (see software release document)
AAA31400AAA
Drive App CRC Software CRC32 checksum (see software release document)
8FDBAC6B

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 45 of 183
Primary Ldr SCN Primary Loader software version number (see software release document).
AAA31409AAA
Primary Ldr CRC Primary Loader software CRC32 checksum (see software release
8FDBAC6B document).
FPGA Version FPGA version number.
2
Micro Version Version number of the Brake and I/O firmware.
2
CAN ICD type Shows the ICD version the drive’s query at power up has determined for
10 use in the OPB interface to the controller.
1: “Legacy” interface (no ABL nor ARO, pos retention SPBC)
10: Supports ABL, pos retention via GECB or SPBC (no ARO)
11: ICD10 + TCI limit in drive + hitch LW
Hitch LoadW SCN SCN of Hitch Load Weighing Device
UCM-EN LIB SCN Software version number of the TÜV certified library module implementing
G1130879AAA the UCM-EN functionality.
es MONITOR_UCM Unintended Car Motion Monitoring:
dw DFC DBP
UCM Monitoring State (uuuuuuuuuuuu)
NO_UCM_CHECK - UCM monitor inactive, leaving DZ will not cause
ee uuuuuuuuuuuu blockage
ww fff bbb MONITOR_UCM - UCM monitor active, leaving DZ will cause
blockage
UCM_FAULT! - UCM blockage active
Safety Chain (SFC) signals sent by GECB:
SFC status before door chain: ES signal (ee)
es - Safety Chain closed in before door chain (=“ES
switch inactive”)
ES - Safety Chain open before door chain
-- - signal unknown (e.g. CAN msg missing)
SFC between landing and car door switches: DW (ww)
DW - Safety Chain closed at end of hoistway door chain
dw - Safety Chain open at end of hoistway door chain
SFC after car door switches: DFC (fff)
DFC - Safety Chain closed at end of door chain
dfc - Safety Chain open at end of door chain
State of Door Bypass: DBP (bbb)
DBP - Door Bypass closed
dbp - Door Bypass open
Clock Time since POR.
Format: DAYS:HOURS:MIN:SEC:10MSEC.
6.2.4 1-2 MOTOR

Motor: RPM RPM - Motor speed as measured by the encoder (rpm)
Mtr:Arms Vrms Arms - Motor current (Arms)

Vrms - Motor voltage (Vrms)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 46 of 183
BrkTrq:%Load Iq This monitor is for “Brake maintained torque”.
%Load - Set parameter in percent
Iq - q-axis motor current vector (Iq_reference) (Arms)
BT/kgm:Rate Ref This monitor is for “Brake maintained torque”.
Rate - Brake maintained torque of 100% load (kgm)
Ref - Torque reference for Brake Maintain Test
"P(m) m/m A V" P(m) - Running distance by the encoder (m)
m/m - Velocity feedback as measured by the encoder (m/min)
A - Motor current (Arms)
V - Motor voltage (Vrms)
I% IA IR% IRA I% - Displays the value of “Inv I Limit %”
I A - Displays effective current by “Inv I Limit %”.
IR% - Displays the value of “Inv ReLe Ilimit%”
IRA - Displays effective current by “ Inv ReLe Ilimit%”
PwrFS(.1Kw) Pwr% This data is used for regen CAN message publication.
PwrFS – Full scale power, in units of 0.1kW
Pwr% - instantaneous convereter power, as a percentage of the full scale
value.
Mtr: Hz kW Hz - Motor frequency (Hz)
kW - Motor power (kW)
Mtr: Id Iq Id - d-axis motor current vector (A)
Iq - q-axis motor current vector (A)
Mtr: Vd Vq Vd - d-axis motor voltage vector (V)
Vq - q-axis motor voltage vector (V)
Lrt: Ld Lq mH Motor d-axis and q-axis inductance estimates based upon the LRT result.
This can be used as a rough estimate for current regulator tuning.
Lrt:L min/max mH Locked rotor test minimum and maximum inductance estimate as a function
of rotor perimeter.This can be utilized to asses the quality of the locked
rotor test.
LR Motor L mH Motor inductance (proportional gain of current regulators) determined
during self commissioning locked-rotor tests
LR Motor R Ohm Motor resistance (integral gain of current regulators) determined during self
commissioning locked-rotor tests
2
LR Lsig mH Motor Transient Inductance (L1 –Lm /L2) determined during self
LR Rtc Im s Rotor time constant (L2/R2) determined using the imaginary impedence
during self commissioning locked-rotor tests
LR Rtc Re s Rotor time constant (L2/R2) determined using the real impedence during self
2
LR Lphi Im mH Effective magnetizing inductance (Lm /L2) determined using the imaginary
impedence during self commissioning locked-rotor tests
2
LR Lphi Re mH Effective magnetizing inductance (Lm /L2) determined using the real
impedence during self commissioning locked-rotor tests
LR Rated Mag I A Magnetizing current determined during self commissioning locked-rotor
tests
LR Rated Trq I A Torque current that produces motor rated torque. Determined during self
LR Rated Trq Nm Motor torque produced at the rated torque current and rated magnetizing
current. Determined during self commissioning tests
LR Inertia kg-m2 Rotating inertia of elevator system referred to the motor shaft. Determined
during self commissioning locked rotor test
Fine Tune RTC s Final value of rotor time constant (L2/R2). Determined during self
commissioning fine-tuning tests

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 47 of 183
Fine Tune Imag A Final value of magnetizing current. Determined during self-commissioning
fine-tuning tests
2
Fine Tune Lphi H Final value of effective magnetizing inductance (Lm /L2). Determined during
self commissioning fine-tuning tests
Fine Tune Itrq A Final value of motor torque current. Determined during self commissioning
fine-tuning tests
Fine Tune Volt V Motor voltage at end of constant-speed portion of elevator down run.
Parameter determined during self commissioning
6.2.5 1-3 MOTION

Vel: Ref Fbk Ref - Velocity reference dictated by MCSS or the drive’s internal profile
generator
Fbk - Velocity feedback as measured by the encoder (mm/s).
Pos: Fbk Target Fbk - Position feedback measured by the encoder (mm).
Target - Position target (mm).
ToTgt Over T200 ToTgt - Distance to target [mm], positive when overshooting, negative
when landing short (independent of up/down).
Over - Max overshoot [mm] beyond target.
T200 - Time for stopping phase [ms] from vel ref=200mm/s to brake
dropped.
ESTOP @ mm/s -> This SVT display shows the velocity (mm/s) and the next 2 displays show
the slip distance (mm) of the most recent ESTOP. This information can be
used for evaluating dynamic traction of an elevator. The values are reset by
POR but not by subsequent runs without ESTOPs.
BrkDelay BrkStop BrkDelay - mm travelled from last ESTOP to first feedback of brake
dropped (first BS, I_brake < I_hold)
BrkStop - mm travelled by sheave from first feedback of brake dropped
to complete stop
RopeSlip TotSlip RopeSlip - mm of rope slip after last ESTOP, slipped while sheave moved
through dropped brake and after sheave stop. This value is
valid only with valid current floor and after the run following the
ESTOP is completed, not directly after the ESTOP.
TotSlip - Magnitude of total mm car motion after last ESTOP,
TotSlip =| BrkDelay + BrkStop + RopeSlip| .
Assumes RopeSlip=0 for invalid RopeSlip.
BLOn Max Min Act This measures the brake delay time from “Lift Brake ON” to “Picked Brake
switch”. (Requested function for JIS field)
Max – Maximum Brake delay time after POR
Min – Minimum Brake delay time after POR
Act – The measured time at previous run
BLOffMax Min Act This measures the brake delay time from “Lift Brake OFF” to “Dropped
Brake switch”. (Requested function for JIS field)
Max – Maximum Brake delay time after POR
Min – Minimum Brake delay time after POR
Act – The measured time at previous run
Pos: DTG Start DTG - Actual distance to go to target (mm)
Start - Starting position at beginning of run (mm)
EncPulse RPM EncPulse – Encoder counts (limited to 0…65535)
RPM – Motor RPM
PG: Acc SD Acc - Acceleration reference from profile generator (mm/sec^2).
SD - Stopping distance from profile generator (mm).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 48 of 183
LWabs:kg % kg - The absolute in-car load in Kilograms
% - The absolute in-car load in percent of duty load.
LWimbal:kg % kg - The imbalance load weight in Kilograms
% - The imbalance load in percent of duty load.
LW: Fbk % Adj % Fbk: - Displays the load weighing feedback from the discrete load weighing
device
Adj: - Displays the actual load weighing used for pretorquing prior to the
run.
BeltCmp:Iq A This is the additional current (A) that is added to the pretorque value to
compensate for belt and traveling cable imbalance. This value is updated at
the beginning of each run and depends upon the car position in the
hoistway. It is calculated using two compensation parameters that are
determined during the learn run (the next two parameters).
BeltCmp:Slp mA/m This parameter is the variation of torque current per meter of hoistway due
to belt and traveling cable imbalance. This value is determined during the
learn run. If the learned value is out of range, the following fault is logged:
518 BeltCmp . The learned value can be overridden using the parameter:
Belt CmpSlp mA/m
BeltCmp:Offset A This parameter is half of the difference of the torque current during the
constant speed portion of the run near the bottom and near the top of the
hoistway. This value is determined during the learn run. If the learned value
is out of range, the following fault is logged: 518 BeltCmp . The learned
value can be overridden using: Belt Cmp Off A
Rllbck: mm Num mm - Amount of rollback in millimeters
Num - The number of rollbacks in the last 40 runs.
RbTrgt: mm Num mm - Amount of overshoot in millimeters
Num - The number of overshoots in the last 40 runs.
Vel Entering DZ This parameter is used to support the TUV handover tests in which it is
demonstrated that the car speed does not exceed a certain value when
entering the door zone. This parameter displays the velocity in mm/sec
when the car enters each door zone. The value is reset at the beginning of
each run. See Section 6.8.2 for more details regarding Turnover Tests.
Braking Dist mm This parameter is used to support the TUV handover tests in which the
braking distance of one brake shoe is tested. This parameter displays the
estimated linear distance in mm due to sheave rotation from the moment
either of the brake switches indicates a brake has dropped to the moment
when the sheave velocity is less than the stopping criteria, 5 mm/sec. The
parameter is always calculated regardless of operating mode and is reset at
the beginning of each run. See Section 6.8.2 for more details regarding
Turnover Tests.
HitchLw: Empty: HitchLw: The value received from the hitch load weighing device. The unit
is kg. During a run the last value received during the last stop is
displayed. If no value is received, a 0 is displayed.
Empty: The value expected from the hitch load weighing device for empty
car.This value depends on the hoistway position and on the hitch
load weighing calibration. The calibration is done during a learn
run. It can be checked or modified by the engineering adjust
parameters.
HitchLwSensor: The 8 sensor inputs of the Hitch Load Weighing device can be individually
checked. The sum of these 8 values must be the “HitchLw“ value above.
Every sensor value is displayed sequentially for 2 seconds. The first
number is the sensor number (0...7), the second one is the value in [kg].
Note: In some case two sensors can be wired in parallel to one hardware
input.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 49 of 183
PT LdT Iref Ld% PT (A) – Pre-Torque data of Inverter current

Ldt (A) – Pre-Torque data with Load Weighting data
Iref (A) – Inverter Iq reference
Ld% - Load Weighting data %
6.2.6 1-4 INVERTER

AC Input Vrms Measured AC main input voltage (Vrms)
DC Link Vdc Measured DC bus voltage (V)
DBR duty cycle % Applicable to LVD only.
This displays the Dynamic Braking Transistor on time in terms of
percentage of time. In other words this is the percentage of time where dc
bus voltage is put across the DBR (Dynamic Braking Resistor).
Ac/Dc cal fctr % This parameter indicates the degree of consistency between the voltage
measurements from the dc bus and the ac line sensors for a prolonged
drive idle time the dc bus is charged. 100% means mathematically that √2 *
(Inp:Vrms) = Vdc ( Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden
werden.). Note that 100% does not mean that they individually consistant
with a truly calibrated voltage measurement device.
This parameter is not visible if low voltage operation (Low Volt Op 0/1)
is turned off.
Cnv:Vrms Arms Cnv: - Converter voltage command (Vrms)
Arms - measured AC main input current (Arms)
Cnv: Id Iq Id - Measured d-axis converter current vector (A)
Iq - Measured q-axis converter current vector (A)
Temp:Cnv Inv Inv - Measured Inverter IGBT or heatsink temperature (C)
Cnv - Measured Converter IGBT or heatsink temperature (C)
Temp: Inv Measured Inverter IGBT or heatsink temperature (C)
Temp: Pcb Temeperature indicated by the temperature sesnsor on the Ultra drive PCB.
Fan Duty % Fan - PWM duty command for the fan (%).
Cnv BW Hz Target bandwidth of converter current regulator (hertz), used for tuning the
current regulators.
Inv BW nominl Hz Target bandwidth of inverter current regulator (hertz), used for tuning the
current regulators.
Inv BW dshft1 Hz Target bandwidth of inverter current regulator (hertz) during PWM
downshift, used for tuning the current regulators.
Inv BW dshft2 Hz Target bandwidth of inverter current regulator (hertz) during PWM double
downshift, used for tuning the current regulators.
Max I Reg Frq Hz Inverter and converter current regulator frequency (hertz).
Note: Applicable only if resp. current regulator is available.
Brake Current A When the internal brake module is used, this is the current to the brake
measured in (A). Active only when setup parameter Brk Cnt Type 0-3
is set to 2 or 3.
Battery Volts V Voltage of the battery during ARO(EN) operation.
Brake Cmd Duty % Brake - PWM duty command for the Brake (%).
BkCur:Ref Fbk Ref - Brake crrent command (A)
Fbk - measured brake input current. (A)
Brk Vdc Fbk V Vdc - Measured brake DC bus voltage (V)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 50 of 183
6.2.7 1-5 DISCRETES

PTR RTR LB BL PTR - prepare to run command from MCSS
RTR - ready to run status from drive
LB - lift brake command from MCSS
BL - brake lifted status from drive
DL DF SAS DL - drive torque limit has been reached
DF - drive fault has been detected
SAS - drive stop and shutdown has occurred
BS1 BS2 BY BST BS1 - brake switch 1 (see parameter: Brk Sw Type 0-7)
BS2 - brake switch 2 (see parameter: Brk Sw Type 0-7)
BY* - BY relay feedback (0-dropped/1-picked)
BST* - brake status feedback (0-dropped/1-picked)
*not visible when when setup parameter Brk Cnt Type 0-3 is set to 1, 2
or 3.
BS1 2 3 4 5 Visible only for GDCB2 drives.
BS1-5 - logical state of all 5 brake switch inputs, (0-dropped/1-picked)
Note: BS inputs configured for a static signal (no BS) show “0” for
the expected signal
SX DBD SNO SAF SX - command to pick S1 and S2 relays (0-drop/1-pick)
DBD - active if normally-closed contacts of S1, S2
BY1 and BY2 relays are closed
SNO - normally-open contact of S1relay (0-dropped/1-picked)
SAF - safety chain input to drive (0-inactive/1-active)
MAN MUP MDN MAN - manual mode input to drive (0-inactive/1-active)
MUP - manual mode up command to drive (0-inactive/1-active)
MDN - manual mode down command (0-inactive/1-active)
MX PX DX BX MX - command to pick main contactor (0-drop/1-pick)
PX - command to pick precharge relay (0-drop/1-pick)
DX - command to pick discharge relay (0-drop/1-pick)
BX - drive command to pick brake relay (0-drop/1-pick)
UP DN RG DS UP - car moving up
DN - car moving down
RG - motor is regenerating (0=motoring/1-regenerating)
DS - PWM frequency is downshifted to half the nominal frequency.
UIS LV1 LV2 DIS UIS - Relevel UP sensor
LV1 - Door zone 1 sensor
LV2 - Door zone 2 sensor
DIS - Relevel DOWN sensor
FLR NCF CTF ATF FLR - Current Floor
NCF - Next Committable Floor
CTF - Target Floor
ATF - Accepted Target Floor
1LS 2LS UIB DIB 1LS - Bottom Terminal Zone
2LS - Top Terminal Zone
UIB - Up Inspection Button
DIB - Down Inspection Button
SHK BAT EAR BT Applicable only when Interface Type = 2 or 3.
SHK - Start / Stop shock detection
BAT - Battery mode (B_MODE)
EAR - Automatic Recovery mode for Earthquake operation
BT - Permit of “Brake Maintenance Test” from MCSS

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 51 of 183
RLV SUS BTT BTM Applicable only when Interface Type = 2 or 3.
RLV - Relevel mode from MCSS
SUS - Suspend Failed Drive. This is required for future option with
Tandem drive operation, like Skyway drives.
BTT - Toqrue mode of “Brake Maintenance Test”
BTM - Log mode of “Brake Maintenance Test”
MOC DWS CZO FAN MOC - temperature input (0-inactive/1-active)
DWS - Inverter downshift mode (0-nomal/1-downshift)
CZO - CZ_NO input (0- inactive/1-active)
FAN - command to pick fan relay (0-drop/1-pick)
UDX ETS SSB OEN UDX - command to UDX relay (0-drop/1-pick)
ETS - command to ETSC (0-drop/1-pick)
SSB - command to SSC (0-drop/1-pick)
OEN - command to PWM output eneble (0-drop/1-pick)
RSW PFL RSW - Line reactor thermal switch is open
PFL - Drive power supply is indicating imminent power failure.
DS DS1 DS2 FLR DS - State of DS Sensor input
DS1 – State of DS1
DS2 – State of DS2
FLR - Current floor
See “TwoStepSpeed 0/1” for more information.
UPS DBR UPS* - UPS prohibits energy recovering: Smart DBR required
DBR* - Overheat switch of external Smart DBR unit
*only visible for Interface Type = 1 and DBR Mode 0-3 > 0
SSX SMG SR1 SSX - Send “S1,S2 Relay check” to MCSS
SMG - Sends “Magnet Position Known” to MCSS
SR1 - SR1 input 0-inactive / 1-active(picked)
AR1/2 CrF CrS R1/2: The status of AR1 and AR2 contacts where 1 means that ARO
initiated via energized the contacts
CrF: Charger fault where 1 means faulty charger, flashing means
temperature out of range or sensor not connected
CrS: Charger Status where 1 means fast charging and flashing bit
indicating pre-charge qualification.
SLV RCF LV1 LV2 SLV – DriveSafeToRelevel from GECB ( 1: Relevel Enabled)-
RCF – DriveSpeedCheck to GECB ( 1: Relevel Enabled)
LV1 - - Door zone 1 sensor
OCB S1F BYM OCB - Overcurrent Breaker command to trip.
S1F - UD: unused
- LVD: feedback of “S1 relay & PWM FET”
(0-dropped/1-picked)
BYM - Brake voltage fbk: 1 if voltage is supplied to brake
SOP LV1 LV2 SOP – So Permission (0:Out of DZ, 1:In Dz, 2:another-one)
FLR MFR ARC SCR FLR – Current Floor
MFR – mid Floor
ARC – Automatic Recover Can (from OCSS)
SCR – Drive state Recovery
6.2.8 1-6 METRICS

Note: parameters that track since time of installation can be reset by pressing SHIFT-ENTER on
the service tool when the parameter is displayed.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 52 of 183

ALWA_DISPLAY ALWA = Automatic Load Weigh Adjustment
This display has two alternating displays described below.
Note: This feature is currently not supported in this release and is
available for Engineering test purposes only.
Display 1
st
1 line :
Load in car in percent
Postload weight at the end of run in percent
ALWA Gain in percent
nd
2 line:
ALWA Offset in percent
ALWA Error in percent
Display 2
st
1 line:
“Rbk” - Rollback/rollforward at the beginning of the run in mm.
“Cnv” - ALWA Converged (1) or diverged (0).
nd
2 Line:
ALWA STATE
Displays the current state of ALWA which is one of the following
-ALWA_CONVERGED
-ALWA_DIVERGED
-ALWA_ERROR
-ALWA_RESET
Flight Time Flight time of last run (sec).
Format: DAYS:HOURS:MIN:SEC:10MSEC.
Flight Length mm Flight length of last run (mm).
Number of Runs Accumulated number of runs since installation.
Runs Since Event Number of runs since the last event was logged.
Max AC Main Vrms Maximum AC mains (Vrms) while PLL locked since installation.
If PLL not locked maximum not detected.
Max HeatSnkTmp C Maximum temperature (C) since installation.
Max DC Bus V Maximum DC Bus voltage (V) since installation.
Max Motor Arms Maximum motor current (Arms) since installation.
Max Cnv Arms Maximum converter current (Arms) since installation.
Cap Time In Use Accumulated time the DC Bus has been charged since installation.
Format: DAYS:HOURS:MIN.
Fan Time In Use Accumulated time the fan has been running since installation.
Tot. Time In Use Accumulated time the drive has been powered since installation.
Metric E2 Writes Accumulated number of times metrics have been written to the EEPROM
since installation. Metrics written if power fail signal from supply active.
Event E2 Writes Accumulated number of times events have been written to the EEPROM
since installation.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 53 of 183
Position @pwroff Position (mm) saved to EEPROM during last power down. This is saved as
zero if power down occurs during motion, defined as time between brake lift
command and brake dropped with velocity < 10mm/sec.
Invalid: 0
Valid: 10000.0 to 510000.0
OMU Prohibited Indicates that the previous run was TCI. Consequently, if the drive is
powered-up with an OMU, the OMU software download functions will be
prohibited. The “008 OMU Prohibit” fault will be logged.
LW % @pwroff Load value in % imbalance measured at start of last run.
SSO Active Count Visible only when smooth stop feature is enabled.
Displays the event counter of 035 SSO Active
SSO SuccessCount Visible only when smooth stop feature is enabled.
Displays the event counter of 036 SSO Success
6.2.9 1-7 VANES

SlipMax mm ldg h XXX.X - Maximum slip distance detected [mm]. This value reflects slip after
XXX.X LYYY ZZZ.Z the tolerances for potential other errors have been subtracted! If the
measurement never exceeded the level of potential other errors
and tolerances, the value shows “---“.
YYY - Landing number where slip XXX was detected.
ZZZ.Z - Rest period in the landing [h] after which slip XXX was detected.
SlipRateMax mm/h XX.XX - Maximum slip rate detected [mm/h]. This value reflects slip after
the tolerances for potential other errors have been subtracted! If the
XX.XX LYYY ZZZ.Z
measurement never exceeded the level of potential other errors
and tolerances, the value shows “---“.
YYY - Landing number where slip rate XX.XX was detected.
ZZZ .Z - Rest period in the landing [h] after which slip rate XX.XX was
detected.
Slip Mitigation XXX - Configuration status of belt static slip mitigation feature:
ACT: Active
XXX YYYYYYYYYYY
LOG: Log only (no reaction triggered by drive)
RST: Reset
Y…Y - Reaction triggered:
---ok---: No reaction (no excessive slip)
PHRZZZZZmin: Phantom runs triggered at interval ZZZZZ min
BLOCKAGE: Elevator blockage (->GECB) in top landing
RestTime now|max XXX - Time [min] that elevator has rested in the current landing.
YYY - Max time [min] that elevator has rested in a landing between
XXXXX YYYYY min
NORMAL runs since last feature reset or power up.
PrsSpikesFilterd Number of occurrences where a PRS signal state (=UIS/LV1/LV2/DIS
combination) was stable for less than 4 samples and was therefore filtered
out from the sequence of valid PRS states. These “spikes” can be due to
bouncing, EMI or can regularly occur where the PRS overlaps 2 vanes at
the same time (short landings). “PrsSpikesFilterd” is initialized to 1 and is
reset at POR.
last SpikeLength Length of last PRS signal state counted in “PrsSpikesFilterd”, in samples
(1...3, sampling rate 1ms).
lastDeviation Detected transition pos - expected transition pos [0.1mm], updated for
every transition
lastCorrection Last correction made to pos.fbk, in [0.1mm], updated only when a
correction is made (at faster speeds: after last transition of vane,
summarizing all deviations)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 54 of 183
avgDevInRun Average of all deviations in ongoing or completed run, in [0.1mm].
avgCorrInRun Average of all corrections to pos.fbk in ongoing or completed run, in
[0.1mm].
maxDevInRun @ldg Deviation of greatest magnitude in ongoing or completed run, in [0.1mm],
together with landing number where it occurred.
maxCorInRun @ldg Correction (pos.fbk) of greatest magnitude in ongoing or completed run, in
[0.1mm], together with landing number where it occurred.
Offset UIS 0.1mm Transitions of the UIS sensor at both the upper and lower edges of the
vanes had been on average higher than expected from the nominal sensor
head geometry
Offset 1LV 0.1mm Transitions of the 1LV sensor at both the upper and lower edges of the
head geometry
Offset 2LV 0.1mm Transitions of the 2LV sensor at both the upper and lower edges of the
head geometry
Offset DIS 0.1mm Transitions of the DIS sensor at both the upper and lower edges of the
head geometry
LS1 length mm Learned length of LS1 magnet during learn run.
LS2 length mm Learned length of LS2 magnet during learn run.
LS length min mm Drive calculated minimum LS length-depends on profile parameters.
6.2.10 1-8 ENGINEERING

Test Variable 1 Test variable used be engineering.
CPU:Max% Avg% Max% - maximum CPU utilization.
Avg% - average CPU utilization.
1ms% 10ms% 40ms% 1ms% - Percent utilization of the 1msec task.
10ms% - Percent utilization of the 10 msec task.
40ms% - Percent utilization of the 40 msec task.
Cnv% Inv% All% Cnv% - Percent utilization of the converter task (50 usec max).
Inv% - Percent utilization of the inverter and the converter task (100 usec
max).
All% - Perecent utilization of all high-speed tasks (inverter, converter, and
other) and the task schedule (200 usec max).
E2 Load Time ms The amount of time it takes to load all the EEPROM paramaters to RAM.
Stack Used Max% Percent of software stack used.
Vel Scale mm/s Numerical scaling of the velocity in the software.
Drv I Scl Rated Drive current scaling
Mag Pos Err eDeg Difference between the magnet position derived from the encoder and the
result of the Locked Rotor Test (LRT), and the estimated position of the
magnets based on the back-EMF of the motor.
Used to detect the following fault: 504 Enc Pos
See EEPROM parameter: Mag err thr eDeg
See EEPROM parameter: Rated Motor rpm

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 55 of 183
MagPos /LRT eDeg MagPos – See above.
LRT eDeg - Angular offset of the magnets with respect to the encoder in
electrical degrees
Reactor I Arms This is the filtered, average current in the converter and line reactor. The
time constant of the filter is 10 minutes for iron-core coils and 0.6 minutes
for air-core coils, which is the approximate time constant of the line
reactor's thermal response. It is used to determine when the fan should be
fully turned-on to cool the line reactor. The threshold for the fan is 90% of
the line reactor continuous rated current.
Inert used kg-m2 This display variable is the actual inertia used when the load in the car
changes. This is valid when the load weighing type is 1 (Load Weigh
Type) and there is valid load weighing information. The inertia used can not
be more than +/-20% of the contract inertia Inertia kg-m2
VTE Parameters Current status of Vane Transition Estimator (VTE) parameters identified by
AAA BBB CCC DDD% adaptive algorithm: For vane exit <5min after entry, Normal runs only.
AAA - [0.1mm] Hysteresis (nominal to actual, not on to off)
BBB - [0.1mm/m] Rope stretch for car load change 100%DL
CCC - [0.1mm] Hitch spring compression for car load change 100%DL
DDD - [%] ratio EmptyCarWeight/DutyLoad
VTE Dtbc:est mea XXX - Last estimated disturbance: estimated vane exit pos vs. nominal.
XXX.X YYY.Ymm YYY - Last measured disturbance: detected vane exit pos vs. nominal.
VTE Dbc:HyAcLgLd Last estimated disturbance components: estimated - nominal
AAA BBB CCC DDDD AAA - [0.1mm] Hysteresis (nominal to actual, not on to off)
BBB - [0.1mm] Accel effects (stretch+hitch)
CCC - [0.1mm] Lag effect
DDD - [0.1mm] Load change effect (stretch+hitch)
VTE MaxDevFrmNom M - Maturity level of Vane Transition Estimator (VTE) corresponding to
M: XXX.X YYY.Ymm XXX, YYY
XXX - Max deviation (nominal exit - measured exit mm-position).
YYY - Residual error of VTE corresponding to XXX
(estimated exit - measured exit mm-position).
VTE MaxResidl SE M - Current maturity level of Vane Transition Estimator (VTE),
M: XXX.X YYY.Ymm corresponding to max residual errors XXX, YYY
XXX - Max residual error of VTE in UP direction at same edge
(estimated exit > measured exit mm-position).
YYY - Max residual error of VTE in DOWN direction at same edge
(estimated exit < measured exit mm-position).
VTE MaxResidl OE M - Current maturity level of Vane Transition Estimator (VTE),
M: XXX.X YYY.Ymm corresponding to max residual errors XXX, YYY
XXX - Max residual error of VTE in UP direction at opposite edge
(estimated exit > measured exit mm-position).
YYY - Max residual error of VTE in DOWN direction at opposite edge
(estimated exit < measured exit mm-position).
BSLP 3Margin mm Remaining margin before triggering belt slip phantom runs:
AAA BBB CCC DDDD Overall_Margin-abs(expected-measured)
Positive values indicate no slip, negative are detected as slip.
AAA - [mm] Remaining margin at largest deviation
abs(expected-measured exit pos).
BBB - [mm] (Next) smallest remaining margin.
CCC - [mm] Remaining margin at (next) highest slip rate.
DDD - [mm] Overall_Margin at AAA

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 56 of 183
6.3 Event Log

6.3.1 General Description
All events detected by the drive software are stored in an event log that is accessible through the
service tool. There are two event logs: the current log contains information about events which
have been detected since the most recent POR, and the saved log which is the EEPROM backup
of the events from before the most recent POR.
• Both the current log and the saved log have the same format. Each entry in the log contains
the event code, the name of the event, and the elapsed time since POR that the event was
detected:
705 E2 Invalid
0000:00:00:00.04
The time is in the format: DDDD:HH:MM:SS.SS.

• Enter menu 2-1 to access the current log, events that have occurred since the most recent
POR.
• Enter menu 2-2 to access the saved log, events that occurred before the most recent POR.
• Enter menu 2-3 to clear the current event log.
Clear Log?
Enter to clear.
Hit SHIFT-ENTER to clear.
• Enter menu 2-4 to clear a blockage of the drive that occurs when certain events are
detected.
6.3.2 Event-Specific Data
When viewing an event, event-specific data can be accessed by using the following service tool
keys:
Key Example: Before Example: After

Description
Sequence Key Sequence Key Sequence
Navigates down one level in the Power On Drive State @Evt
event tree to access event-specific
SHIFT- 0000:00:00:00.04 IDLE
data.
ENTER
705 E2 Invalid Go to XX
If the fault is: 705 E2 Invalid 0000:00:00:00.04 Invalid Param
Scrolls forward through event- Drive State @Evt Number of Runs
GO ON
specific data. IDLE 12
Scrolls forward through event- Number of Runs Event Response
GO ON
specific data. 12 Emergency Stop
SHIFT– Scrolls in reverse through event- Event Response Number of Runs
GO BACK specific data. Emergency Stop 12
Navigates up one level in the Number of Runs Power On
CLEAR
event tree. 12 0000:00:00:00.04
Event-specific data that is available is shown in the table:
Service Tool
Description
Display

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 57 of 183
This shows the state of the drive when the event was logged. Note that
Drive State @Evt
this is the state when the event is logged rather than the state when the
IDLE
event is detected.
Number of Runs This counter is incremented if the last run had no events logged other
12 than “001 New Run”.
Event Response
The response of the drive when the event was detected.
Emergency Stop
The number of times the fault was logged since the event log was
cleared. The counter is incremented each time the fault is logged. Note,
the counter is incremented (and event logged) only once in a run even if
the event is detected multiple times during this run.
Event Count:
1. This count is different from the occurrence count that is used to
12
block the drive. See section 6.3.3 for a description of the
occurrence counters that cause blocking.
2. The event counters and logs are cleared via M26.
3. The event count is not cleared at POR.
6.3.3 Shut Down Error Handling

Some error events cause a shut-down (immediate stop) with an additional inverter blockage
immediately or after repeated occurrences in sequence. In case of an inverter blockage, the DC –
link will be disconnected from the mains supply.
WARNING! Before starting the drive again, the error reason must be found and
solved. Otherwise, the inverter can be seriously damaged.
In case of blockage, do the following:

1. Establish service tool connection to the drive.
2. Find out the reason that caused the blockage by viewing the event log menu 2-1.
3. Clear the blockage by going to menu 2-4 and following the prompt:
Clear Block?
Enter to clear.
Hit SHIFT-ENTER to clear.
• Some errors cause blockage only as long as the failure is still present, e.g., if an over heat
occurs then the drive is allowed to do runs again as soon as the drive has cooled down. See
the event descriptions in Section 6.3.8 for further details.
6.3.4 Occurrence Counters

As stated above, some errors have an internal counter that is incremented every time that error
occurs in succession. When the counter has reached a limit, the drive will block itself. The
specific errors that have such counters and the corresponding limits are indicated in the detailed
event descriptions in Section 6.3.8. For example, “E4” means that 4 occurrences in series lead to
a drive blockage.
Applicability
• The counters are applicable only when the drive is in CAN mode (Interface Type = 1). They
are not applicable when the drive is in MCSS mode.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 58 of 183
• The counters are not applicable during TCI and ERO runs; all the counters are reset to zero
when the car is set to TCI or ERO.
Clearing of Occurrence Counters

The occurrence counters are cleared automatically after several consecutive runs without error.
The detail action taken is:
• Two successful runs without error are required before any counters are decremented. After
two successful runs, all the counters are decremented by one for each successful run. The
only exceptions to this are for the events “512 Missing Vane” and “513 No PRS Trans”. For
these two events, five successful runs without error are required before these counters are
decremented (this is so because these faults result in correction runs, but these faults are not
checked during correction runs).
The occurrence counters are manually cleared by any of the following actions:
o The car is placed on TCI or ERO.
o Clear Blockage, menu 2-4
o Software reset, menu 2-5.
o POR
6.3.5 Software Reset

The DSP on the control board can be reset through service tool commands. This is intended to
be used when performing software upgrades to the control board.
The reset is accessed in menu 2-5. A confirmation is required:
Reset DSP?
Enter to reset.
Hit SHIFT-ENTER to reset.
Note, the reset is only allowed when the drive is in the IDLE state or less.
6.3.6 Event Response

Every event detected by the drive has a defined response, which is summarized in Table below.
Event Abbrev
-iation
Description
Response
INFO I The event is logged for information only and no action is taken by the drive.
The event is logged for warning only and limited or no action is taken by the
WARN W
drive.
The event is logged, the run is allowed to complete, and the drive enters the
ShutDown state. This is used by the drive to communicate to the GECB that the
drive had encountered a fault. The drive sets the Stop-an-Shutdown (SAS) flag
until the fault condition clears.
COMP C
• In CAN mode, the drive will NOT attempt another run until the fault condition
clears.
• In MCSS mode, the drive will attempt another run if requested by the
controller, except for thermal faults.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 59 of 183
This response is applicable only for CAN–type controllers during normal

runs.
• The event is logged and the target is changed to the next committable.
• PRS+LS signals are ignored for position corrections.
• The drive sets the stop and shutdown (SAS) flag until the fault condition
clears.
• The run to the next committable will continue only if the fault is determined to
NEXT-
be triggered by a failure of the GECB, a failure “both LS active” or a failure of
COMMITT NC
the CAN communications. This is determined by checking if a follow-up
ABLE
event event “511 1LS & 2LS !” was also logged or the CAN message
“DrHwySignals” has timed out (=event “906 No LS Msg”). Otherwise, the
fault response will transition to a timed decel (DECEL).
• When the run ends, the drive passes through SHUTDOWN and position is
invalidated.
During other run modes than NORMAL, the fault reaction is an immediate
timed deceleration (DECEL).
This response is applicable only for CAN–type controllers.
The event is logged, the run is terminated with a timed decel, and the drive
enters the ShutDown state. The deceleration rate is 105% of contract
deceleration rate with a minimum of 0.5 m/sec^2.
DECEL D
• The drive remains in the ShutDown state until the fault condition clears. The
drive will NOT attempt another run until the fault condition clears.
• For momentary faults, the fault is automatically cleared after the sheave has
stopped, subject to a minimum 250 ms.
The event is logged and the run is immediately terminated by the drive.
• In CAN mode, The drive enters the ShutDown state for certain faults. It
remains in this state until the fault clears, the sheave has stopped, and a
minimum of 100ms. Some faults will set the Stop-an-Shutdown (SAS) flag.
The drive will NOT attempt another run until the fault condition clears.
ESTOP E • In MCSS mode, the drive will attempt another run if requested by the
controller.
• When the estop was caused by a command to stop or by the safety chain
opening, the drive enters Wait for Safety state.
• In either case, if the fault was not a converter-related fault, the converter will
remain active until the sheave has stopped.
The event is logged, the run is immediately terminated by the drive, and the drive
enters the Power Down state. The drive sets the Stop-an-Shutdown (SAS) flag.
SERVICE S The drive is blocked from further runs. A power on reset (POR) is required for
the drive to recover from this condition or must be reset through the service tool
menu 2-4.
ENDRUN ER The event is logged, the run or brake lift is aborted using a normal deceleration
profile (jerk-in/out), and the drive does not enter the ShutDown state.
The event is logged, the run or brake lift is aborted using a normal deceleration
profile (jerk-in/out), and the drive enters the ShutDown state.
ENDRUN +
ERS • The drive remains in the ShutDown state until the fault condition clears. The
SHD
drive will NOT attempt another run until the fault condition clears.
• For momentary faults, the fault is automatically cleared after the sheave has
stopped and a minimum of 250 ms time.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 60 of 183
6.3.7 Event Overview
Information Events 056 RTCr not cnv Converter Current 405 Brake I Drop
000 Power On 057 SWEEP negatv Faults 406 Brake I Hold
001 New Run 058 RTC negative 200 Cnv SW Oct 407 Brake I Max
002 SPARE 059 RTC is zero 201 Cnv Id Error 408 Brk S1 ESTOP
003 Stack Warn 060 RTC negative 202 Cnv Iq Error 409 Brk S2 ESTOP
004 Power Down 061 RTC not conv 203 Cnv Ix Offst 410 Low Speed
005 Extern FLASH 062 ID&V diverge 204 Cnv Iy Offst 411 Brk S1 DECEL
006 Extern RAM 063 NO Op Point 205 Cnv Gate Flt 412 Brk S2 DECEL
007 OMU Present 064 Imag>drv Rtd 206 Cnv HW Oct 413 Bk Desat Err
008 OMU Prohibit 065 Wrong direct 207 Cnv Gnd Flt 414 Bk Bus Over
009 Manual Mode 066 PTR Timeout 208 Bus Cap Fail 415 Bk Bus Under
010 B_MODE 067 Car nt empty 209 DC Link OCT 416 Bk fbk tmout
011 Battery Mode 068 FT RTC !conv 210 Cnv IPM Flt 417 Bk SW Oct
012 LearnRun REQ 069 FT not conv 211 Battry Chrgd 418 Bk lft tmout
013 Reset DSP 070 FT ID ! conv 212 Cnv Vmag Flt 419 Bk drp tmout
014 Log Cleared 071 FT Itq !comp 213 Cnv I Imbal 420 Bk Dly DetW
015 AutoTun Mode 072 Ineria !conv 214 Cnv DeSat 421 Bk Dly DecE
016 Earthquake 073 Run too shrt Voltage Faults 422 Brk ShrtCrkt
017 Block Cleard 074 Drive Fault 300 DC Bus Over 423 Brk I State
018 ALWA CONVRGD 075 Drive SAS 301 DC Bus Under 424 Brake I Neg
019 ALWA ERROR 076 ID/IQ divrge 302 VAC Over 425 Hyd Pump Flt
020 ALWA RESET 077 RTCr Real<0 303 VAC Under 426 BTI NG LOCK
021 ALWA DIVERGD 079 Kp RTR Fault 304 VAC Imbal 427 Chk Man BTI
022 EQAR Clear 080 LearnRun SVT 305 PLL Unlock 428 Brk S3 DECEL
023 ARO Hlth Chk Inverter Current 306 Single Phase 429 Brk S4 DECEL
024 ARO Active Faults 307 PLL Freq Rng 430 Brk S5 DECEL
025 ARU Type Mis 100 Inv SW Oct 308 Welded Mx/Px 431 Brk S3 ESTOP
026 UCM-EN clear 101 Inv I Imbal 309 Vscales off 432 Brk S4 ESTOP
027 Temp is 0 102 Inv Id Error 310 AC Brown-out 433 Brk S5 ESTOP
028 Download En 103 Inv Iq Error 311 AC All Err 434 Brake S3 SAS
029 Balance Err 104 Inv Ix Offst 312 DBTR ShrtErr 435 Brake S4 SAS
030 MotorRun Err 105 Inv Iy Offst 313 AC/DC Calib 436 Brake S5 SAS
031 SlipFtrReset 106 Inv Iz Offst 314 Cnv Res FltV Motion Faults
032 SlipPhanRuns 107 Inv Gate Flt 315 Cnv Res FltF 500 Overspeed
033 SlipBlockage 108 Inv HW Oct 316 BatOverVolt1 501 Pos Tracking
034 SlipDownwrds 109 Overload 317 BatUnderVolt 502 Vel Tracking
035 SSO Active 110 Drive Limit 318 OCBT Under V 503 LRT Motion
034 SlipDownwrds 111 No Id fdbk 319 Cnv i imbal 504 Enc Pos Err
037 SlipOutOfDz 112 No Iq fdbk 320 CNV NBus Flt 505 SPARE
038 SlipDirUnclr 113 Inv IPM Flt 321 INV NBus Flt 506 Stopping Err
039 RemoteRstCmd 114 Curr Ovrload 322 NBus OverFlt 507 Pos at 1LS
Self Commissioning 115 Brk Chop Err 323 SSO OverVolt 508 Pos at 2LS
Events 116 Inv HW Ovt 324 SSOAcLineFlt 509 Floor at 1LS
050 KP negative 117 Inv Pfai Flt Brake Faults 510 Floor at 2LS
051 KP not conv 118 Overload Dec 400 Brake S1 SAS 511 1LS & 2LS !
052 KI negative 119 Desat Err 401 Brake S2 SAS 512 Missing Vane
053 KI not conv 120 Output Cur 402 Brake Status 513 No PRS Trans
054 LSIG negativ 121 SR1 Err 403 Brake BY 514 Enc <> Vane
055 RTCr negativ 122 Inv DeSat 404 Brake I Off 515 NTSD failed

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 61 of 183
516 Corr failed 703 S Rly Fault 905 LWSS Bad Val
517 DDP Error 704 DBD Fault 906 No LS Msg
518 BeltCmp Wrng 705 E2 Invalid 907 Primary CRC
519 RlvPermitErr 706 E2 Write Lim 908 Drive CRC
520 Rllbck Start 707 ADC Offset 909 CAN BusOff
521 Rllbck Stop 708 Cmd to Abort 910 CAN OPB_Init
522 ManualRescue 709 PRS SigNoise 911 CAN TxQ Full
523 Moved at POF 710 UIB DIB Err 912 No FloorInfo
524 No Enc Signl 711 DBD Shutdown 913 MCSS Warning
525 NoRlv SpdChk 712 PostTrq Time 914 Power E2 Err
526 NoRlv TooMny 713 Block by xxx 915 LWSS not cal
527 NoRlv LostDZ 714 B_MODE Err 916 Power E2 Rng
528 Profile Err 715 ARO BatPower 917 CPLD Ver Flt
529 No enc fdbck 716 Illegal Cmd 918 ARO Ver Flt
530 No enc tmout 717 Triac Stuck 919 Powrbrd miss
531 PRS Sigs 1LS 718 PRS Config 920 Micro ChkSum
532 PRS Sigs 2LS 719 OARO Blocked 921 FPGA ChkSum
533 ARO Overspd 720 Welded BLV 922 FLASH Warn
534 ABL Abort:LW 721 PwmExistsFlt 923 FPGA Warn
535 Timeout PTR 722 E2 Read CkSm 924 Micro Warn
536 Timeout LB 723 UCM in Run 925 No CAN-PRS
537 No EndRunCmd 724 UCM in Slide 926 CAN PRS Msg
538 Abort:EndRun 725 UCM BrkBlock 927 DSP2FPGA Wrn
539 LvTransUnclr 726 Tmout SfcMsg 928 DSP2FPGA Flt
540 Shock Detect 727 TOStp SfcMsg 929 UCMP Timeout
541 SinCos Warng 728 Slack Rope 931 Micro VerFlt
542 Decel Req Fl 729 SysTrip OCBT
543 SSOoverSpeed 730 S2 RlyFault
550 Crp Time Low 750 ARU Failure
551 CrpSpe Boost 751 Dischrg Batt
552 CrpSpe inval 752 Bat Chrg Flt
553 DZ at Decel 760 Missing Batt
554 DZ lost Stop 761 Batt Tmp Flt
555 DZ too late 762 Batt Flt
Temperature Faults 763 Welded ARx
600 Inv Tmp Warn 764 ARO Alarm CR
601 Inv Tmp Over 765 LVD Prechrg
602 Inv Tmp Fail Task Overrun Faults
603 Cnv Tmp Warn 800 1ms Task
604 Cnv Tmp Over 801 10ms Task
605 Cnv Tmp Fail 802 40ms Task
606 Mtr Tmp Over 803 Cnv Task
607 Reactor Temp 804 Inv Task
608 DBR Tmp Over 805 200ms Task
609 AC/DC Calibr 806 Illegal Pwm
610 Batt Ovr Tmp Communication
611 MTC/RTC Flt Faults
612 Inv IGBT tmp 900 MCSS Timeout
State Faults 901 SVC Tool Err
700 Safety Chain 902 CAN Err
701 No Man Input 903 E2 CommWrite
702 Prechrg Time 904 LWSS Timeout

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 62 of 183
6.3.8 Event Menu Detailed Descriptions

The following list includes all events detected.
Column 1: The name of the event, including the event code
Column 2: The response to the event, followed by the number of occurrences in series that leads
to a drive blockage (see Section 6.3.3).
Column 3: A description of the event including possible causes and potential solutions.
6.3.9 Information Events
000 Power On I Power was applied to the drive.
001 New Run I A new run was initiated.
002 SPARE I Not used.
003 Stack Warn W The stack usage has exceeded an acceptable limit.
004 Power Down I The power fail signal in the hardware was activated.
005 Extern FLASH W The GDCB FLASH memory has failed.
006 Extern RAM W The GDCB RAM memory has failed.
007 OMU Present I Indicates that a valid OMU is plugged into the drive OMU port at power-up.
008 OMU Prohibit I Indicates that an OMU software upgrade is prohibited because the previous
run was TCI. The status of the permissive can be viewed in the SVT
parameter OMU Prohibited.
Solution
If this fault occurs, it can be cleared by performing an ERO run (the ERO
run confirms that the mechanic is in the hallway).
009 Manual Mode I Indicates that the drive is in Manual Mode.
010 B_MODE I Applicable only when Interface Type = 2 or 3.
Applicable only when “ARO Type” = 2 or 3.
Logged when the drive received “B_MODE signal” from Battery controller.
011 Battery Mode I Applicable only when Interface Type = 1.
Indicates the drive is in battery (ARO-EN) mode operating on 48Vdc battery
supply. Logged when the drive received SpbMode message “BatteryMode”
from SPBC3.
012 LearnRun REQ I Applicable only when Interface Type = 1.
Indicates that the floor table in the drive is invalid and that a new learn run
is required.
013 Reset DSP I The DSP was reset using the SVT menu 2-5.
014 Log Cleared I The event log was cleared using SVT menu 2-3.
015 AutoTun Mode I The drive is in Auto Tune mode.
016 Earthquake | Applicable only for “JIS Function” = 1
Indicates earthquake detection. This mode is initiated by the recovery
signal from MCSS. In this mode, shock detection and the torque pulsation
detection are activated.
017 Block Cleard I Indicates that a blockage condition was cleared either via the service tool
menu or by a CAN message.
018 ALWA CONVRGD I Indicates that ALWA has converged with a fixed gain and offset.
019 ALWA ERROR I Indicates that ALWA has an algorithmic error.
020 ALWA RESET I Indiactes either an automatic reset by the algorithm or through the service
tool was done. This resets the gain and the offset to 1 and 0 respectively.
021 ALWA DIVERGD I Indicates that the ALWA algorithm has not converged.
022 EQAR Clear I Applicable only for “JIS Function” = 1
EQAR mode was cleared by clear command.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 63 of 183
023 ARO Hlth Chk I The drive has received an ARO Health check request either from the
MCSS or from SVT M455 “Opt ARO Test 5-5”. If the drive accepts the
request, it will log “024 ARO Active”, and attempt to perform the health
check. The request is only accepted while in IDLE and no ARO faults.
024 ARO Active I The drive accepts the request, and logs “024 ARO Active”, and attempts to
perform the ARO health check.
025 ARU Type Mis I The wrong ARU type was selected during installation. Specifically, “ARO
Release? 1/2“ was set to1 , but type 2 hardware is present. The check
is done only when starting ARO operation.
Check the settings of the following parameters:
Interface Type Should be 3 for NSAA ARU
ARO Type Should be 4 for NSAA ARU
ARO Release? 1/2 Should be 1 for ARU1 or 2 for ARU2
026 UCM-EN clear I Applicable only when Interface Type = 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Indicates that a blockage according to 723 UCM in Run, 724 UCM in Slide
or 725 UCM BrkBlock has been cleared. .
027 Temp is 0 I Applicable only when Drive Type is 416G drive.
The detection temperature generates an event at less than 1 ℃.
When the thermistor circuit is opened, the drive outputs the same event.
028 Download En I Remote download mode of EEPROM parameters is enabled.
029 Balance Err I Not supported in AAA31400CBC.
Applicable only when Check Unbalance= 1.
The drive calculate “unbalance torque” during down running in car no load.
The detection unbalance torque generates an event at less than +/- 10%.
030 MotorRun Err I Not supported in AAA31400CBC.
Applicable only when Self BTI Block =0.
The detection speed generates an event at more than zero speed.
031 SlipFtrReset I Static Slip Mitigation feature was reset.
032 SlipPhanRuns W Static Slip upwards was detected and phantom runs were requested from
the GECB. This event is logged again only when the requested phantom
run interval decreases, i.e. higher slip was detected.
033 SlipBlockage W Static Slip upwards was detected in excess of 50mm or of 10mm/h => a
system blockage was requested.
034 SlipDownwrds W Static Slip was detected in downward direction.
035 SSO Active I This event is logged only in smooth stop operation (SSO). It is logged when
smooth stop operation is active.
036 SSO Success I This event is logged only in smooth stop operation (SSO). It is logged when
smooth stop operation is successfully completed without any faults.
037 SlipOutOfDz W Static Slip was detected due to 1LV leaving the vane while the brake was
dropped.
038 SlipDirUnclr W The direction of the Static Slip was not detected conclusively (1sensor &
brake dropped & imbalance<30%) => closer edge was assumed.
039 RemoteRstCmd I Not applicable to AAA31400CBC.
This information is reset command from MCSS. If the drive receives the
reset command, the Drive will automatically reset after 3 seconds.
6.3.10 Self Commissioning Faults

050 KP negative E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the KP test.
051 KP not conv E The KP test did not converge within the iteration limit.
052 KI negative E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the KI test.
053 KI not conv E The KI test did not converge within the iteration limit.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 64 of 183
054 LSIG negativ E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the LSIG test.
055 RTCr negativ E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the RTC REAL
test.
056 RTCr not cnv E The RTC REAL test did not converge within the iteration limit.
057 SWEEP negatv E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the SWEEP test.
058 RTC negative E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the RTC test.
059 RTC is zero E The RTC could not be computed due to zero result during the RTC IMAG
INIT test.
060 RTC negative E Either the voltage or current was zero or negative during the RTC IMAG
COMPUTE test.
061 RTC not conv E The RTC IMAG COMPUTE test did not converge.
062 ID&V diverge E The IMAG and ITORQ test diverged.
063 NO Op Point E The IMAG and ITORQ test did not converge within the iteration limit.
064 Imag>drv Rtd E The IMAG result exceeded the rated drive current.
065 Wrong direct E The car is running in the wrong direction required by the test.
066 PTR Timeout E The test timed-out waiting for PTR.
067 Car nt empty E The car is not empty as required by the test.
068 FT RTC !conv E The fine tune RTC test (RTC inner loop) did not converge within the
iteration limit.
069 FT not conv E The fine tune RTC test (main outer loop) did not converge within the
iteration limit.
070 FT ID ! conv E The fine tune RTC test (IMAG inner loop) did not converge within the
iteration limit.
071 FT Itq !comp E The fine tune RTC I torque computation failed.
072 Ineria !conv E The INERTIA test did not converge within the iteration limit.
073 Run too shrt E The run length was too short; did not meet minimum run length required by
the test.
074 Drive Fault E A drive fault occurred during the self commisioning test.
075 Drive SAS E A drive stop and shutdown occurred during the self commisioning test.
076 ID/IQ divrge - RESERVED
077 RTCr Real<0 W The real impedence was negative during the RTCr test.
079 Kp RTR Fault E The KP test timed-out waiting for PTR.
080 LearnRun SVT I Applicable only for JIS CAN and JIS Option=41
Accessed into SVT menu F41 or F43
6.3.11 Inverter Current Faults

100 Inv SW Oct E4 The magnitude of the inverter current exceeded an allowed threshold.
Possible Causes & Solutions

• Incorrect motor phasing → change parameter Motor Phase 0/1.
• Shorted motor phase → check motor wiring continuity.
• The fault threshold can be temporarily adjusted by the parameter
Inv I Limit %.
OCT(Apeak) = “Drive.InvOCTThesh” x “Inv I Limit %”

“Drive.InvOCTThesh” is,
UD401 = 20.6, UD402 = 29.5, UD403 = 75, UD404 = 110

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 65 of 183
101 Inv I Imbal E4 The sum of the three motor currents exceeded 10% full-scale current.

• Ground fault → check there are no motor phases shorted to ground.
• Signal noise → check that wiring guidelines are followed.
102 Inv Id Error E4 The indicated inverter current regulator error exceeded an allowable
103 Inv Iq Error threshold.

• Current regulators are not tuned correctly → check proper motor
parameter settings (see Section 9).
104 Inv Ix Offst E The indicated inverter phase current offset exceeded 5% of full-scale.
105 Inv Iy Offst
106 Inv Iz Offst Possible Causes & Solutions
• Defective circuit → change drive package (if occurs permanently).
107 Inv Gate Flt E4 NOT applicable when Drive Type is 25A.
An inverter IGBT gate supply voltage fault was detected.

• Defective or shorted gate power supply → change drive package (if
occurs permanently).
108 Inv HW Oct E4 NOT applicable when Drive Type is 25A or LCRD.
For 60A V.2 - drives:
The power section has detected a fault and set the discrete input
(ERR1/INV_FLT: P1-12 ) to the GDCB. Because this input is shared
by both HW Overcurrent and HW Overvoltage errors, the measured
DC bus voltage is used to distinguish between them:
- DC bus voltage is below a specified threshold
--> this fault was declared.
- DC bus voltage is above a specified threshold
--> 116 Inv HW Ovt would have been declared.
For all other drives except the 25A drive:

The inverter current exceeded a preset level, detected via hardware,
(ERR1/INV_FLT: P1-12 ) to the GDCB.
Note: This fault indicates a too high motor current or an IGBT short circuit
current.

• Defective hardware (e.g. shorted IGBT) → change drive package (if
occurs permanently)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 66 of 183
109 Overload E4 An overload condition has been detected. The drive exceeded the
maximum time allowed operating at the rated current of the motor.

• Excessive friction in system → check for dragging brake or hoistway
interference.
• The drive is undersized for the installed duty → confirm system inertia.
• The fault threshold can be adjusted by the parameters: Overload
sec, Rated mtr i Arms, and Rated Acc I PU, but should not be
increased by more than 10%.
110 Drive Limit W The drive is operating at its rated current limit.
111 No Id fdbk E4 An error has been detected with the current feedback of the inverter during
112 No Iq fdbk magnetization of the motor at the beginning of the run.

• Open motor phase → check motor wiring continuity.
• Bad current sensor → return unit for service.
See parameters Vd out thresh PU and Vq out thresh PU.
113 Inv IPM Flt E4 Applicable only when Drive Type is 25A or LCRD.
Indicates a fault has been detected from the inverter Intelligent Power
Module (IPM).

114 Curr Ovrload E4 Not used (was applicable only for non-regen drives).
115 Brk Chop Err E4 Not used (was applicable only for non-regen drives).
116 Inv HW Ovt E4 Applicable only for 60A V.2 drives.
The power section has detected a fault and set the discrete input
(ERR1/INV_FLT: P1-12 ) to the GDCB. Because this input is shared by
both HW Overcurrent and HW Overvoltage errors, the measured DC bus
voltage is used to distinguish between them:
- DC bus voltage is above a specified threshold
--> this fault was declared.
- DC bus voltage is below a specified threshold
--> 108 Inv HW Oct would have been declared.
117 Inv Pfai Flt E4 Currently not applicable in 31400 baseline.
Inverter PWM activity has been detected during IDLE (when S1 & S2 are
dropped):
• after 2 seconds in IDLE the inverter PWM driver was still active;
• or after 4 seconds in IDLE the signal PF_IGBT: P1-13 was LOW which
indicated a still active IGBT power supply although it should be
switched OFF.
• Defective gate driver or power supply → change drive package (if
118 Overload Dec D See 109 Overload.
119 Desat Err E4 The inverter current and the converter current exceeded a preset level,
detected via hardware.
120 Output Cur E1 This fault indicates the motor has currents while Sx dropped. This
monitoring is a requirement for GB compliance.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 67 of 183
121 SR1 Err E4 Applicable only for “JIS Function” = 1 and “Drive Type” = 428 or 460.
SR1 was off with Inverter running.
The wiring of Inverter output is disconnected with SR1-OFF.
• Check wiring around SR1 relay and P5-5 of GDCB
Check a SR1 control of UCMP module
122 Inv DeSat E4 Applicable to UD404.
High current on inverter side detected by gate drive
6.3.12 Converter Current Faults

200 Cnv SW Oct E4 The magnitude of the converter current exceeded an allowed threshold.

• Defective hardware → change drive package (if occurs permanently).
• The fault threshold can be temporarily adjusted by the parameter
Cnv I Limit %.
OCT(Apeak) = “Drive.CnvOCTThesh” x “Cnv I Limit %”

“Drive.CnvOCTThesh” is,
UD401 = 33.44, UD402 = 55.1, UD403 = 97, UD404 = 120
Only for JIS application,

“Cnv I Limit %” >= 85
OCT(Apeak) = “Drive.CnvOCTThesh” x “Cnv I Limit %”
“Cnv I Limit %” < 85
OCT(Apeak) = “Drive.CnvOCTThesh” x “Cnv I Limit %” x 1.19
201 Cnv Id Error E4 The indicated converter current error exceeded 30% of full-scale.
202 Cnv Iq Error
• Current regulators are not tuned correctly → check proper parameter
settings (see parameter Cnv Custom 0/1).
203 Cnv Ix Offst E The indicated converter phase current offset exceeded 5% of full-scale.
204 Cnv Iy Offst
• Defective circuit → change drive package (if occurs permanently).
205 Cnv Gate Flt E4 NOT applicable when Drive Type is 25A.
A converter IGBT gate supply voltage fault was detected.


Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 68 of 183
206 Cnv HW Oct E4 UD401/402:
The converter current exceeded a preset level, detected via hardware.
This fault indicates a too high line input current or an IGBT short circuit
current.Possible Causes & Solutions
• Short circuit check motor wiring continuity
• Shorted IGBT → change drive package.
UD403:
A ground fault was detected via dc link current measurement (note: motor
output only has two currenmt sensors).

• Short circuit check motor wiring continuity
• Shorted IGBT → change drive package.
• Converter current regulator and bus voltage bandwidth not tuned
correctly check if any added DC-capacitor is the correct value.
• Excessive pre-change current check if any added DC-capacitor is
correct value.
• Noise from external capacitor circuit check wiring and grounding.
207 Cnv Gnd Flt S Applicable only when Drive Type is 60A.
A ground fault was detected on the converter.

• Ground fault → disconnect drive from utility power and check that there
are no phases shorted to ground.
208 Bus Cap Fail S The estimated power loss in the drive exceeded a limit. This indicates that
excessive power is being dissipated in the drive and is a strong indication
that a DC link capacitor has failed. The threshold for this fault is set by the
SVT parameters Ploss Thr pre %, Ploss Thr idle %, and Ploss
Thr run %.
209 DC Link OCT S Applicable only when Drive Type is 40A.
Indicates excessive DC link current.

210 Cnv IPM Flt E4 Applicable only when Drive Type is 25A or LCRD.
Indicates a fault has been detected from the converter Intelligent Power
Module (IPM).

• Defective IPM hardware → change drive package (if occurs
permanently).
211 Battry Chrgd E4 Applicable only during ARO (EN) mode.
The drive detected charging current into the battery during ARO, which is
not allowed. The threshold for the charging currenmt is controlled by the
parameter Max Bat Chrg I A.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 69 of 183
212 Cnv Vmag Flt E Generally, this fault occurs when power is removed from the drive AC input
during a regenerative run. This fault may also occur in concert with certain
loss of safety chain events, but this should not be a concern (loss of safety
chain causes an estop anyways). This fault management is designed to
protect other in-ciruit controller components when the AC line is lost during
a regenerative run.
If this fault occurs in such a way that interrupts normal elevator operation,
then this condition should be reported, and the fault management can be
disabled by increasing the Cnv Vmag Thrs PU parameter.
This fault management is active only when the drive is regenerating and
only when the nominal AC line voltage parameter AC Main Vrms is set
<= 400. This fault management is not active when Low Volt Op 0/1 is set
to 1.
213 Cnv I Imbal E4 A current imbalance in the converter currents was detected. This could be
caused by a motor output ground fault.
214 Cnv DeSat E4 Applicable to UD404.
High current on converter side detected by gate drive
6.3.13 Voltage Faults

300 DC Bus Over E3 UD: The DC bus voltage was greater than a threshold below.
Running the converter control
UD402(V3), UDF403(V3), UD404(V3,V3.1) : 900Vdc
Other : 875Vdc
Idle (Not converter running) : 1150Vdc
LVD: DC bus voltage > 75Vdc.

Check parameter DBR Mode 0-3 is set correctly.
Check parameter Inertia kg-m2 is not set too high.
One way to estimate the inertia is to use the following formula:
J = 2 + 6 * DUTY_LOAD * (SHV_RADIUS^2)
Other ways to estimate inertia are given in Sections 9.1 and 9.2.
300 BatOverVolt2 E Applicable only to LVD.
LVD: Battery voltage > 75Vdc. Fault is reset at <74.5Vdc.
301 DC Bus Under E6 UD: The DC bus voltage exceeded a limit. The limits are:
For 415 < Vac <= 480, limit = 70% of “Vac x 1.41”.
For Single phase : 60% of “Vac x 1.41”
For 380 <= Vac <= 415, limit = 309 Vdc.
For Vac < 380, limit = 70% of “Vac x 1.41”.
For Single phase : 60% of “Vac x 1.41”
The nominal ac voltage is determined by the EEPROM parameter: AC
Main Vrms.
301 LowBatBlockg E2 Applicable only to LVD.
LVD: Battery voltage < 36Vdc.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 70 of 183
302 VAC Over C The AC line voltage exceeded a limit. The limits are:
For 415 < Vac <= 480, limit = 112% of nominal.
For 380 <= Vac <= 415, limit = 477 Vrms.
For Vac < 380, limit = 115% of nominal.
The nominal voltage is determined by the EEPROM parameter: AC Main
Vrms.
303 VAC Under C This fault indicates the AC line voltage was below a limit. The limit value
depends on whether the drive’s “brown-out” functionality is enabled or not:
- For CAN interface (interface type 1), where profile generation is
internal to the drive, the brown-out function is enabled.
o If the AC line voltage falls 15% below nominal, the brown-
out function is activated, the speed is reduced, and the
“310 AC Brown-out” warning is logged.
o If the AC line voltage falls to 30% below nominal, then
additional speed reduction occurs and the “303 VAC
Under” fault is logged.
- For other interfaces, where profile generation is external to the

drive, the brown-out function is disabled.
o If the line voltage falls to 15% below nominal, then the “303
VAC Under” fault is logged.
- In both cases, the fault response to “303 VAC Under” is:

o complete the current run,
o go to drive state shutdown,
o exit shutdown as soon as the fault clears. The fault is self
clearing.
- “Nominal” voltage is defined as follows:

o 380 Vrms for 380 <= Vac <= 415;
Vac otherwise,
where Vac = EEPROM parameter: AC Main Vrms
304 VAC Imbal C The AC line input voltages differ from each other by more than 25%.
305 PLL Unlock E The phase lock loop on the AC input voltage has unlocked. This is likely to
occur when you try to run with a damaged IGBT.
This fault sets the SAS flag.
306 Single Phase S This fault is declared when the drive is set to single-phase mode, and the T
phase is connected to a live input. The power during single-phase
operation should be connected to R and S phases only and the T-phase
should be left open. See EEPROM parameter: Single Phase 0/1
307 PLL Freq Rng E This fault is declared when the drive ac line frequency estimate is outside
of a frequency band specified by the parameter PLL freq band Hz for a
amount of time specified by the parameter PLL freq time ms, while
there is no PLL unlock fault. This fault is logged whenever the AC line is
disconnected. Repeated logging may be an indication of a problem with the
AC line.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 71 of 183
308 Welded Mx/Px S When the drive enters the power down state, if the DC Bus voltage does
not drop below a voltage threshold within a (drive-type depending) wait
time, the system will declare that the MX and/or PX contacts may be
welded.
Warning:
Do not cycle power to drive until fault is verified.
Check the “Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.” SVT
display to verify whether the Vdc is actually stuck to a high value (1.41
times the Vrms value) while the state of MX and PX in the “MX PX DX
BX” SVT display is actually “0”. If these conditions are met (high Vdc and
“0” for both MX and PX), then DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CYLE POWER TO
THE DRIVE. This drive may have a real welded MX or PX condition that
needs to addressed. For this condition, power down, lock out/tag out
energy source, and ship drive back to factory.
309 Vscales off W This fault is logged when the measured AC line voltage and measured DC
bus voltage disagree significantly. This check is performed only after M1 is
picked after the bus has had enough time to settle to its quiescent value.
This fault may indicate that either of the following EEPROM parameters is
not set correctly: DC Bus fscale V, AC Line fscale V.
310 AC Brown-out W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
This warning indicates that the ac line has dropped 15% below the nominal
value. The drive will continue to run under the "Brown Out" event with
reduced motion profiles.
When the ac line drops 30% below nominal, 303 VAC Under fault is
logged, in which case speed will be further reduced and the drive will finish
the current run and not accept any further runs until the fault clears. See
event “303 VAC Under” for more details.
311 AC All Err E This fault can occur for one of two reasons:
1. The AC line voltage exceeded a limit above the 302 VAC Over threshold.
The limits are:
For 415 < Vac <= 480, limit = 125% of nominal.
For 380 <= Vac <= 415, limit = 519 Vrms.
For Vac < 380, limit = 125% of nominal.
The nominal voltage is determined by the EEPROM parameter: AC Main
Vrms.
OR
2. The following three faults occur at the same time while PTR is active:
302 VAC Over AND
304 VAC Imbal AND
307 PLL Freq Rng
312 DBTR ShrtErr C Applicable only for ARO Type=NIARO (JIS) and DBR ENE=1 DIS=0.
This fault is set for detecting the short of DBTR.
When using a generator, set DBR ENE=1 DIS=0 for 1.
When using NIARO mode, set ARO Type for 3.
Check DBTR if it has broken.
313 AC/DC Calib I Applicable only when Low Volt Op 0/1 = 1.
This fault is active only in low voltage operation mode. This indicates that
the calibration process ac voltage sensor versus dc voltage sensor resulted
with a cross calibration factor that is either larger than 1.5 or less than 0.5.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 72 of 183
314 Cnv Res FltV E This fault management is active only when the event 304 VAC Imbal is
active. This fault occurs when a converter voltage transient occurs that
exceeds a threshold that is at least 25% greater than the AC Main Vrms
parameter setting. If this fault occurs, then check that the 3 phase AC input
is present and is reasonably balanced.
315 Cnv Res FltF E This fault occurs when a voltage resonance occurs at the AC input of the
drive due to an intermittent loss of an input phase. If this fault occurs, then
check that the 3 phase AC input is present, connected well, and is
reasonably balanced. This fault is active only for the 406R Version 2 drive.
316 BatOverVolt1 W Applicable only to LVD
LVD: Battery voltage > 70Vdc. Fault is reset at <65Vdc. During fault
condition, drive initiated runs (LR, RLEV) are aborted but commanded runs
(e.g. RESC, ERO) are still executed.
317 BatUnderVolt W Applicable only to LVD
LVD: Battery voltage < 42Vdc. Fault is reset at > 42.5Vdc. During fault
condition, drive initiated runs (LR, RLEV) are aborted but commanded runs
(e.g. RESC, ERO) are still executed.
318 OCBT Under V W Applicable only to LVD
This warning event is generated if the battery voltage has been below 36V
in IDLE for 10 minutes or if the battery voltage has been below 25V in IDLE
for 20 seconds. The drive will trip the OCB under these conditions.
319 Cnv i imbal E Applicable only for drive type 160A-CR.
This fault detects current imbalance in the converter and shuts down the
drive to prevent hardware damage. Current imbalance happens when a
phase is lost.
320 CNV NBus Flt E1 Applicable to 430ML drive only.
321 INV NBus Flt E1 Applicable to 430ML drive only.
322 NBus OverFlt E1 Applicable to 430ML drive only.
323 SSO OverVolt E4 Applicable only when smooth stop operation (SSO) is enabled.
This faultmanagment is active only during SSO. This fault is logged if bus
voltage exceeds 900V or if inverter current is closed to rated and bus
voltage is above 775V during SSO.
324 SSOAcLineFlt E4 Applicable only when smooth stop operation (SSO) is enabled.
This faultmanagment is active only during SSO This fault is logged if the
bus voltage is below charged threshold and the AC line returns during
SSO.
6.3.14 Brake Faults


Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 73 of 183
400 Brake S1 SAS C4 The indicated brake switch is in the wrong state. This is checked both
401 Brake S2 SAS when the drive is in the Idle state and when the drive is running.
These faults result in complete the run fault response and set the SAS
flag.
Note: this event is also applicable when Brk Sw Type 0-7 is set to 0 or 4
where constant states are required on BS1 and BS2 inputs.

• Incorrect parameter value → verify correct value of Brk Sw Type 0-7.
• Incorrect brake switch wiring → check brake switch wiring.
• Brake not lifting → check brake wiring & brake power supply.
• Insufficient time allowed → see parameters Brk Pick Time ms and Brk
Setl Time ms.
402 Brake Status E4 Applicable only when Brk Cnt Type 0-3 is set to 0.
The brake status feedback from the brake module is not in the correct
state.
403 Brake BY E4 One or both of the normally-closed BY contacts are not in the correct
state. The BY relays should be energized when PTR is active, before the
lift brake command is initiated.
Note: Actual name is BR relay but still referred here as BY relay for
downward compatibility.
• Incorrect wiring to brake module → check brake module wiring.
• Incorrect brake power supply → check brake power supply & wiring.
• Adjust SVT parameter: SX Pick Time ms
404 Brake I Off E4 Applicable only when Brk Cnt Type 0-3 is set to 2-3.
When using the internal brake control, this fault is logged when the brake
current feedback offset compensation exceeds a certain amount. The
threshold is adjustable with Brk I Offset A.
405 Brake I Drop E4 Applicable only when Brk Sw Type 0-7 is set to 4 and Brk Cnt
Type 0-3 is set to 2-3.
When the internal brake control drops the brake, this fault is logged if the
brake current feedback exceeds a threshold specified by the service tool
parameter Brk Min Hold I A.
406 Brake I Hold E4 Applicable only when Brk Sw Type 0-7 is set to 4 and Brk Cnt
When the internal brake control picks the brake, this fault is logged if the
brake current feedback is less than a threshold specified by the service
tool parameter Brk Min Hold I A.
407 Brake I Max E4 Applicable only when Brk Sw Type 0-7 is set to 4 and Brk Cnt
This fault is logged if the internal brake control current feedback exceeds
a threshold specified by the service tool parameter Brk I Max A.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 74 of 183
408 Brk S1 ESTOP E4 The indicated brake switch is in the wrong state. This is checked both
409 Brk S2 ESTOP when the drive is in the Idle state and when the drive is running.
These faults result in an immediate ESTOP and set the SAS flag.
Note: this event is also applicable when Brk Sw Type 0-7 is set to 0 or 4
where constant states are required on BS1 and BS2 inputs.
• Incorrect parameter value → verify correct value of Brk Sw Type 0-7.
• Incorrect brake switch wiring → check brake switch wiring.
Insufficient time allowed → see parameters Brk Pick Time ms and Brk Setl
Time ms.
410 Low Speed W Visible only when “TwoStepSpeed 0/1” = 1.
This fault indicates illegal configuration of the position sensor for the two
step speed profile operation. Can NOT operate the two step speed profile
operation. Only Low speed operation.
NOTE: Initially, the car has to run from BOTTOM to TOP to detect the
installation position of the position sensor for two step speed profile
operation. Before this initial operation is finished, the “410 Low Speed”
cannot clear and will only operate the low speed.
411 Brk S1 DECEL D4 See: 400 Brake S1 SAS, 401 Brake S2 SAS, 408 Brk S1 ESTOP 409, Brk
S2 ESTOP
412 Brk S2 DECEL D4 See: 400 Brake S1 SAS, 401 Brake S2 SAS, 408 Brk S1 ESTOP 409, Brk
S2 ESTOP
413 Bk Desat Err E4 The brake current exceeded a preset level, detected via hardware.
414 Bk Bus Over C The brake bus exceeded threshold data.
415 Bk Bus Under C The brake bus fell below threshold data.
416 Bk fbk tmout E4 The brake exceeded threshold data.
417 Bk SW Oct E4 The magnitude of the brake current exceeded an allowed threshold.
The fault threshold is set by the parameter Brk OCT A.
418 Bk lft tmout C4* Applicable only when Brk Cnt Type 0-3 is 2-3.
If Brk Sw Type 0-7 is 1-3:

This fault is logged if any of the following occur within the amount of time
specified by Brk Pick Time ms after lifting the brake.
• The brake current failed to stay above the threshold specified by
Brk Pick A and Brk Pick % for the amount of time specified
by Brk Lftd Dely ms.
• The brake switches did not hold the expected value for the
amount of time specified by Brk Lftd Dely ms.
If Brk Sw Type 0-7 is 4:

This fault is logged if the followings occur within the amount of time
specified by Brk Pick Time ms after lifting the brake.
The brake current failed to stay above the threshold specified by Brk Min
Pick I A for the amount of time specified by Brk Lftd Dely ms.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 75 of 183
419 Bk drp tmout C4* Applicable only when Brk Cnt Type 0-3 is 2-3 or Brk Sw Type
0-7 is 1-3.
This fault is logged if any of the following occur within 3 seconds of
dropping the brake.
• The brake current failed to stay below the threshold specified by
Brk Hold A and Brk Drop % for the amount of time
specified by Brk Setl Time ms.
• The brake switches did not hold the expected value for the
amount of time specified by Brk Setl Time ms.
420 Bk Dly DetW W Applicable only for “JIS Function” = 1
This is for Brake Delay Detection. This is detected If it passed specific
time from LB to “Brake picked”.
Or it detects when BS is OFF during running.
421 Bk Dly DecE S Applicable only for “JIS Function” = 1
This is for Brake Delay Detection. This is detected If it passed specific
time from LB to “Brake picked”.
Or it detects when BS is OFF during running, then the running is
completed.
But can not do further run until POR or Block Clear.
422 Brk ShrtCrkt E4 Applicable only for Ultra Drive
This is for Brake short circuit protection. This fault is reported if the brake
current exceeds 10Amps. This threshold is fixed and cannot be changed.
423 Brk I State E4 Applicable only if “Int Brk Type 0-2” is set to 1 or 2.
Brake current was detected just before the lift brake command. Double
check brake wiring to make sure that brake is not energized at the prepare
to run command and before the lift brake command.
424 Brake I Neg E4 Applicable only if “Int Brk Type 0-2” is set to 2.
Negative brake current has been detected. Double check any brake
current hardware connections and brake power supply connections to see
if they are correct. If all connections are correct, then the brake current
sense hardware may be damaged.
425 Hyd Pump Flt C Not supported in AAA31400CBC.
This is for Hydraulic pump unit of 78T machine.
The HPU has some failure.
426 BTI NG LOCK ER Not supported in AAA31400CBC.
S Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and only if "Self BTI Block " is
set to 0 and "Lockup by S-BTI " is set 1.
This event is detected by the NG failure of Self-BTI with “BRK
TRQ %Load2" condition or “030 MotorRun Err”. And then it sets the “BTI
Block” with drive shutdown, and then any attempt run is prohibited. After
the ERO/TCI switch is turned ON/OFF 3 times, the inspection run is
enabled for rescue operation.
The “BTI Block” is canceled only for good result of Manual BTI test or
special command required.
427 Chk Man BTI W Not supported in AAA31400CBC.
This event is detected by the NG failure of Self-BTI with “BRK
TRQ %Load1" condition.
The brake torque should be verified by Manual BTI again.
428 Brk S3 DECEL D4 Applicable only for GDCB2 Drives
429 Brk S4 DECEL As 411 Brk S1 DECEL but for brake switches 3,4,5 .
430 Brk S5 DECEL Note: With Brk Sw Type 0-7 not set to 7, this fault may occur if the
unused BS input is not wired to GND.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 76 of 183
431 Brk S3 ESTOP E4 Applicable only for GDCB2 Drives

432 Brk S4 ESTOP As 408 Brk S1 ESTOP but for brake switches 3,4,5 .
433 Brk S5 ESTOP Note: With Brk Sw Type 0-7 not set to 7, this fault may occur if the
434 Brake S3 SAS C4 Applicable only for GDCB2 Drives
435 Brake S4 SAS As 400 Brake S1 SAS but for brake switches 3,4,5 .
436 Brake S5 SAS Note: With Brk Sw Type 0-7 not set to 7, this fault may occur if the
*Note: For events 418 and 419, the drive state machine does not pass through the SHUTDOWN
state.
6.3.15 Motion Faults
500 Overspeed E4 The motor speed has exceeded a speed threshold. The speed threshold
is determined by the operating mode of the drive:
MCSS mode: adjustable perecentage of Duty Speed mm/s
Manual Mode: adjustable percentage of Man Speed mm/s
CAN Normal: 110% of Duty Speed mm/s
CAN Relevel: fixed percentage of max relevel = 20 mm/sec
CAN Learn: fixed percentage of max learn = 500 mm/sec
CAN ERO/TCI: fixed percentage of Insp Speed mm/s
CAN Rescue: fixed percentage of max rescue = 300 mm/sec
For MCSS and manual modes, the percentage is adjusted by SVT
parameters: MCSS Overspeed % and MAN Overspeed %.
501 Pos Tracking E4 The position tracking error exceeded a threshold and indicates that the
position feedback was not tracking the position reference from the profile
generator. This fault is checked only when the drive uses its internal
profile generator. See EEPROM parameter: Pos Err Lim mm
502 Vel Tracking E4 The velocity tracking error exceeded a threshold. The velocity feedback
was not tracking the velocity reference.

• Wrong encoder feedback → check encoder wiring and attachment.
• Incorrect parameter value → verify correct value of Inertia kg-m2.
• Excessive start jerk / improper pre-torque → verify load weigh
device; if no load weigh device present (as during inspection), try
increasing parameter Start Gain Ot PU. See section 4.11 for further
instruction.
• Hoistway obstructed → check for obstruction (e.g. car or
counterweight on buffer).
• The fault threshold can be adjusted by parameter Track Error mm/s.
When Manual Mode is active, this fault threshold is automatically
increased by a factor of 3.
503 LRT Motion E4 This fault indicates motion was detected while performing the Locked
Rotor Test. The Locked Rotor Test is performed at the beginning of the
first run after a power-up to determine the position of the magnets when
using a PM motor. The threshold for the fault is specified by the
parameter LRT mot err eDeg. If the fault occurs, the brake may not be
set properly.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 77 of 183
504 Enc Pos Err W This fault indicates that the drive has lost track of the magnet position
when using a PM motor. This fault is necessary to prevent a loss of
torque production. This fault may be caused by the encoder physically
slipping with respect to the motor, or by a bad magnet position
calculation during the locked rotor test (LRT).
This fault is detected by comparing the magnet position, derived from the
encoder and the result of the LRT, to the estimated magnet position
based on the back-EMF of the motor. Since the estimator is back-EMF
based, the fault detection is enabled only when the motor operates
above 30% of the rated motor speed. The default threshold for the fault
is 20 electrical degrees. Another locked rotor test will be performed at the
beginning of the next run to automatically re-determine the magnet
position.

See display parameter: Mag Pos Err eDeg
505 SPARE D Not used.
506 Stopping Err W A time-out occurred because the stopping criteria at the end of the run
were not satisfied. See EEPROM parameters: Pos Stop Tol mm
and Vel Stop mm/sec
507 Pos at 1LS NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Unexpected position at 1LS. The 1LS transition occurred at a position
outside the expected range for 1LS, or the 1LS signal state is not
consistent with hoistway position. Applicable only when landing table is
valid and position is valid.
508 Pos at 2LS NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Unexpected position at 2LS. The 2LS transition occurred at a position
outside the expected range for 2LS, or the 2LS signal state is not
consistent with hoistway position. Applicable only when landing table is
valid and position is valid.
509 Floor at 1LS NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Unexpected floor at 1LS. The 1LS transition occurred at a floor that is
different from the expected floor. Applicable only when landing table is
valid and limit switch signals are valid.
510 Floor at 2LS NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Unexpected floor at 2LS. The 2LS transition occurred at a floor that is
different from the expected floor. Applicable only when landing table is
valid and limit switch signals are valid.
511 1LS & 2LS ! NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Both LS signals are valid and active simultaneously.
This fault is used to decide if the NEXT COMMITTABLE fault response

shall continue. If this fault is not detected with a certain time, or the fault
“906 No LS Msg” is not detected within a certain time, then the fault
response is changed from NEXT COMMITTABLE to TIMED DECEL.
If this fault persists at the end of a run, the drive will transition to (state,
substate) = (IDLE AVAILABLE, RescueOnly). When the drive is in this
substate, only commands for Rescue, ERO, ARO and MRO runs are
accepted and LS are subsequently ignored.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 78 of 183
512 Missing Vane NC3 Applicable only for Interface Type 1.

Expected vane is missing. Logged only when outside a vane and an
expected transition onto a vane has not occurred. Not checked in
Inspection or Correction runs.
513 No PRS Trans NC3 Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Expected transition is missing. Logged only when on a vane and an
expected transition has not occurred. Not checked in Inspection or
Correction runs.
514 Enc <> Vane NC3 Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
An unexpected vane transition occurred. Possible causes could be:
1. Incorrect Car Dir 0/1 setting.

2. Wrong Vane Sensor Type parameter setting.
3. PRS sensor signal wiring mistake.
4. PRS is having false transitions.
5. Encoder is not firmly attached to rotor.
6. Magnet has moved since it was learned during the learn run.
7. Belts are slipping or creeping over the drive sheave excessively.
8. Belts are stretching excessvely.
515 NTSD failed W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
During a normal run, the normal stopping profile did not decelerate the
car in time to meet the target. The timed-decel is two-phased, containing
a creep region. Only triggered at the terminal landings. The condition for
triggering the fault is that the normal profile overshoots the target
compared to a linear ramp-down of the speed at 110% of normal decel
rate. Only triggered above a certain speed (presently 0.1 m/s).
516 Corr failed D Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
A correction run missed the target. This fault is triggered when a
correction run terminates outside of the limit switches or outside a vane,
or at a different landing other than the terminal landing. The fault is
logged after the car has stopped.
Note: There is a minor bug with the SVT display for this fault. The fault
response in the SVT is shown as ESTOP, when it is actually DECEL.
517 DDP Error E1 Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Delayed Drive Protection (DDP) fault. The time between vanes has
exceeded a specified value. It is not checked during ERO or TCI runs.
The fault is cleared by any of the following:
• ERO run
• TCI run
• SVT M2-4 “CLEAR BLOCK”
The fault is not cleared by POR.
The drive will stay in IDLE and accept only TCI and ERO commands.
The time between vanes is specified by the EEPROM parameter: DDP
sec.
518 BeltCmp Wrng W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.

This indicates that the compensation factors for belt and traveling cable
imbalance determined during the learn run were exceptionally large
(specifically, the offset factor was greater than 25% rated torque). The
compensation factors can be viewed in the SVT display: BeltCmp:Slp
mA/m, BeltCmp:Offset A.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 79 of 183
519 RlvPermitErr W Applicable only when Interface Type is 1 and Load Weigh Type is 1.
Controller has given permissive to relevel while load weighing system
indicates overload condition. This contradictory situation has persisted
for >200ms.
520 Rllbck Start W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Rollback of more than 5.0 mm at beginning of run
521 Rllbck Stop W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Rollback (reverse to direction of run) or overshoot (in direction of run) of
more than 5.0 mm at ending of run
522 ManualRescue D Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
SPBC message reports that the car has been moved for manual rescue
(drive powered off, SPBC lifts brake). The drive’s stored position is
invalidated and a locked rotor test initiated before the next run.
523 Moved at POF W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The SPBC or GECB and the drive have contradictory position
information (at power up): the SPBC’s or GECB’s position has been
assumed by the drive.
524 No Enc Signl E Applicable only when Encoder Type 0/1 is set to 0 (incremental,
double-ended).
Encoder channel A input is not detected. Encoder may not be connected,
encoder power supply may have failed, or encoder may have failed.
1
525 NoRlv SpdChk D Relevel speed is too high (>= 0.285 m/s).
1
526 NoRlv TooMny D This event indicates the drive attempted 20 consecutive relevel runs
without the start of a normal run. If hovering is enabled, then the
threshold is 40 consecutive relevel runs.
After 20 (or 40 if hovering) relevel attempts, further relevel runs are

prohibited until after the start of a normal run (or TCI/ERO, Correction,
Rescue, Learn Runs).
1
527 NoRlv LostDZ D Lost DZ signal or detecting UIS/DIS signal disagreeing with mm-position
(on opposite side of target mm-position).
528 Profile Err W The profile chosen is not compatible with the system environment:
A) The LS1 or LS2 lengths (learned during learn run) are too short for
the drive to be able to stop within. This can be caused by too large
speeds in the profile setting or too small deceleration entered. The
other possibility would be a really short LS magnet. Cause A can be
identified in the vane monitor M-1-7 by comparing measured LS to
minimum required.
B) The Nom Speed is set too high for the LS signal latency reported by
the ICD of the GECB/TCBC (e.g. Nom Speed > 1.8m/s with TCBC).
This setting could lead to CORR runs not reaching the target vane.
529 No enc fdbck E4 This fault indicates that the motor started moving without an encoder.
This fault is triggered when the motor voltage exceeds a certain
threshold defined by No Enc VThrs PU while the encoder speed
feedback is below 1mm/s. Check the integrity of the encoder. Also,
check motor parameters.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 80 of 183
530 No enc tmout E4 This fault indicates that the drive started commanding velocity profile and
the motor speed feedback did not exceed 1mm/s for the time duration
defined by the parameter No enc flt t sec (default value of the parameter
is 0.4 secs). This fault detection is not active in Manual Mode.

• No encoder feedback signal → check encoder wiring and
mechanical attachment to the sheave.
• Incorrect parameter value → verify correct value of Inertia kg-m2,
Man Acc mm/s2, Accel mm/s2, or any of the acceleration
parameters in the (L)MCSS if operating in 422 mode.
• Excessive start jerk / improper pre-torque → verify load weigh
device; if no load weigh device present (as during inspection), try
increasing parameter Start Gain Ot PU. See section 4.11 for further
instruction.
• Hoistway obstructed → check for obstruction (e.g. car or
counterweight on buffer).
• The fault threshold can be adjusted by parameter No enc flt t sec
531 PRS Sigs 1LS NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The transition into 1LS occurred with PRS signals that are not expected
near the learned LS transition point. Applicable only when landing table
is valid and limit switch signals are valid.
532 PRS Sigs 2LS NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The transition into 2LS occurred with PRS signals that are not expected
near the learned LS transition point. Applicable only when landing table
is valid and limit switch signals are valid.
533 ARO Overspd E Applicable only when Interface Type = 2 or 3.
Applicable only when “ARO Type” = 2 (Interruptable ARO).
This fault is declared when the motor speed has exceeded a speed
threshold set by the parameter ARO Overspeed % as a percentage of
ARO Speed mm/s. This fault is disabled with ARO Overspeed % =0. If
this fault is logged, the run is immediately terminated by the drive.
534 ABL Abort:LW ER Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
A command for advanced brake lift was received and ignored because
no valid load data was available.
535 Timeout PTR ERS Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
While in state “Prepare To Run” (during Advanced Brake Lift), the drive
did not receive a command to leave this state and timed out after 60s.
536 Timeout LB ERS Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
While in state “Lift Brake” (during Advanced Brake Lift), the drive did not
receive a command to leave this state and timed out after 16s.
537 No EndRunCmd ERS Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
While waiting for a DriveCommand EndRun in substate “STOPPED” the
drive did not receive this command and timed out after 3s..
538 Abort:EndRun ER Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The run has been terminated with normally profiled deceleration by an
OPB command (DriveCommand EndRun)..

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 81 of 183
539 LvTransUnclr NC3 Applicable only for Interface Type 1.

With a single-sensor PRS, an ambiguous sensor transition has been
detected, could have been either one of two vane edges. Potential root
cause: Uncertain mm-position (ESTOP sliding, Power Up recovery from
GECB/SPBC, position recovery in LS) and transition occurs within first
5mm of travel.
540 Shock Detect W The shock condition was detected for REI/REM and EAR.
The following parameters define the thresholds for the fault detection:
Start Shock LVL%
Stop Shock LVL%
541 SinCos Warng W This fault will be logged for one of the following conditions:
1. When using a sin/cos encoder

A. If any of the analog encoder signals fail, then this fault will be
logged. Check the encoder connection.
B. If the Encoder Type 0/1 SVT parameter has the wrong setting
of "0", then this fault will be logged.
2. When using an incremental encoder
If the Encoder Type 0/1 SVT parameter has the wrong setting of
"1", then this fault will be logged.
542 Decel Req Fl D Applicable to Interface Type = 3 only.
A fault occurred and a timed decel is required, so a falsg is sent to the
controller to request a timed-decel
543 SSOoverSpeed E4 Applicable only when smooth stop operation is enabled (SSO).
This faultmanagment is active only during SSO. The fault is logged if
NTSD condition is violated. This fault is logged in conjunction with 515
NTSD failed fault
550 Crp Time Low W Not supported in AAA31400CBC. Applicable to open loop control only.
551 CrpSpe Boost W Not supported in AAA31400CBC. Applicable to open loop control only.
552 CrpSpe inval W Not supported in AAA31400CBC. Applicable to open loop control only.
553 DZ at Decel W Not supported in AAA31400CBC. Applicable to open loop control only.
554 DZ lost Stop W Not supported in AAA31400CBC. Applicable to open loop control only.
555 DZ too late W Not supported in AAA31400CBC. Applicable to open loop control only.
1) This Timed Deceleration reaction does not lead to the SHUTDOWN state
6.3.16 Temperature Faults
600 Inv Tmp Warn W The temperature of the inverter heat sink has exceeded 80C.
1
601 Inv Tmp Over C The temperature of the inverter heat sink has exceeded 85C. The fault
detection includes hysteresis, and will not clear until the temperature of
the heat sink drops 5C below fault value.
1
602 Inv Tmp Fail C Indicates the analog temperature sensor on the inverter heat sink is not
connected or has failed. The fan will turn on and remain on when this
condition is detected.
603 Cnv Tmp Warn W The temperature of the converter heat sink has exceeded 80C.
1
604 Cnv Tmp Over C The temperature of the converter heat sink has exceeded 85C. The fault
detection includes hysteresis, and will not clear until the temperature of
the heat sink drops 5C below fault value.
1
605 Cnv Tmp Fail C Indicates the analog temperature sensor on the converter heat sink is not
connected or has failed. The fan will turn on and remain on when this
condition is detected.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 82 of 183
1
606 Mtr Tmp Over C The motor thermal contact has changed state indicating that either the
motor is overheating or there is a problem with the contact circuitry.
Check the motor temperature and the thermal contact. Although motor
thermal contacts can be normally open or normally closed, the drive
always expects a normally closed contact. If the thermal contact is
normally open, a modification must be made to adapt it to the drive.
1
607 Reactor Temp C The thermal switch in the line reactor has opened, indicating an over-
temperature condition in the line reactor.
1
608 DBR Tmp Over C Not used (was applicable only for non-regen drives).
609 AC/DC Calibr C Applicable only when “Low Volt Op 0/1” is set to 1.
A calibration was performed to ensure that the AC voltage sense and the
DC voltage sense are consistant.
610 Batt Ovr Tmp I The thermal sensor at the charger battery unit is reading high
temperatures or disconnected. This could be due to:
• an error during the installation phase where the sensor is not
connected
• the charger spent excessive time in the charge pending phase
• the battery ran into a hot condition.
Since the installation initially needs to be done correctly, this fault would
mean that either battery/charger got into a hot condition due to the
ambient or due to overcharging. If it persists for a long time it needs to be
checked (job site visit). This timer = TBD minutes.
611 MTC/RTC Flt C Applicable to Ultra Drive only.
This indicates that either the motor thermal switch openeded OR the line
reactor thermal switch opened.
611 MTC/DBR Flt C Applicable to Low voltage drive only.
This indicates that either the motor thermal switch OR the DBR thermal
switch opened.
612 Inv IGBT tmp E2 Applicable to UD drive only.
Inverter IGBT junction temperature over safe operating limit.
1) When these temperature faults occur in 422 mode, PTR is not accepted until the fault condition
clears. When these temperature faults occur in CAN mode, the drive behaves as follows:
1. Normal runs are re-routed to the next committable landing.
2. Inspection runs (TCI+ERO) are terminated by timed deceleration.
3. All other runs (ARO, CORR, Rescue, MRO, Relevel) are completed to their regular end
4. No new run is allowed until the condition clears.
5. The fan is turned on 100%.
6.3.17 State Faults

700 Safety Chain E/ The safety chain is not present. The opening of the safety chain will cause
W SX relays to drop, causing the drive to de-energized the motor and brake,
thus causing an ESTOP.
• For 422 system, the response is ESTOP
• For CAN system, the response is LOG ONLY
Note: Due to switch timing variation, this event can be logged sporadically
when switching from NORMAL to ERO/TCI (no problem in unit)
701 No Man Input E Applicable only for Interface Type 0.
This fault occurs if the drive is in manual mode and the manual mode
jumper is removed.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 83 of 183
702 Prechrg Time E3 This fault is declared when the DC bus fails to reach the charge voltage
threshold within a time limit. The time limit is approximately 2 seconds for
60A V.2 drives and 10 seconds for other regen drives. The timer starts
when the drive enters the precharge state.
For MCSS systems, the drive enters the powerdown state and waits 2
minutes, and then attempts again. For the regen drive, further precharge
attempts are made only if the AC line voltage is within specification. There
is no limit on the number of precharge attempts.
For CAN systems, the drive enters the powerdown state and waits 30
seconds, and then attempts again. For the regen drive, further precharge
attempts are made only if the AC line voltage is within specification. There
is a limit of 3 consequtive precharge timeouts after which the drive will be
blocked.
The voltage threshold is 80% of the actual rectified AC line voltage.
Note: There is a minor bug with the SVT display for this fault. The fault
response in the SVT is shown as WARN, when it is actually ESTOP.
703 S Rly Fault E4 The normally-open S1 contact was in the wrong state.
See SVT parameter SX Pick Time ms.
704 DBD Fault E4 One or more of the normally-closed contacts of S1, S2, BY1 and BY2
were in the wrong state. Three attempts are allowed before the drive is
blocked.
See SVT parameter SX Pick Time ms.
705 E2 Invalid E The data in the EEPROM is set to values incompatible with the current
SCN or new EEPROM parameters have not yet been set. The invalid or
blank values must be corrected. Pressing SHIFT_ENTER tells which
parameter is invalid and what menu it is located.
706 E2 Write Lim W The allowable number of writes to the EEPROM have been exceeded:
Metric writes: 100,000 maximum
Event writes: 1,000,000 maximum
707 ADC Offset C Not applicable to Ultra drive.
708 Cmd to Abort D Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The run has been terminated with timed deceleration by an OPB
command (DriveRunCommand dir=none). This fault does NOT result in
SHUTDOWN.
709 PRS SigNoise D Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Too many PRS signal transitions have occurred over a fixed period of
time.
710 UIB DIB Err E Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The UIB and DIB inputs were not consistent with the run command from
TCBC-type controller. This fault sets the SAS flag.
711 DBD Shutdown S Three attempts were made to try to correct a relay in the wrong state (one
or more of the normally-closed contacts of S1, S2, BY1 and BY2 were in
the wrong state). The drive is blocked from further runs.
712 PostTrq Time W A log only fault is reported when the current is not ramped down to zero
within a specified time.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 84 of 183
713 Block by xxx S The drive has been blocked from further runs. This occurs after certain
critical faults have been detected, indicated by “S” in this table, or when
certain faults have exceeded an allowed number of occurrences, indicated
in this table by the number that follows the fault response category. The
blockage must be cleared following the guidelines in Section 6.3.3.
714 B_MODE Err W Applicable only when Interface Type = 2 or 3.
Applicable only when “ARO Type” = 3 (NIARO).
This fault is logged when “B_MODE” was not detected in less than 200ms
from the time when the drive received some fault of "201 Cnv Id Error/ 202
Cnv Iq Error/208 Bus Cap Fail/305 PLL Unlock" or detected DC Bus
voltage less than 650V.
715 ARO BatPower D Applicable only in CAN-architecture. The power drawn from the battery
during an MRO/ARO run was too high, e.g. > 15A * 48V for 800ms.
716 Illegal Cmd W Applicable only for Interface Type 1 with systems using GECB
where CarController ICD >= 10, see “CAN ICD type” in M-1-8 ENGINEERING.
An unexpected command has been received in a state where it could not
be executed. It was ignored. Note it is possible that a GECB command
coincides with a state change in the drive making execution of that
command impossible. In such a case, this warning does not indicate a
problem with the system.
717 Triac Stuck E Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
This fault is logged if both triacs are disabled and safety chain feedback is
in the active state. It is not checked during ARO(EN) runs.
718 PRS Config C Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
This fault indicates illegal configuration of the PRS. Causes (see M-3-2):
• “offset mm” for a sensor is outside “Vane Length mm”
(<- Test Variable 2 = 1)
• no DZ configured, i.e. "LV1 config 0/1/2"=0 and "LV2 config
0/1/2"=0, (<- Test Variable 2 = 2)
• gap between 2 sensors configured <5mm or sequence of sensor
positions violated. Required sequence UIS > LV1 > LV2 > DIS
719 OARO Blocked I Applicable only for Optimized ARO.
The pilot AR relay for AR1/AR2 contacts is welded ON. If this fault is
reported, then optimized ARO functionality is blocked, but normal runs are
enabled. The controller will parse this code and request service via REM.
720 Welded BLV I Applicable only for Optimized ARO.
The BLV contact is welded. This means that the drive will allow ARO runs
and normal runs; however the drive will be unable to completely shut
down power after an ARO run. This causes deep discharge of batteries if
the power outage persists (shorter life time and unavailability of ARO) and
it needs to be fixed. The controller will request service via REM.
721 PwmExistsFlt E Applicable to Ultra Drive only.
This fault indicates either PWM is acitve when there is no safety chain or
PWM is blocked when safety is present.
722 E2 Read CkSm W Applicable to Ultra Drive only.
A checksum fault occurred while reading metrics from E2 at POR. If this
occurs, metrics are reset to zero, current floor is set invalid, and floor
position is set to zero.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 85 of 183
723 UCM in Run C Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Indicates that the car has run out of the door zone with open doors!
Note: This fault triggers a blockage which may only be cleared by
authorized personnel after appropriate investigation of the UCM fault
causing the blockage. It cannot be cleared by a power cycle, it can be
cleared by an ERO run or by SVT.
724 UCM in Slide C Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Indicates that the car has slid out of the door zone with open doors after
an ESTOP has aborted a run inside the DZ.
authorized personnel after appropriate investigation of the UCM fault
725 UCM BrkBlock C Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Indicates that the UCM-EN brake monitoring has detected a fault
potentially compromising the ability of the brake to hold the car.
authorized personnel after appropriate investigation of the brake fault
726 Tmout SfcMsg C Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Indicates a timeout of the communication of the SafetyChainSignals (used
by UCM-EN) from the GECB. No further run will be started until the
communication is re-established.
727 TOStp SfcMsg D Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Indicates that a timeout according to 726 has caused the abortion of a run
by timed deceleration. This reaction is shown if 726 Tmout SfcMsg occurs
while the the UCM monitoring is active (open door with DBP active).
728 Slack Rope C Applicable only when Load Weigh Type = 2 and for Interface Type =1.
This fault indicates some ropes have trouble or are out of the driving
sheave. The drive checks load data from Hitch Load Sensor for each
rope. If the load data is very low compared with Normal data, an event of
728 Slack Rope is detected. Then the elevator is not able to run until
serviced by engineer. Only the Inspection running is allowed for rescue
operation even if the “Slack rope” is not solved.
This function is enabled by the parameter “Num LwSensorData”.
729 SysTrip OCBT D1 Applicable to LVD only.
UD: Not applicable
LVD: The controller commanded the drive to disconnect system power.
730 S2 RlyFault E4 Applicable to LVD only.
UD: Not applicable
LVD: The normally-closed S2 contact was in the wrong state.
750 ARU Failure I ARO failed to operate. If the drive initiates OARO but the controller does
not respond within a certain time, the drive aborts the OARO attempt,
drops the Battery Low Voltage (BLV) relay. The drive attempts this 3
tiems. If it fails after 3 attempts, the drive logs a “750 ARU Failure” and
sends to the controller as an alert when normal power recovers.
Check the battery voltage and make sure the batteries are not dead. Make
sure the batteries are connected.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 86 of 183
751 Dischrg Batt I A discharged battery condition is detected when the drive enters into an
ARO mode and realizes that the voltage is lower than 45 volts for ARU R1
and 90 volts for ARU R2. The response is not to execute ARO. This
happens if the battery is over used and the drive expects that the charger
will resume the voltage. No blockage is done.
The batteries may have to be replaced.
752 Bat Chrg Flt I A failed battery charger board was detected during the pre-qualification
charging phase of the ARU battery. The GDCB monitors the duty cycle of
the Charger Status signal from the battery charger board after each power
up. If the signal is missing (ARU1 and ARU2), or the duty cycle of this
signal is equal to 50% +/-1% over a 2 minute period (ARU2 only), the
GDCB logs a “752 Bat Chrg Flt” and sends it to the controller as an alert.
Check connections to the battery charger board. The battery charger
board may have to be replaced.
760 Missing Batt I Reserved for OARO.
761 Batt Tmp Flt I This fault is reported if the battery temperature sensor is disconnected or
a high (or too low) temperature condition existed more than 5 minutes.
Check the battery temperature sensor.
762 Batt Flt I The battery charger discrete signal BAT-FAULT is ON. The bit is checked
during normal operation, and not checked during OARO. Fault indicates
battery is absent or over-voltage fault, or a charging fault has occurred.
If fault (ALARM):
1) If OARO condition is commanded, OARO will activate.
2) Self clearing fault. No notification sent if cleared.
3) Charger remains connected.
4) Normal Operation and OARO operation not effected.
5) Not reported unless ON more than 5-10 minutes.
6) If remains active, will be re-reported 5-10 minutes after any run.
(Not reported every run if time not elapsed)
763 Welded ARx I The pilot AR relay for AR1/AR2 contacts is welded ON. If this fault is
reported, then optimized ARO functionality is blocked, but normal runs are
enabled. An alarm is sent to the controller.
764 ARO Alarm CR I This event is sent to REM central via the controller to clear any alarm that
was created during the operation of ARU.
765 LVD Prechrg E1 Applicable to LVD only.
The pre-charge resistor by-pass transistor failed to open or failed to close
after the charging was complete.
If the by-pass transistor failed open, then the pre-charge resistor is still in
circuit, and runs will result in excessive current through the pre-charge
resistor.
If the by-pass transistor failed closed, then the pre-charge resistor was not
in circuit during pre-charge, and the capacitor bank may have encounter
excessive in-rush current.
6.3.18 Task Overrun Faults

800 1ms Task S The 1 ms task overran. Contact Enigineering.
803 Cnv Task S The Converter task overran. Contact Enigineering.
804 Inv Task S The Inverter task overran. Contact Enigineering.
805 200ms Task S The 200ms Task Overran. Contact Enigineering.
806 Illegal Pwm E3 Applicable to 430ML drive only.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 87 of 183
6.3.19 Communication Faults

900 MCSS Timeout E Applicable only for Interface Type 0.
Valid MCSS communication has not been received for 80 msecs.
901 SVC Tool Err W Service tool communication error detected via the local service tool port.
902 CAN Err W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
CAN communication error detected.
903 E2 CommWrite W An error occurred when writing to the EEPROM device.
904 LWSS Timeout W Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and Load Weigh Type is set to
1 or 2. The drive has not received a loadweigh message within a certain
time. The fault is cleared when a valid LW message is received.
905 LWSS Bad Val W Applicable only for Interface Type 1 and Load Weigh Type is set to
1 or 2. The drive received an erroneous value in the loadweigh message.
Load Weigh Type = 1 :
The drive received the full scale value for load percent from the LWB2.
The load percent value can be checked in the SVT menu of the LWB2.
Load Weigh Type = 2 :
The drive received the full scale value for the hitch load measured in kg
from the Hitch LW device. The value can be checked in the menu Monitor-
Motion, it is the first value in the display “ HitchLW: Empty: “
The fault is cleared when a valid LW message is received.
906 No LS Msg NC Applicable only for Interface Type 1.The drive has not receieved the
DriveHoistwaySignal message for 3 seconds.
This fault is used to decide if the NEXT COMMITTABLE fault response

shall continue. If this fault is not detected with a certain time, or the fault
“511 1LS & 2LS !” is not detected within a certain time, then the fault
response is changed from NEXT COMMITTABLE to TIMED DECEL.
907 Primary CRC W The drive application performs a CRC of the primary loader and this value
does not match the value computed by the conversion utility.
908 Drive CRC S The drive application performs a CRC of the drive software and this value
does not match the value computed by the conversion utility.
909 CAN BusOff W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
The CAN controller of the drive has shut itself down due to a persistent
communication problem on the CAN bus or CAN power failure (broken
connection).
910 CAN OPB_Init W Applicable only for Interface Type 1.
Initialization of the CAN communication software has failed.
911 CAN TxQ Full W Applicable only for Interface Type 1. Overflow in the transmit queue of
the CAN port, messages have been lost.
912 No FloorInfo W Applicable only for Interface Type 1. Neither the SPBC nor the GECB
have sent valid position in return to the request by the drive (timeout
200ms after request for SPBC, 200ms after its StartUp message for
GECB).
913 MCSS Warning W Applicable only for Interface Type 0.
MCSS Communication error detected. It includes Checksum, Framing,
Parity or invalid format.
914 Power E2 Err S The power section could not be identified because bad or undefined drive
code data has been read from the EEPROM on power section board 1
(DCPB).
This check is only performed at power on.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 88 of 183
915 LWSS not cal W Applicable only when Interface Type = 1.
Applicable only when Load Weigh Type = 2.
Hitch load weighing device not calibrated. The calibration is done during a
learn run.
916 Power E2 Rng S Not applicable for ULTRA drives.
Applicable only to drives with eI2C EEPROM storage capability.
This fault is logged if the scaling parameters in one of the power section
EEPROMs are out of range for the specified drive type.
917 CPLD Ver Flt E1 Not applicable for ULTRA drives.
The CPLD version is not compatible with either the HVIB EERPROM or
the GDCB EEPROm parameter setting. See the attached table for
erroneous combinations.
918 ARO Ver Flt E1 This event indicates an incompatibility between the Primary Loader and
the CPLD version in case of an optimized ARO system. The Primary
Loader must be version AAA31013CAE or later and the CPLD must be
version 9 or greater. This event occurs if either is not satisfied for an
optimized ARO system.
919 Powrbrd miss S Bad or no response from the DCPB EEPROM where the power board
information is stored.
This check is only performed at power on.
920 Micro ChkSum E Applicable to Ultra Drive only.
This fault indicates that the DSP is not communicating to the
microprocessor.
921 FPGA ChkSum E Applicable to Ultra Drive Only
This fault indicates that the DSP is not communicating to the FPGA
device.
922 FLASH Warn W Applicable to Ultra Drive Only
A communication fault was detected by the SPI FLASH test routine. This
log only event indicates that the SPI communication or SPI FLASH device
may have failed.
923 FPGA Warn W Applicable to Ultra Drive 0nly
This warning indicates that DSP received one erroneous packet from the
FPGA.
924 Micro Warn W Applicable to Ultra Drive Only
This warning indicates that the DSP received one or more consecutive
erroneous packets from the microprocessor. Fault threshold is controlled
by parameter
Micro Wrn 0.
925 No CAN-PRS C Requested PrsSignals CAN messages are not received. While the fault
persists, only ERO and MRO runs are allowed.
926 CAN PRS Msg W A discontinuity in the CAN PrsSignals was detected, a message may have
been lost.
927 DSP2FPGA Wrn W Applicable to Ultra Drive Only
This warning indicates that FPGA received one packet with wrong
checksum or stuff bits.
928 DSP2FPGA Flt E Applicable to Ultra Drive only.
This fault indicates that the FPGA received more than one packet with
wrong checksum or stuff bits.
929 UCMP Timeout C Applicable only when Interface Type = 1 and “JIS Function” = 1.
This is disconnected with UCMP module or has a CAN communication
fault with UCMP.
If you use the “JIS function” without UCMP module, “JIS Option Mode” is
set to “60” only for Rescue or any test.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 89 of 183
930 PRS TrnsSkip W Applicable only to interface type 1.

A PRS signal transition was skipped.
This fault could be logged if a CAN PrsSignals msg is lost or if one sensor
signal is delayed, sequence inverted.
931 Micro VerFlt E4 This fault occurs if the drive is a UDX 403 drive and the micro firmware
version is not >6. Check the micro version number via SVt display
parameter Micro Version.
6.4 Central Failure Management

The CFM is supported by sending a
• CfmSystemEvent messages after the occurrence of every event.
• CfmSystemEventText message in case of a blockage.
The CFM messages support the “ALL Menu”

The “ALL Menue” provides
• A common error logging of all subsystems.
• A possibility to clear all event logs together
• In case of a blockage the source and a text string are displayed
• If the blockage is clearable it can be cleared
6.4.1 Plug & See

In case of a blockage by any subsystem the servicetool may be plugged in. It displays the “All
Menu” automatically with the
• Source (blinking in the first row)
• Text String (scrolling through the second row)
• If clearable, it can be cleared by “shift 5”
Every event with a defined number of retries may lead to a blockage. The following text
messages are provided by the drive:
Event message Retries Source Text String

allowed
"100 Inv SW Oct " 4 DRIVE, High inverter current detected by software
"101 Inv I Imbal " 4 DRIVE, Asymmetric inverter current
"102 Inv Id Error" 4 DRIVE, High inverter current (field) regulator
"103 Inv Iq Error" 4 DRIVE, High inverter current (torque) regulator
"107 Inv Gate Flt" 4 DRIVE, Inverter IGBT gate supply voltage fault
"108 Inv HW Oct " 4 DRIVE, High inverter current detected by hardware
"109 Overload " 4 DRIVE, Motor current overload
"111 No Id fdbk " 4 DRIVE, Motor phase - no current (field)
"112 No Iq fdbk " 4 DRIVE, Motor phase - no current (torque)
"113 Inv IPM Flt " 4 DRIVE, Inverter intelligent power module fault
"114 Curr Ovrload" 4 DRIVE, Current overload
"115 Brk Chop Err" 4 DRIVE, Brake chop error
"116 Inv HW Ovt " 4 DRIVE, High DC link voltage detected by hardware
"117 Inv Pfai Flt" 4 DRIVE, Inverter PWM activity during IDLE
“118 Overload Dec” 4 DRIVE, Motor current overload
High current on OVF4xx drive detected by
“119 Desat Err “ 4 DRIVE,
hardware
"120 Output Cur " 1 DRIVE, Motor has currents while Sx dropped
“121 SR1 Err “ 4 CONTACTOR, SR1 relay of OVF4xx drive in the wrong state

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 90 of 183
during run
High current on inverter side detected by gate
122 Inv DeSat 4 DRIVE
drive
"200 Cnv SW Oct " 4 DRIVE, High converter current detected by software
"201 Cnv Id Error" 4 DRIVE, High converter current (field) control error
"202 Cnv Iq Error" 4 DRIVE, High converter current (torque) control error
"205 Cnv Gate Flt" 4 DRIVE, Converter IGBT gate supply voltage fault
"206 Cnv HW Oct " 4 DRIVE, High converter current detected by hardware
"207 Cnv Gnd Flt " 1 DRIVE, Converter ground fault
"208 Bus Cap Fail" 1 DRIVE, High power loss - check DC link capacitor
"209 DC Link OCT " 1 DRIVE, High DC link current
"210 Cnv IPM Flt " 4 DRIVE, Converter intelligent power module fault
"211 Battry Chrgd" 4 DRIVE, Battery charging during ARO
214 Cnv DeSat 4 DRIVE High current on converter side detected by
gate drive
"300 DC Bus Over " 3 DRIVE, High DC link voltage OR battery over-voltage
"301 DC Bus Under" 6 DRIVE, Low DC link voltage OR low battery voltage
"302 VAC Over " 0 DRIVE, High AC line voltage
"303 VAC Under " 0 DRIVE, Low AC line voltage
"304 VAC Imbal " 0 DRIVE, AC line voltage imbalanced
"305 PLL Unlock " 0 DRIVE, PLL on AC line frequency unlocked
"306 Single Phase" 1 CONTACTOR, Wrong phase wiring in Single Phase mode
"308 Welded Mx/Px" 1 DRIVE, DC link voltage not 0 - check for welded Mx or
Px relay
"400 Brake S1 SAS" 4 BRAKE, Brake switch BS1 fault
"401 Brake S2 SAS" 4 BRAKE, Brake switch BS2 fault
"402 Brake Status" 4 BRAKE, Brake status feedback disagrees with brake
command
"403 Brake BY " 4 BRAKE, BY energized before lift brake command
"404 Brake I Off " 4 BRAKE, Brake current measurement fault - high offset
"405 Brake I Drop" 4 BRAKE, High brake current during stop
"406 Brake I Hold" 4 BRAKE, Low brake current during run
"407 Brake I Max " 4 BRAKE, High brake current during run
"408 Brk S1 ESTOP" 4 BRAKE, Brake switch BS1 fault - emergency stop
"409 Brk S2 ESTOP" 4 BRAKE, Brake switch BS2 fault - emergency stop
“411 Brk S1 DECEL” 4 BRAKE, Brake switch BS1 fault – Deceleration stop
“412 Brk S2 DECEL” 4 BRAKE, Brake switch BS2 fault – Deceleration stop
Brake PWM: high current detected by
“413 Bk Desat Err” 4 BRAKE,
hardware
“416 Bk fbk tmout” 4 BRAKE, Brake pick or drop control timeout
“417 Bk SW Oct ” 4 BRAKE, Brake PWM: high current detected by software
“421 Bk Dly DecE” 1 BRAKE, Brake pick or drop control timeout
422 Brk ShrtCrkt 4 BRAKE Brake short circuit detected
Brake current detected before lift brake
"423 Brk I State " 4 BRAKE
command
"424 Brake I Neg “ 4 BRAKE Negative brake current detected
"431 Brk S3 ESTOP" 4 BRAKE Brake switch BS3 fault - emergency stop
"434 Brake S3 SAS" 4 BRAKE Brake switch BS3 fault

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 91 of 183
"500 Overspeed " 4 DRIVE ENCODER, Motor overspeed

"501 Pos Tracking" 4 DRIVE ENCODER, Position tracking error
"502 Vel Tracking" 4 DRIVE ENCODER, Velocity tracking error
"503 LRT Motion " 4 BRAKE, Motion detected while brake should be closed
"511 1LS & 2LS !" 0 POSITIONREF, 1LS & 2LS active
"512 Missing Vane" 3 POSITIONREF, Low-to-high vane transition missing
"513 No PRS Trans" 3 POSITIONREF, High-to-low vane transition missing
"514 Enc <> Vane " 3 POSITIONREF, Unexpected low-to-high vane transition
"517 DDP Error " 1 DRIVE, DDP - No vane transition within DDP time limit
"524 No Enc Signl" 0 DRIVE ENCODER, Encoder channel A input not detected
"529 No enc fdbck" 4 DRIVE ENCODER, No encoder feedback after motor started movement
"530 No enc tmout" 4 DRIVE ENCODER, No encoder feedback within timeout
"539 LvTransUnclr" 3 POSITIONREF, Unexpected LV transition
“542 Decel Req Fl” 4 DRIVE, Estop due to failed deceleration
"601 Inv Tmp Over" 0 DRIVE, Inverter over-temperature
"602 Inv Tmp Fail" 0 DRIVE, Temperature sensor failed on inverter
"604 Cnv Tmp Over" 0 DRIVE, Converter over-temperature
"605 Cnv Tmp Fail" 0 DRIVE, Temperature sensor failed on converter
"606 Mtr Tmp Over" 0 DRIVE, Motor over-temperature
"607 Reactor Temp" 0 DRIVE, Line reactor over-temperature
"608 DBR Tmp Over" 0 DRIVE, DBR over-temperature or parameter DBR Mode
"611 MTC/RTC Flt " 0 DRIVE, Over-temperature of motor, line reactor, or DBR
612 Inv IGBT tmp Inverter IGBT junction temperature over safe op limit
"702 Prechrg Time" 3 DRIVE, DC link not precharged within time limit
"703 S Rly Fault " 4 DRIVE, S1 relay in the wrong state
"704 DBD Fault " 4 CONTACTOR, DBD fault
"705 E2 Invalid " 0 DRIVE, Drive parameter invalid
"707 ADC Offset " 0 DRIVE, ADC offset out of range
"710 UIB DIB Err " 0 DRIVE, UIB/DIB inputs not consistant with run commands
"711 DBD Shutdown" 1 CONTACTOR, DBD fault
"717 Triac Stuck " 0 DRIVE, Unexpected 110VAC on safety chain output
"718 PRS Config " 0 POSITIONREF, Illegal configuration of PRS
"721 PwmExistsFlt" 4 DRIVE, Inverter PWM status disagrees with safety chain
input
"723 UCM in Run " 0 DRIVE, UCM blockage: motor on & car left DZ with open
door
"724 UCM in Slide" 0 DRIVE, UCM blockage: brake dropped & car left DZ with
open door
"725 UCM BrkBlock" 0 DRIVE, UCM blockage: because of brake failure
"726 Tmout SfcMsg" 0 DRIVE, Drive did not receive SafetyChainSignal CAN msg
for UCM
“728 Slack Rope “ 1 LOAD, Low value of one Hitch Load Sensor indicates
Slack Rope
730 S2 RlyFault 4 DRIVE S2 relay in the wrong state
"800 1ms Task " 1 DRIVE, Software 1ms task overrun
"803 Cnv Task " 1 DRIVE, Software converter task overrun
"804 Inv Task " 1 DRIVE, Software inverter task overrun
"908 Drive CRC" 1 DRIVE, Software checksum fault
"914 Power E2 Err" 1 DRIVE, Power section not identified - E2P data
incorrect
“916 Power E2 Rng” 1 DRIVE Bad or missing calibration of Power section

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 92 of 183
"917 CPLD Ver Flt" 1 DRIVE, CPLD version fault

“919 Powrbrd miss” 1 DRIVE Power section boards are missing or not
responding
6.5 Service Tool Parameters

The following table shows all the service tool parameters with their default, minimum and
maximum values. Where indicated, the default values should be used. If a default value is not
specified, the parameter should be set according to the contract. Detailed descriptions for each
are in the next section.
( * )Note: Not always visible.

31 SETUP Min Max Default Actual Access
Level
Interface Type 0 4 - 2
*JIS Function 0 1 0 2
*Duty Type 1 9999 - 2
*Drive Type 1 9999 2
*ARO Type 1 5 1 2
*ARO Release? 1/2 1 2 1 2
*ARO Delay Time s 1 600 30 2
*ARO Time Max min 3 60 5 2
*Bat Peak Curr A 3 80 40 2
*Motor Type 100 999 - 2
*Duty Speed mm/s 10 16000 - 2
*Rated rpm 1 5000 - 2
*Inertia kg-m2 0000.01 9999.99 - 2
*Encoder Type 0/1 0 1 - 2
*Enc termintn 1/2 1 2 2 2
*Encoder PPR 1000 10000 - 2
*Duty Load kg 10 16384 - 2
*AC Main Vrms 10 480 - 2
*Load Weigh Type 0 3 - 2
*Load Wgh Lvl 1 % 0 120 - 2
*Load Wgh Lvl 2 % 0 120 - 2
*Load Wgh Lvl 3 % 0 120 - 2
*Load Wgh Lvl 4 % 0 120 - 2
*Load Wgh Lvl 5 % 0 120 - 2
*Balance % 0 77 50 2
*Roping 1..4 1 4 - 2
*Vane Sensor Type 0 99 - 2
*PRS via CAN 0/1 0 1 0 2
*DDP sec 0 45 20 2
*Number of DZ 2 140 - 2
*Bottom DZ 0 20 0 2
*DZ in 1LS 0 5 1 2
*LS Pos Recov 0/1 0 1 0 2
*ARO Bus Nom DC V 40 210 180 2
*6LS-TYP 0/1 0 1 0 2
*DBR Mode 0-3 0 3 0 2
*UCM-EN on/off 0 1 1 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 93 of 183
*LowPitCnfg 0/1/2 0 2 0 2
*TwoStepSpeed 0/1 0 1 0 2
*DZ below 1DS 0 5 2 2
*DZ above 2DS 2 MAX LANDINGS - 2
*SFC InWiring 0-2 0 2 0 2
Smooth Estop 0/1 0 1 0 2
32 ADJUSTMENT Min Max Default Actual
*JIS Option Mode 0 106 0 2
*StartShock LVL2% 10 80 60 2
*Run Shock LVL% 10 80 20 2
*EAR UP MtrI Arms 3 40 40 2
*EAR Inv Lmt Arms 5 40 40 2
*EAR Overload sec 1 6 2 2
*EAR mtr OVL Arms 3 24.0 24.0 2
* DBR ENE=1 DIS=0 0 1 0 2
*DBR Cont Vol ON 700 850 770 2
DBR OFF diff V 2 10 5 2
Car Dir 0/1 0 1 0 2
Motor Phase 0/1 0 1 0 2
M Cable Leng 0/2 0 2 0 2
Single Phase 0/1 0 1 0 2
Start Gain Ot PU 0.1 40 1 1
*Start filt BW PU 0.1 20 1 2
*Start Gain In PU 0.1 20 1 2
*SG Period sec 0.01 2 0.3 2
*SG Ramp Down sec 0.01 2 0.4 2
*End Gn Vel mm/s 0 16000 0 2
Norm Vel Resp PU 0.1 1.5 1 2
Rele Vel Resp PU 0.1 2.0 1 2
Pretorque Trim % 50 150 100 2
*Pretorque Trim2% 0 100 100 2
*Pretorq Mod 0/1 0 1 0 2
*Track Error mm/s 0 600 100 2
*No Enc VThrs PU 0 1.0 0.2 2
*No enc flt t sec 0 2.0 0.4 2
*Vel Notch1 Hz 0 500 0 2
*Vel Notch2 Hz 0 500 0 2
*Notch Band Hz 0 50 2 2
*VelRate div 0..3 0 3 0 2
*Cnv Custom 0/1 0 1 0 2
*Cnv Notch Hz 800 2500 1800 2
*Cnv crf Depth 0 30 10 2
*Cnv crf Width 0 2000 300 2
*Cnv BW PU 0.5 1.0 0.8 2
*Dc V BW Hz 1 100 50 2
*Cnv L mH 0.01 100 - 2
*Cnv Saturation A 0 1000 0 2
*Cnv L Slope uH/A 0 1000 0 2
*Cnv R Ohm 0.0001 9.9999 - 2
*Ploss Thr pre % 0 100 3 2
*Ploss Thr idle % 0 100 3 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 94 of 183
*Ploss Thr run % 0 100 18 2

*Ploss Thrs Sng % 0 100 30 2
*PLL freq band Hz 0.1 60 3 2
*PLL freq time ms 0 5000 500 2
*Cnv Vmag Thrs PU 0 5 - 2
*Turnovr Delay ms 0 5000 1000 2
*VaneBias (10) mm 7 13 10 2
*Vane Hysteres mm 0 20 0 2
*Profile Delay ms 0 10000 0 2
*Relevel Delay ms 0 5000 0 2
*Hover Enable 0/1 0 1 0 2
*HoverRangeTopLdg 0 139 0 2
*Hover Min Time s 0 500 30 2
*Hover Fade Out s 0 500 10 2
*Hover delta LW % 1 120 5 2
*Hover Gain PU 1.0 3.0 1.0 2
*Pos Stop Tol mm 0 7 3 2
*Vel Stop mm/sec 0 20 3 2
Overload sec 0 40 6 2
Rated mtr i Arms 0 500 =60% rated 2
accel current
Rated Acc i PU 1 5 1.67 2
Inv I Limit % 0 100 100 2
*Cnv I Limit % 0 100 100 2
SX Pick Time ms 100 2000 200 2
*Pos Corr Lim mm 0.01 50.0 0.05 2
*Max Battery I A 0.01 100.0 - 2
AroMRo Delay Sec 10 120 10 2
MroCT Torque kg 0 500 50 2
*MROwoBrkC Trq kg 0 500 150 2
Vd out thresh PU 0 1.0 0.9 2
*Id Thresh 400V 4.0 10.0 9.0 2
*Id Thresh 700V 0 5.0 4.0 2
*CUR Limit T(Sec) 0 3.0 1.8 2
*DET SP MAX mm/s 0 400 100 2
*ARO Vbus fil ms 0 500 200 2
* ARO V Flt Dly s 0 3.0 1.0 2
* ARO Vbus Under % 0 100 80 2
*Start Shock LVL% 10 150 100 2
*Stop Shock LVL% 10 150 100 2
*NIARO Pdiv GAIN 1.0 10.0 1.0 2
*Self Tune 0/1 0 1 0 2
*Vane Length mm 10 1000 - 2
*UIS config 0/1/2 0 2 - 2
*UIS offset mm 0 250 - 2
*UIS NO=0 / NC=1 0 1 - 2
*LV1 config 0/1/2 0 2 - 2
*LV1 offset mm 0 250 - 2
*LV1 NO=0 / NC=1 0 1 - 2
*LV2 config 0/1/2 0 2 - 2
*LV2 offset mm 0 250 - 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 95 of 183
*LV2 NO=0 / NC=1 0 1 - 2

*DIS config 0/1/2 0 2 - 2
*DIS offset mm 0 250 - 2
*DIS NO=0 / NC=1 0 1 - 2
*Custom HwCmp 0/1 0 1 0 2
*Latcy UisDisOn % 0 6000 100 2
*Latcy UisDisOff% 0 6000 100 2
*Latcy 1/2LV on % 0 6000 100 2
*Latcy 1/2LV off% 0 6000 100 2
*RopeStrtch comp% 0 1000 100 2
*HitchPress comp% 0 1000 100 2
*Duty_kg % of car 0 200 50 2
*PWM dnsft I % 0 200 100 2
*PWM dnsftFreq Hz 0 150 150 2
Therm Bal Off % 0 50 33 2
Inv Unipolar 0/1 0 1 0 2
Cnv Bipolar 0/1 0 1 0 2
* ETSC Trip Vel % 0 100 94 2
* SSB Trip Vel % 0 100 90 2
*CZ Drop Time ms 0 500 15 2
*HitchLw emptyBOT 0 99999 0 2
*HitchLw emptyTOP 0 99999 0 2
*HitchLw full BOT 0 99999 0 2
*HitchLw CaliDone 0 1 0 2
*Remote Auth min 0 65535 0 2
*SmoothStop Id PU 0 10 2.5 2
33 BRAKE Min Max Default Actual
*BRK TRQ %Load1 100 300 150 2
*BRK TRQ %Load2 100 300 125 2
*BrkTrqOffset kgm 0 200 0 2
*BRK TRQ Trim % 50 150 100 2
*ZERO SPEED2 mm/s 1 20 10 2
*RATE BRK TRQ kgm 0 200 0 2
*BRK TRQ MODE 0 1 0 2
*Brk Cnt Type 0-3 0 3 0 2
*Brk Sw Type 0-6 0 6 1 2
*Brk Sw Type 0-7 0 7 1 2
*Brk Sw 1 Config 1 4 1 2
*Brk Pick Time ms 0 60000 1500 2
*Brk Setl Time ms 0 10000 500 2
*Lft Brk Delay ms 0 10000 100 2
*Brk Lftd Dely ms 0 10000 30 2
*Brk ramp up t ms 100 10000 500 2
*Brk ramp dn t ms 0 10000 500 2
*Brk hold Dely ms 0 5000 0 2
*Brk Pick A 0 10.0 7.0 2
*Brk Pick % 0 100 85 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 96 of 183
*Brk Hold A 0 7.0 7.0 2

*Brk Drop % 0 50 10 2
*Brk Bus OVT % 100 150 120 2
*Brk OCT A 0 14.0 12.0 2
*Brk Bus UVT % 0 100 40 2
*Brk Nom DC V 0 350 230 2
*Brk dcv fscale V 80 1200 1000 2
*Brk R 1.0 50 15 2
*Brk L 0.1 50 5 2
*Brk War Det Cnt 0 10 3 2
34 MACHINE Min Max Default Actual
*Mtr Shft Pwr kW 0 400 20 2
*Rtd Mtr Spd RPM 1 5000 1200 2
*Rtd Mtr Ln-Ln V 100 600 380 2
*Rtd Mtr I Arms 0 600 0 2
*Rtd Mtr Freq Hz 5 60 40 2
*LR Ampl KP/Ki PU 0 0.5 0.2 2
*LR Ampl RTC PU 0 0.5 0.35 2
*Mtr Lsigma mH 0.1 10 1 2
*Self Tune Config 0 4 0 2
*Low Volt Op 0/1 0 1 - 2
*Geared StrJR 0/1 0 1 0 2
*Number of Poles 2 100 - 2
*Rated Trq Nm 0.1 20000 - 2
*Rated Trq I A 0.1 1000 - 2
*Ld mH 0.01 1000 - 2
*Lq mH 0.01 1000 - 2
*R Ohm 0 30 - 2
*T/A Slope % 0 100 - 2
*T/A Offset A 0 500 - 2
*Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 15 - 2
*Id Saturation A 0 1000 - 2
*Iq Saturation A 0 1000 - 2
*Ld Slope mH/A 0 30 - 2
*Lq Slope mH/A 0 30 - 2
*Ld Slope uH/A 0.0 30000 - 2
*Lq Slope uH/A 0.0 30000 - 2
*Lq0 mH 0.01 1000 - 2
*Lq1 1/mA 0 400 - 2
*Lq2 1/mA^2 0 1000 - 2
*Ld0 mH 0.01 1000 - 2
*Rated Mag I A 0.1 1000 - 2
*Peak Mag I A 0 1000 - 2
*Rtr TimeConst s 0.001 10 - 2
*Max Flux time s 0.1 5.0 1.0 2
*Rated Motor rpm 1 5000 - 2
*Mag err thr eDeg 0 40 20 2
*LRT DC Level PU 0.1 0.5 0.1 2
*LRT mot err eDeg 0 10 8 2
*Fld Wkn Lvl % 0 200 100 2
*Fld Wkn BW Hz 0 50 10 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 97 of 183
*Inv Hrmnc On 0/1 0 1 0 2

*Inv Hrmnc dS % -0.9999 0.9999 0 2
*Inv Hrmnc dC % -0.9999 0.9999 0 2
*Inv Hrmnc qS % -0.9999 0.9999 0 2
*Inv Hrmnc qC % -0.9999 0.9999 0 2
35 PROFILE Min Max Default Actual
*Man Speed mm/s 10 750 250 2
*Man Acc mm/s2 100 1200 350 2
*Man Dec mm/s2 100 1200 750 2
*Insp Speed mm/s 10 630 - 2
*Nom Speed mm/s 0 16000 - 2
*Min Speed mm/s 0 16000 630 2
*Min Speed Load % 0 110 80 2
*Max Speed Load % 0 70 50 2
Spd Drop vMin V 30 75 42 2
Spd Drop vMax V 30 75 65.5 2
Spd Drop iMax % 5 200 58 2
*Accel mm/s2 25 1200 - 2
*Decel mm/s2 25 1200 - 2
*Jerk mm/s3 100 2400 - 2
*Corr Speed mm/s 0 2000 - 2
*Base Speed % 50 100 75 2
*Creep Speed mm/s 0 150 0 2
*Creep Length mm 0 600 0 2
*Creep Jerk 0/1 0 1 1 2
*Zero Vel Tim ms 0 2000 500 2
*MCSS Overspeed % 0 200 200 2
*MAN Overspeed % 0 200 125 2
*ARO Overspeed % 0 160 150 2
*ARO Speed mm/s 50 350 100 2
*ETP Spe %DutySpe 50 100 80 2
*ETP2 Spe %Duty 50 100 80 2
*ETP delta % 1 20 5 2
*Buffer/ETSD mm/s 0 16000 1000 2
Man Load % 0 125 50 2
*UCM Acc Up mm/s2 100 4000 1200 2
*UCM Acc Do mm/s2 100 4000 1200 2
*Dec Speed mm/s 0 16000 Blank 2
36 FACTORY Min Max Default Actual
*Factory Password 0 32000 0 2
*DC Bus fscale V 800 1200 1000 2
*AC Line fscale V 800 1200 1000 2
Ac/Dc Calibra PU 0 1.5 0 2
61 ENG ADJUST Min Max Default Actual
*Engineer Passwrd 0 32000 0 2
*Min IGBTpulse us 0.0 2.0 0.20 2
*PX Pick In IDLE 0 1 0 2
*PFC Volt Lvl % 0 200 100 2
*PWM freq Hz 2000 20000 10000 2
*Min IGBT on t us 0 5 1.5 2
*Pos Gain 1 4 2.5 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 98 of 183
*Pos Err Lim mm 0 1000 254 2

*Vel fscale PU 1 500 100 2
*LRT Frequency PU 0.1 1.0 0.9 2
*LRT Ld Cycles 1 10 2 2
*Vq out thresh PU 0.0 1.0 0.5 2
*Sngl PWM ang deg 0 90 20 2
*Test Noise Lvl % 1 1000 100 2
*Test Noise BW Hz 0.01 2500 1000 2
*Target mm 0 99999 10000 2
*Drive Pmax kW 0 1000 1000 2
*Load in car % 0 100 0 2
*Drive Vrated m/s 0 15 0 2
*Belt Cmp Off A 0 10 0 2
*Belt CmpSlp mA/m 0 2000 0 2
*BeltCmp Lrn? 0/1 0 2 1 2
*LowSpdBnd mm/sec 0 100 0 2
*SpdSteps mm/sec 0 100 0 2
*2D Enable? 0/1 0 1 0 2
*ARO Bus LwrLim V 150 800 500 2
*ARO Mot Id PU 0 10 2 2
*Max Bat Chrg I A 0 20 0 2
*Brk Min Hold I A 0 20 0.5 2
Brk Min Pick I A 0 20 0.5 2
*Brk I Max A 0 20 10 2
*Brk I Offset A 0 20 4 2
*Brk PWM Freq div 1 6 3 2
*SVT Timeout min 0 999 240 2
*Cnv PWM 2/3 2 3 2 2
*Micro Wrn 0 - 4 0 4 0 2
*Dis Chg Time sec 0 1000 300 2
*Rollback Call mm 0 50 20 2
*PrChg Min Thrs V 0 100 22 2
*PrChg Min Time s 0 100 7 2
*Precharge Type 0 1 0 2
*Inv ReLe ILimit% 0 150 100 2
*ML TRIP EN 0/1/2 0 2 1 2
62 ENG TEST Min Max Default Actual
*Engineer Passwrd 0 32000 0 3
*Engineering Test 0 10000 0 3
*EngTest Param1 0 99999 0 3
*HrmncReg enb 0/1 0 1 1 3
*Inv HrmncCmp Deg 0 180 0 3
*Inv Hrmnc BW Hz 0 1800 500 3
*Inv Hr Thrs mm/s 0 99999 0 3
*TimeDec Test 0/1 0 1 0 3
*Encoder Test 0/1 0 1 0 3
*Ovrtmp Estop 0/1 0 1 0 3

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 99 of 183
*HS Overtmp deg C 0 200 85 3

*Flr To Test 0 1000 0 3
*Flr Pos mm 0 99999 0 3
*Flr New Pos mm 0 99999 0 3
*Flr Vane Len mm 0 99999 0 3
*ALWA Confg 0/1/2 0 2 0 3
*ARO FLAG AR-Rly 0 3 0 3
*ARO FLAG BLV-Rly 0 3 0 3
*ARO Faults 0 8 0 3
*ARO Alarm 0 1 0 3
*Fan Random Area 0 10 0 3
*Temp Over Test 0 100 0 3
* CAN Enc um/cnt 1 99999 1 3
*UCM-EN BlkLatchd 0 3 0 3
*DDP Fault 0 1 0 3
*FAN off/0 on/1 0 1 1 3
*SSM Config 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*SSM PhantRPeriod 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*SSM MaxSlip 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*SSM MaxSlip2 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*SSM MaxSlip3 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*VTE LdRatio Hyst 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*VTE Hitch Strtch 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*VTE MaxErrSameEg 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*VTE MaxErrOtherE 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
*VTE MaxDevFrmNom 0 0xFFFFFFFF - 3
64 I2C EEPROM Min Max Default Actual
*Factory Password 0 32000 0 2
*I2CEE Val@2.0000 0 65535 0 2
*I2CEE Val@3.____ 0 65535 0 2
*I2CEE Val@4.____ 0 65535 0 2
*intEE Val@i.____ 0 65535 0 2
Note 1: Define as the number of signals in the DAT (30959) and the GDCB Code
6.6 Detailed Parameter Description

This section contains the detail descriptions for each of the service tool parameters.
6.6.1 3-1 CONTRACT
Interface Type Specifies the control system and interface being used.
0 – RS422 Interface, MCSS or GCS, profile generator in controller
1 – CAN Interface, TCBC or GCS, profile generator in drive
2 – RS422-JIS interface, GCS, profile generator in controller
3 – RS422-JIS-R interface, GCS, profile generator in controller
4 – CAN interface, GCS, profile generator in controller
Note: only interface 1 applicable to ULTRA drive.
See the table below for more detailed dependencies.
Interface Type 0 1 2 3 4
RS422 Interface X
RS422-JIS Interface X

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 100 of 183
RS422-JIS-R Interface X
CAN Interface X X
Profile Generator and Position Control in Drive X
Profile Generator and Position Control in Controller X X X X
Compatible with GCS-EN X
Compatible with GCS-JIS X X
Compatible with GCS-NSAA X X
Compatible with MCSS X
Compatible with TCBC X
Optimized ARO X X
JIS Feature – Software Reset (Remote Rescue) X X
JIS Feature – Battery Mode (ARO) X X
JIS Feature – Automatic recovery at Earthquake X X X
Brake torque maintainence function X X
JIS Feature – Overcurrent detection X X
JIS Feature – Start/Stop Shock Detect X X X
JIS Feature – Drive error code (remote Inspection) X X
JIS Feature – Brake switch detection X X
JIS Feature – DBR-JIS X X
ULTRA Drive X X X X
JIS Function Specifies if all the following JIS features are enabled or disabled:
JIS Feature – Software Reset (Remote Rescue)
JIS Feature – Battery Mode (ARO)
JIS Feature – Automatic recovery at Earthquake
JIS Feature – Overcurrent detection
JIS Feature – Start/Stop Shock Detect
JIS Feature – Drive error code (remote Inspection)

JIS Feature – Brake switch detection
JIS Feature – DBR-JIS
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled
Duty Type Visible only for JIS.
Specifies the duty No. of elevator system
1 – No specification of the duty (Default)
1000~1999 – For Gen2 P&B system type
Drive Type Visible only if drive has no eI2C EEPROM storage capabilities (no drive type
auto-detection).
Specifies the drive being used.
ARO Type Specifies the type of Automatic Rescue Operation (ARO) being used:
1 – NSAA/JIS: None (no ARO hardware connected to drive)
EN: ARPB-based ARO capable - ARO initiated via CAN if ARPB-
based hardware connected
2 – JIS Interruptible Automatic Rescue Operation for JIS (ARO)
3 – Reserved
4 – NSAA/EN Optimized Automatic Rescue Operation (OARO)
5 – JIS Interruptible Automatic Rescue Operation for 428G Drive
(HSOVF_ARO)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 101 of 183
ARO Release? 1/2 Visible only with ARO Type = 4 and “Interface Type” = 3.
This parameter specifies if ARU1 hardware (48Vdc) or ARU2 hardware (96Vdc) is
present. The default value is 1, where the ARU hardware is expected to be 48V
battery voltage based architecture. In ARU1, ARO is executed only in the
direction of gravity. If ARU R2 is used as the hardware, then this parameter needs
to be set to 2.
ARO Delay Time s Visible only with ARO Type = 4 and “Interface Type” = 3.
This is the delay time the drive determines it is time to start an ARO operation
starting from the loss of the ac line voltage. Additional delay is introduced due to
reliable detection time.
ARO Time Max min Visible only with ARO Type = 4 and “Interface Type” = 3.
This is the total time that the drive allows for a single ARO run. The main purpose
is to save battery energy. At the end of this time the drive disconnects the battery
from drive logic also, leaving the drive totally loss of power condition until the ac
line comes back.
Bat Peak Curr A Visible only with ARO Type = 4.
This parameter sets the maximum battery current command (converter current
limit) during an ARO run.
The software default is 45A, however, the installer must adjust the parameter as
follows for ARU R1:
50 - for ARU R1.
45 - for ARU R2.
Motor Type Specifies the motor being used. See Section 9 for a list of pre-defined motor
types and their associated parameter values.
If the motor is not in the list, choose:

901 - Generic Induction motor
902 - Generic PM motor
The equivalent circuit parameters in section 3-4 MACHINE have to be
entered for custom motors.
Duty Speed mm/s Contract Duty Speed. For reference, mm/s = FPM x 5.08
This should be the contract speed (e.g. 1000 mm/s if the elevator is specified for
1m/s, even if the machine is rated for more). The rated RPM must be the
corresponding rpm of the motor (not necessarily the motor's nominal speed). The
elevator's nominal speed "Nom Speed mm/s" in the profile menu is linked to the
"Duty speed" such: It determines the maximum speed that is reached during the
profile of a NORMAL run. It may be smaller than the duty speed. It should not be
set considerably higher than the duty speed because then it would trigger the
overspeed detection.
Warning: For CAN-based controllers, set the elevator
to ERO before changing this parameter. Otherwise, the
car may start a correction run using the wrong speed and result in
tripping the governor. Ensure the three parameters: Encoder PPR,
Duty Speed mm/s, and Rated rpm are set consistent
with each other before placing the car on normal operation.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 102 of 183
Rated rpm Required motor RPM to reach contract speed. Describes a fixed relation to
contract duty speed (in mm/sec) considering roping, gear ratio, and sheave
diameter (in mm):
RPM = speed x Gear Ratio x Roping x 19.1 / Sheave Diameter
Inertia kg-m2 Total system inertia with balanced car. The value should be set according to
contract data.
One way to estimate the inertia is to use the following formula:

J = 2 + 6 * DUTY_LOAD * (SHV_RADIUS^2)
Other ways to estimate inertia are given in Sections 9.1 and 9.2.
Note that the inertia value is automatically adjusted in the software as a function
of car load. The adjusted value can be viewed in the service tool Inert used
kg-m2.
Encoder Type 0/1 Specifies the type of encoder:
0 – Incremental encoder
1 – Sinusoidal encoder
When using incremental encoder, there is a signal integrity check which can
result in the fault 524 No Enc Signl. The check is only performed if the
encoder termination is double-ended (see Enc termintn 1/2).
When using sinusoidal encoder, there is also a signal integrity check that results
in the fault 541 SinCos Warng.
Enc termintn 1/2 This parameter stands for the type of ending of the encoder.
1 - single ended termination
2 - double ended termination
Encoder PPR Specifies the number of pulses per revolution (PPR) of the encoder.
Duty Load kg Contract Duty Load. This parameter is used only to calculate pretorque.
Pretorque, as a force applied at the car, is commanded as a percentage of the
rated full load of the car. For reference, kg = lbs / 2.2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 103 of 183
AC Main Vrms Visible only if AC line monitoring hardware is present in the drive.
This parameter specifies the nominal AC line voltage.
This parameter is used to determine the under-voltage and over-voltage
conditions as well as the control gains for the converter.
• When the drive is connected to 3-phase supply:
The maximum value that can be entered is 480 Vrms. If the voltage
entered is in the range [380, 415], then it is assumed the nominal voltage
is the average of the range, 397.5 Vrms.
• When the drive is connected to single-phase supply:
o If the input is line to neutral, the allowable range is [220, 240]
o If the input is line to line, the allowable range is [380, 415]
See also 302 VAC Over and 303 VAC Under.
Load Weigh Type Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies loadweighing device:
0 - None
1 - LWB2 via CAN
2 - Hitch LW via CAN
3 - Discrete LW via CAN
Visible only when Load Weigh Type = 3
Load Wgh Lvl 1 % For discrete load weighing the percentage of load in car when the first switch
Load Wgh Lvl 2 % goes off and,
Load Wgh Lvl 3 %
Load Wgh Lvl 4 % the percentage of load in car when the second switch goes off and,
Load Wgh Lvl 5 % the percentage of load in car when the third switch goes off and,
the percentage of load in car when the fourth switch goes off and,
the percentage of load in car when the overlaod switch goes off.
Balance % Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Nominal counterweight balance setting in percent.
Roping 1..4 Visible only when Interface Type = 1 and Load Weigh Type = 2 OR Interface
Type = 2 OR 3.
The value is used at hitch load weighing calibration during the learn run and by
the brake torque test.
Vane Sensor Type Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies vane sensor configuration, see also 4.8 PRS:
0 – PRS2 with ADO/RLEV, 4Sensors, 250mm, N.O.
1 – PRS2 w/o ADO/RLEV , 3Sensors, 250mm, N.O.
2 – PRS2, 1Sensor, 250mm, N.O.
3 – RPD-P2, 1Sensor, 250mm, N.C.
4 – CEDES Photo, 1Sensor, 150mm, N.O.
5 – CEDES Photo, 4Sensor, 250mm, N.O.
6 – RPD-P3, 4Sensors, 250mm, N.O.
7 – PRS5, 1Sensor, 170mm, N.O.
8 – PRS8, PRS10 1Sensor, 130mm, N.O.
9 – PRS2 1+2LV, 2Sensors, 250mm, N.O.
10 – RPD-P7A, 4Sensors, 150mm, N.O.
11 – RPD-P8A, 4Sensors, 180mm, N.O.
12 - PRS8N, 4 Sensors, 170mm, N. O.
13 - PRSxx, 1 Sensor, 140mm, N.O.
14 - PRSxx, 3 Sensors, 140mm, N.O.
15 - PRS8N, 1 Sensor, 170mm, N.O.
99 – Custom PRS, configure in 6.6.2 3-2 ADJUSTMENT,
“Vane Length mm ” ...”DIS NO=0 / NC=1”

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 104 of 183

PRS via CAN 0/1 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies if PRS signals are connected directly to drive or read via CAN:
0 – PRS signals wired directly to the drive
1 – PRS signals received via CAN bus
DDP sec Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies the time for Delayed Drive Protection. Has to be increased according to
contract speed and floor distance if required.
See fault: 517 DDP Error
Number of DZ Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Total number of door zones.
Note: Value may be changed by the system’s auto-installation routines.
Bottom DZ Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Bottom door zone number. Must match TCBC parameter “BOTTOM”. Should be
zero except for units within a group with different bottom door zone numbers.
DZ in 1LS Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Number of door zones in 1LS.
LS Pos Recov 0/1 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Setting this parameter to ‘1’ will allow the drive to recover position during rescue
run within LS if there is only one door zone in LS.
0 – Prohibit position recovery in LS during rescue run
1 – Allow position recovery in LS during rescue run
Default setting is ‘0’.
ARO Bus Nom DC V Visible only when Interface Type = 2 or 3.
Visible only when “ARO Type” = 2.
This parameter is used for “DC Bus Under fault” during ARO operation. The
default is set to “180V”.
6LS-TYP 0/1 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Type of 6LS sensor.
0 = standard hardware sensor present
1 = no hardware 6LS present; 2LS evaluated instead (by GECB).
Note: This parameter is mainly used as a "safety" backup for a GECB parameter
which has the same name. Both parameters must be set to the same value.
DBR Mode 0-3 Visible only when Interface Type = 1
To avoid energy recovering an external Smart DBR unit can be used. It must be
connected to the DC link.
0 - standard regen operation as usual, no Smart DBR required.
1 - no energy recovering:
In case of negative converter current the converter is disabled and the
control of the DC link voltage has to be performed by the external
Smart DBR unit.
2 - switchable DBR mode via discrete input P 6.6:
0V: standard regen operation
24V: no energy recovering
3 - same as 2 but discrete input logic reversed.
UCM-EN on/off Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Activate or deactivate UCM (Unintended Car Motion) Monitoring feature as
designed for EN81 controller.
0 = UCM-EN monitoring off
1 = UCM-EN monitoring on
Note: When using this feature, the corresponding feature in the GECB must be
enabled (UCM_TYP=3), too, otherwise the drive will not run!!!

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 105 of 183
LowPitCnfg 0/1/2 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1

A skirt under the car has to be fold away if the car enters the bottom position.
Therefore modified speed profiles are selected if the drive enters or leaves the
bottom position.
LowPitCnfg = 0: No Low Pit feature, Standard
LowPitCnfg = 1: Low Pit speed = 0,15 m/s
LowPitCnfg = 2: Low Pit speed = 0,1 m/s
Note: The GECB parameter (HWY-TYP = 0, 4, 8 or 12) must be set accordingly,
otherwise the GECB prevents runs.
TwoStepSpeed 0/1 Visibile only when “Interface Type” = 1
This feature is used in Korea for modernization market. It allows the speed of the
modernized elevator to be increased using the same buffer, top clearance and pit
depth. Setting this parameter to 1 enables the two speed operation feature:
0 : Normal operation
1: Set the two step speed profile operation
The requirements for the buffer, top clearance and pit depth are achieved by
lowering the speed when approaching the terminal zones. The speed reduction is
triggered by additional door zone sensors near the top and bottom. The sensors
are installed in addition to the normal door zone sensors. The location of the door
zone sensors is indicated by the following two parameters “DZ below 1DS” and
“DZ above 2DS”. The speeds are determined by the parameters:
“Nom Speed mm/s” and “Dec Speed mm/s”.
DS status can be monitored with “DS DS1 DS2 FLR”.
For sensor failure, see the event “410 Low Speed”.
DZ below 1DS Visibile only when “TwoStepSpeed 0/1” = 1
Bottom side sensor position of two step speed profile operation.
Example: If bottom floor = 1F and sensor position =4F,
“DZ below 1DS” = 3 (4F – 1F)
DZ above 2DS Visibile only when “TwoStepSpeed 0/1” = 1
Top side sensor position of two step speed profile operation.
Example: If top floor = 10F and sensor position =8F,
“DZ above 2DS” = 2 (10F – 8F)
SFC InWiring 0-2 Visible only for Ultra-Drives and when “Interface Type” = 1.
Specifies Safety Chain input configuration.
0 - Safety Chain input via UIB & DIB; battery operation via MRO_SC_IN
1 - Safety Chain input via UIB & DIB in parallel for all operation modes
(including MRO).
This setting is necessary for e.g. controllers with 48VDC safety chain
and UD403 drives where no MRO_SC_IN input is available.
2 - Safety Chain input via MRO_SC_IN for all operation modes.
This setting is necessary for e.g. controllers with 48VDC safety chain
where the UIB & DIB triac inputs cannot be used.
Smooth Estop 0/1 Enable/ Disable Smooth Stop Operation (SSO). The feature allows lower
deceleration during emergency stops due to power failures. Currently supported
only on Low Voltage Architecture based systems.
0 – Disables smooth stop feature
1- Enables smooth stop feature
6.6.2 3-2 ADJUSTMENT


Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 106 of 183

JIS Option Mode Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1 or 416G, 428G or 460G drives.
0 - Normal (Default)
1 - For motor running with safety device locked. (Gen2 P&B)
If this is set to 1, the following setup is automatically used.
Track Error mm/s = 400 and No enc flt t sec =2.0.
2 – TRACKING_200
3 – TRACKING_300
11 – EAR_SETUP (see StartShock LVL2% and Run Shock LVL%)
41 – “Learn run mode” is disabled
50 – Shipment default parameter for GeN2 Comfort/Life
51 – auto-setting for Single phase parameter
52 – auto-setting for 3 phase parameter
99 – EAR_TEST (see StartShock LVL2% and Run Shock LVL%)
100 - FAN_NORMAL (see Fan Random Area)
101-106 – Duty Parameter set for GeN2 Comfort/Life
StartShock LVL2% Visible only for JIS Option Mode= 11 or 99
This parameter is used for “start shock” detection in EAR.
“Shock flag” becomes “TRUE” with the following condition between the run start
and “Vel fbk = DET SP MAX mm/s”.
“Absolute Inv Iq Diff [A]” > “Shock Threshold [A]” where:

“Absolute Inv Iq Diff [A]” = “Inv Iq Ref_max” - “Inv Iq Ref_min”
“Inv Iq Ref_max”: Max of “Inv Iq Ref” during the term for Start Shock.
“Inv Iq Ref_min”: Min of “Inv Iq Ref” during the term for Start Shock.
“Shock Threshold [A]” = “Rated Trq I A” x “Start Shock LVL2%”
Run Shock LVL% Visible only for JIS Option Mode = 11 or 99
This parameter is used for “run shock” detection in EAR.
“Shock flag” becomes “TRUE” with the following condition during
“mcssCommand.dictatedAcc = 0” and “Vel fbk > DET SP MAX mm/s”.
“Absolute Inv Iq Diff [A]” > “Shock Threshold [A]” where:

“Shock Threshold [A]” = “Rated Trq I A” x “Run Shock LVL%”
EAR UP MtrI Arms Visible only for JIS Option Mode= 11 or 99.
This parameter is used for “run shock” detection in EAR.
If UP run is done with EAR, this setting threshold checks the “Inv Iq fbk”.
EAR Inv Lmt Arms Visible only for JIS Option Mode= 11 or 99.
This parameter is used for “Drive Limit” detection in EAR.
If the run is done with EAR, this setting threshold checks the “Inv Iq fbk”.
When the “Inv Iq fbk” exceeded this threshold, the Drive sends “DL” to MCSS.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 107 of 183

EAR Overload sec Visible only for JIS Option Mode= 11 or 99.
This parameter specifies the maximum time the drive is allowed to operate at the
rated accelerating current of the motor in EAR. The rated accelerating current of
the motor is assumed to be 167% of the continuous current rating of the motor
which is specified by the parameter EAR mtr OVL Arms.
The maximum time allowed at other operating currents is prorated and can be
calculated using the following formula:
 I 2 − I cont
2

t =  accel t ovl , i > I cont
 i − I cont 
2 2
t = ∞, i ≤ I cont
where
Icont = continuous current rating of the motor (Arms), specified by
service tool parameter EAR mtr OVL Arms.
Iaccel = rated accelerating current of the motor (Arms), assumed to be
1.67 x Icont
tovl = allowed operating time, given by service tool parameter EAR
Overload sec
i = actual drive current (Arms)
See fault: 109 Overload
EAR mtr OVL Arms Visible only for JIS Option Mode= 11 or 99.
Specifies the continuous rated current of the motor in EAR. See above.
DBR ENE=1 DIS=0 Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1.
This mode is set to 1, when using a generator to input AC power or having a DBR
option.
This mode might generate "VdcOver" in Regen operation if there is not DBR unit.
DBR Cont Vol ON Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1.
This setting value sets control voltage of the DC bus voltage of the converter.
Set with consideration of "ON voltage" of the DBR unit.
DBR OFF diff V Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1.
This setting value sets control voltage of the DC bus voltage of the converter.
Set “DBR_Cont_Vol_ON” – this value with consideration of "OFF voltage"of the
DBR unit.
Car Dir 0/1 Specifies direction of the car:
0 - original
1 - reversed direction of profile and speed encoder
Must be toggled when car starts in other than expected direction.
Motor Phase 0/1 Specifies orientation of motor phases relative to encoder direction:
0 - NEMA compliant motor phasing
1 - reversed direction of motor phasing
Must be toggled if motor phases are wired incorrectly.
M Cable Leng 0/2 This parameter indicates about the length of the motor cable to the drive.
0 (default) – For ultra drive family cable lengths between 0 to 7 meters.
1 – For ultra drive family cable lengths between 7 to 10 meters.
2 – For ultra drive family cable lengths between 10 to 20 meters.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 108 of 183

Single Phase 0/1 This parameter specifies if a single-phase power supply is being used:
0: 3-phase power supply
1: single-phase power supply
Single phase operation has limitations depending on the drive rating as follows:
UD401/402/403:
Single-phase power is intended for use temporarily during construction only. The
speed is automatically limited to 150 mm/sec during construction if single phase
mode is enabled.
CAUTION: Do not use single phase supply for normal operation. UD401/402/403
are not rated for single phase input during normal operation.
UD404:
Permanent single-phase operation is possible with 50% of nominal and
acceleration currents at nominal speed only for NSAA application. Permanent
single phase conditions:
- 480VAC single phase input
- Motor rated voltage and current: less than 513 VAC, 11 Arms
For JIS application with 200 VAC input, converter current shall be less than 30
Arms. Step-up transformer should be used for permanent single phase operation
if increased capacity is required.
Start Gain Ot PU Used to increase the responsiveness of the velocity control when load weigh
sensor is not valid or not installed. A value of 1.0 essentially disables it. It can be
increased to typical of 4.0. The maximum acceptable might depend on the
system because it causes vibration problems as it is increased. However, it can
be used for discrete load weighing sensors to decrease roll back.
Start filt BW PU This parameter is visible only if Start Gain Ot PU is set larger than 1.
Used to increase the responsiveness of the velocity control when load weigh
Start Gain In PU This parameter is visible only if Start Gain Ot PU is set larger than 1.
Used to increase the responsiveness of the velocity control when load weigh
SG Period sec This parameter is visible only if Start Gain Ot PU is set larger than 1.
Use to control the duration of high bandwidth velocity control startup for rollback
reduction. This parameter is used in conjunction with Start Gain Ot PU.
SG Ramp Down sec This parameter is visible only if Start Gain Ot PU is set larger than 1.
Use to control the duration of transition from high velocity bandwidth control to
nominal for rollback reduction.
End Gn Vel mm/s This parameter is visible only if Start Gain Ot PU is not set to 1.
This parameter specifies the speed below which the velocity gain approaches
and becomes equal to the Start Gain Ot PU parameter setting at the end of a
run.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 109 of 183
Norm Vel Resp PU This parameter specifies the normalized response (normalized time constant) of
the PI regulator of the outer velocity loop. The default value of this parameter is 1.
This parameter is useful for adjusting the stopping performance of systems that
have a relatively high friction to inertia ratio by setting this parameter to less than
1.
Rele Vel Resp PU Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1 or 416G, 428G or 460G drives.
This parameter specifies the normalized response (normalized time constant) of
the PI regulator of the outer velocity loop during relevel runs. The default value
of this parameter is 1. This parameter is useful for adjusting the stopping
performance of systems that have a relatively high friction to inertia ratio by
setting this parameter to less than 1.
Pretorque Trim % Used to adjust pre-torque values to prevent rollback. Normally, this should be set
to 100%.
Pretorque Trim2% Used to adjust the pretorque values during regenerative runs only. This is useful
in applications that use a worm-gear to compensate for star-jerk caused by the
worm-gear. See related parameter “Geared StrJR 0/1”
Pretorq Mod 0/1 When set to 1, this parameter enables a special pre-torque function for systems
that have a high hoistway mechanical friction component that is both load and
direction dependent (i.e. Double Deck Systems). When enabled, this function
helps prevent rollback or roll forward for these systems by modifying the pre-
torque calculation to account for the mechanical friction (when pre-torque differs
significantly from stop torque).
Before this function is enabled, it is required that the load adjustment of MCSS
should be completed. Also, this parameter should be set to 0 during any and all
loadweigh system adjustment.
0- disable.
1- enable.
Track Error mm/s Visible only when NOT GEN2 machine (See “Motor Type”)
In all operating modes, the velocity command is compared to the velocity
feedback. If a deviation exists which exceeds this parameter, a fault is logged.
Default value for Gen2 motors is 100 mm/sec. See fault: 502 Vel Tracking
No Enc VThrs PU Visible only when NOT GEN2 machine (See “Motor Type”)
This parameter specifies the threshold for the total motor voltage at which a no
encoder fault is reported. If the fault 529 No enc fdbck is reported, the
encoder feedback was below 1mm/s and the motor voltage was above this
threshold. The typical value and the default for Gen2 motors is 0.2PU, which is
about 90 volts line-line motor voltage.
No enc flt t sec Visible only when NOT GEN2 machine (See “Motor Type”)
This parameter specifies the time for which the encoder speed is below 1mm/s
while a nonzero velocity reference is commanded to the drive. If this time is
exceeded, the fault 530 No enc tmout is declared.
The following settings are recommended:
Geared: 0.6
Gearless: 0.4
The default value in the software is 0.4 seconds.
Vel Notch1 Hz These parameters specify the center frequencies of two independent notch filters
Vel Notch2 Hz in the velocity loop used to attenuate a mechanical resonance outside the
bandwidth of the velocity regulator. These notch filters can be disabled by setting
these parameters to zero. The width of the notch is set by the parameter Notch
Band Hz
Notch Band Hz This parameter specifies the width of the notch for the two notch filters in the
velocity loop.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 110 of 183

VelRate div 0..3 Specfies the rate of the encoder read and velocity calculation task.
0 – 1kHz rate
1 – 500Hz rate
2 – 250Hz rate
3 – 125Hz rate
Cnv Custom 0/1 Visible only when active converter present.
Specifies the control parameters for the converter current regulators.
0 – The converter control parameters are set to default values. The
following converter-specific SVT parameters are not visible.
1 – The converter control parameters are set according to SVT
parameters. The following converter-specific parameters in the SVT
become visible and must be set.
Cnv Notch Hz Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Specifies the center frequency of a notch filter in the converter d & q current
regulators. The width of the notch is 300 Hz and the depth of the notch is 10dB.
The filter is used to attenuate any resonance that may occur on the AC mains in
the frequency range 800 to 2300 Hz.
Cnv crf Depth Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Applicable only to OVF428G and OVF460G
This is crfDepth for Converter Notch Filter in units of dB.
The other Drives use “crfDepth = 10”.
Cnv crf Width Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Applicable only to OVF428G and OVF460G
This is crfWidth for Converter Notch Filter in units of Hz.
The other Drives use “crfWidth = 300”.
Cnv BW PU Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
This parameter adjusts the desired converter current regulator (displayed in the
monitor menu Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.)
bandwidth. This parameter is usually 0.7 and should not be changed. This
parameter becomes useful when the drive has to be used with a step up
transformer and when it is necessary to use a notch filter Cnv Notch Hz for the
converter.
Dc V BW Hz Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
This parameter adjusts the desired dc bus voltage regulator bandwidth and it is
set to 50Hz. This parameter becomes useful when the dc capacitor value is
incorrect or out of tolerance.
Cnv L mH Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Unsaturated current regulator inductance
Cnv Saturation A Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Current level when line reactor saturation starts.
Cnv L Slope uH/A Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Line reactor inductance variation as a function of current.
Cnv R Ohm Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Current regulator resistance that controls disturbance rejection.
Ploss Thr pre % Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
Specifies the power loss threshold as a percent of VA capability of the drive that
is allowed during precharging. If the threshold is exceeded, the fault 208 Bus Cap
Fail will be logged.
Ploss Thr idle % Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
is allowed during idle. If the threshold is exceeded, the fault 208 Bus Cap Fail will
be logged.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 111 of 183
Ploss Thr run % Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.

is allowed during running (PWM active). If the threshold is exceeded, the fault
208 Bus Cap Fail will be logged.
Ploss Thrs Sng % Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1= 1.
is allowed during running (PWM active) and the drive is connected to a single
phase power supply. If the threshold is exceeded, the fault 208 Bus Cap Fail will
be logged.
PLL freq band Hz Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1” = 1.
The phase-locked loop (PLL) in the software locks to the AC main frequency.
Once locked, the PLL frequency is monitored to ensure that the frequency is
within a tolerance band specified by this parameter (nominal frequency ±
tolerance band). If the frequency falls outside of this band for an amount of time
greater than specified by the parameter PLL freq time ms, then the fault
response is ESTOP. This helps prevent the car from continuing to run in case the
OCB or AC line main disconnect is switched off during low-speed regenerative
runs (otherwise the car could continue to run from the regenerative energy from
the drive). See fault 307 PLL Freq Rng.
PLL freq time ms Visible only when “Cnv Custom 0/1”= 1.
If the PLL frequency falls outside of an allowed frequency band for a time greater
than specified by this parameter, a PLL fault is triggered with ESTOP fault
response. See fault 307 PLL Freq Rng.
Cnv Vmag Thrs PU Visible only when active converter present.
This parameter sets the threshold for the 212 Cnv Vmag Flt fault.
The default value is set based on drive type. With AAA31400CBC software
version and above, the default for UD drives is 1.05 except UD401 V3.1(LVA
India drive). The default for UD401 V3.1 is 1.35. The default for GDCB2 based
drives is 1.2.
Turnovr Delay ms Visible only when “Interface Type” = 0
Specifies the amount of delay between fault detection and fault reaction during
the turnover tests for the safeties. See Section 6.8.2 for more details.
VaneBias (10) mm Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Offset in mm applied to all vane positions. Useful for adjusting the landing
position after a learn run is performed.
Vane Hysteres mm Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1 vane
Hysteresis of PRS sensors, compensates overshoot in levelling.
Example: Running down into ldg x, the car stops 8mm lower
ON
than when running up => Hysteresis 4mm. HYST
Note: Sensor hysteresis has same effect on levelling as regulator overshoot HYST
(see Pos fbk versus Pos ref in M-1-3). Ideally, regulator overshoot should be OFF
trimmed separately, e.g. by adjusting inertia.
Profile Delay ms Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1

Specifies the amount of time that the profile will be delayed in Profile Mode and
CAN Mode.
Relevel Delay ms Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Used to suppress PRS signal glitches: A relevel run will only be started after the
UIS/DIS signal has been off the vane for Relevel Delay ms.
Hover Enable 0/1 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Enables hovering feature, i.e. holding the car at a landing with brake open.
HoverRangeTopLdg Visible only when “Hover Enable 0/1”= 1
Top landing of range (starting at bottom=0) where hovering shall be performed.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 112 of 183
Hover Min Time s Visible only when “Hover Enable 0/1”= 1

Minimum time to hover even in the absence of LW excitations. Time of potential
Relevel runs is included.
Hover Fade Out s Visible only when “Hover Enable 0/1”= 1
Time to hover after an LW excitation, includes time spent on actual Relevel runs.
Hover delta LW % Visible only when “Hover Enable 0/1”= 1
Deviation of LW value from last latched value that shall establish an “LW
excitation”. When an excitation is detected, the current LW value is latched for
detection of the next excitation. Units: % of duty load
Hover Gain PU Visible only when “Hover Enable 0/1”= 1
This is the outer velocity gain during hovering. Increasing this value may minimize
the amount of car deflection in response to a large load step in the car. However,
the tradeoff is that the damping will decrease, making the car more susceptible to
bounce and/or vibration.
Pos Stop Tol mm Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies the position stopping tolerance that is used to decide the car has
reached the target.
See fault: 506 Stopping Err
Vel Stop mm/sec Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies the velocity stopping tolerance that is used to decide the car has
reached the target.
See fault: 506 Stopping Err
Overload sec This parameter is used to detrmine the overload protection and specifies the
maximum time the drive is allowed to operate at the rated motor accelerating
current. The rated motor accelerating current is determined by the SVT
parameters Rated mtr i Arms and Rated Acc I PU:
Iacc,rated = Rated mtr i Arms x Rated Acc I PU
where Rated mtr i Arms is the continuous rated current of the motor.
When the actual motor current is lower than the rated motor accelerating current,
the allowable time increases. The drive is allowed to run indefinitely when the
actual operating current is at or below the rated motor current. The exact time
allowed at any operating current can be calculated using the following formula:
 I 2 − I cont
2

t =  accel t ovl , i > I cont
 i − I cont
2 2

t = ∞, i ≤ I cont
where
Iaccel = rated motor accelerating current, determined by:
Rated mtr i Arms x Rated Acc I PU
Icont = continuous current rating of the motor (Arms), specified by service
tool parameter Rated mtr i Arms.
tovl = maximum time allowed to operate at the rated motor accelerating
current and specified by SVT parameter Overload sec
i = actual motor current (Arms)
See fault: 109 Overload
Rated mtr i Arms This parameter is used to detrmine the overload protection and specifies the
continuous rated current of the motor in Arms. This is the rating at which the
motor can operate indefinitely.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 113 of 183

Rated Acc I PU This parameter is used to detrmine the overload protection and specifies the
rated accelerating current of the motor in per-unit of the rated motor current
parameter Rated mtr i Arms. For example, if Rated mtr i Arms is set to
100 Arms and Rated Acc I PU is set to 1.67, then the rated accelerating
current of the motor is 167 Arms.
Inv I Limit % Specifies the current limit for the inverter as a following calculation. This also
determines the overcurrent trip level.
Inverter Limit(Apeak) = 0.95 x “Drive.InvOCTThesh” x “Inv I Limit %”
“Drive.InvOCTThesh” is,
UD401 = 20.6, UD402 = 29.5, UD403 = 75, UD404 = 110
See fault: 100 Inv SW Oct
Cnv I Limit % Visible only when active converter present.
Specifies the current limit for the converter as a following calculation. This also
determines the overcurrent trip level.
Converter Limit(Apeak) = 0.95 x “Drive.CnvOCTThesh” x “Cnv I Limit %”
“Drive.CnvOCTThesh” is,
UD401 = 33.44, UD402 = 55.1, UD403 = 97, UD404 = 120
See fault: 200 Cnv SW Oct
SX Pick Time ms Applicable only if “Precharge Type” is set to 1
This parameter is used to control the precharge drop time. The precharge drop
time specifies the time from when the DC bus reaches its charged threshold to
when the drive state is allowed to proceed to ready to run.
Pos Corr Lim mm Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1.

Specifies the maximum position correction allowed every 1 ms period. This is
used to reduce any vertical vibration that may occur due to a large position
correction. Such a large correction can occur if the signal latency of the PRS is
large enough and the speed is high enough. Best results are achieved when this
parameter is set less than 0.1 mm.
Max Battery I A Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1 or ARO Type = 4
Specifies the maximum instantaneous battery current allowed during MRO and
ARO.
This current basically acts as a lowered converter over current functionality.
The default value is 30 A. For "MRO Constant Torque" operation this parameter
must be set to significant lower values; e.g. 2..3.
AroMRo Delay Sec Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
This parameter controls the amount of delay before entering battery mode. It
needs to be selected such that it allows the EMI capacitors in the drive to
discharge sufficiently before connecting to the battery mode, i.e. dependent on
drive type and controller. The delay time is communicated to the GECB that
executes the delay -> see documentation of GECB/OpControl.
MroCT Torque kg Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Specifies an auxiliary torque which is generated by the drive for "MRO Constant
Torque" operation. This is necessary when the car does not move by gravity after
brake has lifted in case of balanced load.
This additional torque is specified by an equivalent in-car load in [kg].
A value of 0 disables this feature.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 114 of 183

MROwoBrkC Trq kg Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
For E&I panel cost reduction controller equipped with GECBII, BCB III and one
12V battery:
MRO mode w/o brake control by the drive. The brake is only controlled by the
GECB II. The GECB II first tries MRO w/o drive, only in cases of nearly balanced
load when the car does not move by gravity the drive is switched on.
“MROwoBrkC Trq kg” ensures a roll forward immediately after the GECBII has
opened the brake. The MRO run is continued velocity controlled like a standard
MRO run.
Vd out thresh PU D-axis current regulator output threshold when the brake is not lifted yet. This is
used to detect failed current sensors or disconnected motor from the drive as a
result of wiring errors or relays not working etc. See fault 111 No Id fdbk.
The current default in the software is 0.9.
The recommended setting going forward is 0.5.
Id Thresh 400V Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
This parameter is used when battery operation is active and the DC bus
overvoltage control is active.
If DC BUS voltage is more than 400V within “CUR Limit T (sec)” with ARO, then the
“Current Id” of motor is controlled by the drive.
If DC BUS voltage became more than 400V, the “Current Id” has increment
“Delta Id[A] /5ms" until “Max Id - 4 [A]".
Then, if DC BUS voltage exceeded 600V, the “Current Id" has the increment
“Delta Id[A] /5ms" until "Max Current Id".
Then, if DC BUS voltage became less than 590V, the “Current Id” has the
decrement “Delta Id[A] /5ms" until “3 [A]".
Delta Id[A] = (“Id Thresh 400v (A)” –2 ) / 50
Some logics of this function are reset at the beginning of every run.
Id Thresh 700V Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
If DC BUS voltage exceeded 700V, the “Current Id" has the increment “Delta Id[A]
/5ms" until " Id Thresh 700V (A)".
Delta Id[A] = (“Id Thresh 400v (A)” –2 ) / 50
Some logics of this function are reset at the beginning of every run.
CUR Limit T(Sec) Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
See related parameter: Id Thresh 400V, Id Thresh 700V

DET SP MAX mm/s Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1 or 416G, 428G or 460G drive.
This parameter is used for shock detection.
Start and stop Shock are detected during “Vel fbk < DET SP MAX mm/s”.
ARO Vbus fil ms Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
A filter was added to ignore the dc cap fail fault detection for 200 ms after MX pick
on transition from JIS ARO to normal. This is in addition to the existing filter to
switch between high and low thresholds when MX picks. See related fault: 208
Bus Cap Fail.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 115 of 183
ARO V Flt Dly s Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
Specifies the filter time of detected "301 DC Bus Under" for ARO of 428G.
(HSOVF_ARO)
Detects the "301 DC Bus Under" if this filter time passes with a status under VDC
threshold.
ARO Vbus Under % Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
Specifies the threshold of "301 DC Bus Under" for ARO of 428G. (HSOVF_ARO)
Detects the "301 DC Bus Under" if VDC voltage is under this threshold during
ARO.
Start Shock LVL% Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1 or 416G, 428G or 460G drives.
This parameter is used for “start shock” detection.
“Shock flag” becomes “TRUE” with the following condition between the run start
and “Vel fbk = DET SP MAX mm/s”.
“Absolute Inv Iq Diff [A]” > “Shock Threshold [A]”

“Shock Threshold [A]” = “Rated Trq I A” x “Start Shock LVL%”
Please see related fault 540 Shock Detect.
Stop Shock LVL% Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1 or 416G, 428G or 460G drives.
This parameter is used for “stop shock” detection.
“Shock flag” becomes “TRUE” with the following condition between “Vel fbk =
(DET SP MAX mm/s) x 0.9” and the run stopped in deceleration.
“Absolute Inv Iq Diff [A]” > “Shock Threshold [A]”

“Inv Iq Ref_max”: Max of “Inv Iq Ref” during the term for Stop Shock.
“Inv Iq Ref_min”: Min of “Inv Iq Ref” during the term for Stop Shock.
“Shock Threshold [A]” = “Rated Trq I A” x “Stop Shock LVL%”
Please see related fault 540 Shock Detect.
NIARO Pdiv GAIN Visible only for ARO Type = 3.
When the runs of NIARO with less than 700Vdc were changed from Normal run,
the P Gain are adjusted by this parameter.
If this parameter is set “2”, the P Gain is one half of Normal P Gain.
Self Tune 0/1 Visible only when ” Motor Type” = 901
This parameter enables self-commissioning tests.
0 – disable self-commissioning
1 – enable self-commissioning
Vane Length mm Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
Vane length, same for all vanes, variance of 80mm tolerated and learned (LR).
UIS config 0/1/2 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
0 – UIS sensor does not exist in this configuration (GDCB input open)
1 – UIS configured, position in “UIS offset mm ” is above vane center
2 – UIS configured, position in “UIS offset mm ” is below vane center
UIS offset mm Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
Distance from vane center (= landing level) up/down to sensor position (when car
is aligned with landing).
UIS NO=0 / NC=1 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
0 – UIS logic is “Normally Open”, i.e. PRS output is closed (~24V) on vane
1 – UIS logic is “Normally Closed”, i.e. PRS output is open (or 0V) on vane
LV1 config 0/1/2 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
LV1 configuration, corresponding to “UIS config 0/1/2”

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 116 of 183
LV1 offset mm Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
LV1 offset, corresponding to “UIS offset mm ”
LV1 NO=0 / NC=1 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
LV1 logic, corresponding to “UIS NO=0 / NC=1”
LV2 config 0/1/2 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
LV2 configuration, corresponding to “UIS config 0/1/2”
LV2 offset mm Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
LV2 offset, corresponding to “UIS offset mm ”
LV2 NO=0 / NC=1 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
LV2 logic, corresponding to “UIS NO=0 / NC=1”
DIS config 0/1/2 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
DIS configuration, corresponding to “UIS config 0/1/2”
DIS offset mm Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
DIS offset, corresponding to “UIS offset mm ”
DIS NO=0 / NC=1 Visible only when“ Vane Sensor Type” = 99 (Custom PRS).
DIS logic, corresponding to “UIS NO=0 / NC=1”
Custom HwCmp 0/1 This parameter enables customization of the PRS and hoistway compensation.
0 – default compensation (usually sufficient)
1 – customized, compensation tuned by factors below
Note: Setting this flag to 0 resets all tuning factors below to 100%.
Latcy UisDisOn % Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
Factor tuning the position feedback compensation for PRS signal latency of the
UIS and DIS sensor moving onto a vane.
Example 150% : At each speed, the respective compensation ∆s is 1.5 times of
what the default compensation would be. -> 0% disables compensation.
Latcy UisDisOff% Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
UIS and DIS sensor moving off a vane. -> 0% disables compensation.
Latcy 1/2LV on % Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
1LV and 2LV sensor moving onto a vane. -> 0% disables compensation.
Latcy 1/2LV off% Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
1LV and 2LV sensor moving off a vane. -> 0% disables compensation.
RopeStrtch comp% Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
Factor tuning the position feedback compensation for rope/belt stretch caused by
acceleration/deceleration. -> 0% disables compensation.
HitchPress comp% Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
Factor tuning the position feedback compensation for hitch spring compression
caused by acceleration/deceleration. -> 0% disables compensation.
Duty_kg % of car Visible only when“Custom HwCmp 0/1” = 1 .
Factor adapting the position feedback compensation for rope/belt stretch and
hitch spring compression to the impact of the load in the car. This value is set to
the percentage of duty load related to the mass of the empty car.
Example: If empty car = 3200kg and duty load = 1600kg, this parameter should
be set to Duty_kg % of car = 1600 / 3200 = 50% = 50
PWM dnsft I % This specifies the level of current, as a percentage of drive rated current, above
which the PWM frequency of the inverter maybe downshifted by a factor of 2. In
order to downshift, the motor frequency must also be less than the frequency
specified by the parameter “PWM dnsftFreq Hz”.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 117 of 183
PWM dnsftFreq Hz This specifies the frequency below which the PWM frequency of the inverter
maybe downshifted by a factor of 2. In order to downshift, the motor current must
also be more than the level specified by the parameter “PWM dnsft I %”.
To disable PWM downshifting altogether, set the parameter to zero. To allow

PWM downshifting to be based only on the “PWM dnsft I %” parameter
setting, set the “PWM dnsftFreq Hz” to 150.
Therm Bal Off % Applicable to 430ML drive only.
Inv Unipolar 0/1 Applicable to 430ML drive only.
Cnv Bipolar 0/1 Applicable to 430ML drive only.
ETSC Trip Vel % Applicable only to JIS applications.
Velocity threshold for ETSC function.
SSB Trip Vel % Applicable only to JIS applications.
Velocity threshold for SSB function.
CZ Drop Time ms Applicable only to OVF416G, OVF428G and OVF460G
This is filtered time for Drop state of CZ Relay.
If CZ Drop state is passed this set time with Safety chain active, then “700 Safety
Chain” is logged.
HitchLw emptyBOT Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Calibration value for interpreting hitch loadweighing data: This parameter allows
manual modification of the calibration. At bottom position with empty car, the hitch
load weighing device should send this value. The unit is kg. The actual value sent
by the hitch load weighing device can be read using the menu Monitor-Motion, it
is the first value in the display “ HitchLW: Empty: “
This parameter is learned automatically during a learn run if the display string
"Calibrate Hitch LoadW? y=1/n=0" is confirmed by 1.
HitchLw emptyTOP Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
manual modification of the calibration. At top position with empty car, the hitch
HitchLw full BOT Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
manual modification of the calibration. At bottom position with duty load, the hitch
HitchLw CaliDone Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Enable/Disable the hitch load weighing calibration. If Load Weigh Type = 2 and
HitchLw CaliDone = 0, the event message "915 LWSS not cal" is generated and
the drive starts the run using default pretorque and “tight” velocity loop start
gains.
This parameter is set automatically during a learn run if the display string

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 118 of 183
Remote Auth min The drive has multiple levels of service tool feature access. The access level of
the tool the user has connected to the drive determines the access level that will
be granted to the user. The only exception is when a remote administrator
temporarily raises the access level of the drive to L2, allowing a user with a L1
tool connected locally in the machine room to gain L2 access.
This parameter is the “Remote Authentication Timer”. When the timer is nonzero,
the access level is increased from level 1 to level 2. The timer default is zero. The
timer can be set non-zero only by admin access level. Its range is limited 0 to
65535 min (approximately 45 days). The timer is visible by level 2 access and
can be lowered or cleared by L2 access.
SmoothStop Id PU Visible only when smooth stop feature is enabled. This parameter controls the
amount of Id current that could be commanded by the drive in smooth stop
operation.The default value is 2.5. This means the Id current could be 2.5 * rated
torque current.
6.6.3 3-3 BRAKE

BRK TRQ %Load1 Visible only for when brake torque test is active
This parameter is used only for Brake Maintenance Test.
Sets this parameter for load in percent
100% :Duty load in car is 100%
ICD: Interface Type=3 Drive Command(DC2) Bit3=1
BRK TRQ %Load2 Visible only for when brake torque test is active
Sets this parameter for load in percent
100% :Duty load in car is 100%
ICD: Interface Type=3 Drive Command(DC2) Bit3=1
BrkTrqOffset kgm Visible only for when brake torque test is active
Correction data for Iq_reference of “Brake maintained torque”
BRK TRQ Trim % Visible only when brake torque test is active
This is the parameter to adjust a condition of the job site.
The default value is 100%.
Min: 50, Max : 100
ZERO SPEED2 mm/s Visible only for when brake torque test is active
The threshold to detect the motor running
RATE BRK TRQ kgm Visible only for when brake torque test is active
“Brake maintained torque” of 100% load when JIS Option Mode is set to “98” as
test mode.
BRK TRQ MODE Visible only for when brake torque test is active
0 :System test
1 :Only Motor test, not system

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 119 of 183
Brk Cnt Type 0-3 0: External Brake Control – Not functional for Ultra Drive at this time
1: Internal Simple Pick/Drop Control with No Current Feedback. Typically
used if brake coil parameters are not known, or if controlling a relay coil
instead of a brake coil.
2: Internal Pick/Drop Control with Current Monitoring. Replicates
functionality of many existing drives (e.g. 401/2/3/4). Monitors current
feedback and does error checking based upon this.
3: Internal Current Regulated. Recommended type for Ultra Drive with
Greenpower machines (or other brakes with known parameters).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 120 of 183
Brk Sw Type 0-7 Visible only when NOT GEN2 machine (See “Motor Type”)
@GDCB2 Drive, else: Specifies the type of brake switches present:
Brk Sw Type 0-6 0 - brake switches not present, requires BS1= Gnd, BS2=Gnd.
1 – 2 brake switches present (NC: +24V at brake dropped)
2 – 2 brake switches present, with inverted signals (NO)
3 - 3 brake switches present working to 2 inputs BS1 and BS2:
24V+
S1
BS1
S2
SX
S3
BS2
SX
BX
BS1
BS2
4 - Brake switches not present, requires BS1=Gnd, BS2=+24V.

Some PMSM machines & brakes are designed to work safe without
brake switch monitoring (e.g. REIVAJ PMSM machines). To prevent
that a different motor type is operated without brake switches, a
separate brake switch type has been created with a fixed input
configuration. This input configuration is used to ensure that the
correct motor type is connected to the controller. In case of a different
wiring the drive software does not allow the motor to run.
5 - 41T machine with BS relay chain: NC contacts (=+24V @ brake
dropped) wired in series to BS1, NO contacts wired in series to BS2.
6 - 41T machine test mode: DO NOT CONFIGURE IN THE FIELD.
7 - Visible only for GDCB2 drives: Generic configuration of 5 brake
switch inputs according to Brk Sw 1 Config … Brk Sw 5 Config.
Note: GDCB2 drives with Brk Sw Type 0-7 <>7 require the unused BS
inputs (BS3-5) to be wired to GND.
See fault 400 Brake S1 SAS.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 121 of 183

Brk Sw 1 Config Visible only for GDCB2 drives with Brk Sw Type 0-7 =7.
1 - BS input NC (+24V @ brake dropped, GND/open @ picked)
2 - BS input NO (GND/open @ brake dropped, +24V @ picked)
3 - Brake switch not configured: Permanently connected to GND
4 - Brake switch not configured: Permanently connected to +24V
Brk Sw 2 Config According to Brk Sw 1 Config above.
Brk Sw 5 Config According to Brk Sw 1 Config above but without option 4 (permanent connection
to +24V is reserved for a handover test mode).
Brk Pick Time ms If Brk Cont Type = 2 or 3; OR Brake Switches exist:
Determines the maximum time allowed for the brake to pick. If it is exceeded, the
fault 418 Bk lft tmout is logged.
If Brk Cont Type = 0 or 1; AND Brake Switches do not exist:

Determines the amount of time to wait after the brake is commanded to pick, after
which the brake is assumed to have lifted.
Brk Setl Time ms If Brk Cont Type = 2 or 3; OR Brake Switches exist:
Delay to declare brake dropped (untorquing) after BS and/or brake current (<Brk
Drop %) had indicated dropped state. If BS/current conditions aren’t met
within 3sec, the fault 419 Bk drp tmout is logged.
If Brk Cont Type = 0 or 1; AND Brake Switches do not exist:

Determines the amount of time to wait after the brake is commanded to drop,
after which the brake is assumed to have dropped.
Lft Brk Delay ms Time to delay lift brake command to allow for pre-torquing (ms).
Brk Lftd Dely ms Used if Brk Cnt Type = 2 or 3; or Brake Switches exist.
After the brake switches show picked and/or brake current exceed pick threshold,
this is the delay time before the brake is considered picked. . This time is
relevant for start of profile (flight time), and for time of starting ramp down to hold
current. Note that if there is no current sensing and no brake switches, then "Brk
Pick Time ms" is used instead.
Brk ramp up t ms Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3
Time over which the brake current command is ramped from 0 to the pick current.
Brk ramp dn t ms Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3
Time over which the brake current command is ramped down to 0 when the brake
is commanded to drop.
Brk hold Dely ms Applicable only for 428 and 460 drives.
Time to maintain brake pick current after lifting of the brake has been detected.
This ensures enough time to fully seat the cores before reducing to the hold
current.
Brk Pick A Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3
Determines the desired pick current of the brake.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 122 of 183

Brk Pick % Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3 and "Brk Sw Type 0-4"
is NOT set to 4.
If “Brk Sw Type 0-4” is 1-3:
Determines percent of Brk Pick current that is sufficient to consider that the brake
is picked when BS also indicates ‘picked’.
If “Brk Sw Type 0-4” is 4:

The brake pick current threshold is set by the parameter Brk Min Pick I A
instead.
In either case, the related fault is 418 Bk lft tmout.

Brk Hold A Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3
Determines the desired hold current of the brake.
Brk Drop % Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3
Determines percent of Brk Pick current used to consider that the brake is dropped
and BS also indicate dropped. Recommend setting is 20%.
The related fault is 419 Bk drp tmout.
Brk Bus OVT % Applicable only for 428 and 460 drives.
Trip point set as percentage of brake pick current to declare a Brake bus
overvoltage fault.
Brk OCT A Visible only when“Brk Cnt Type 0-3” = 2 or 3
Determines overcurrent level for fault detection in the brake control.
Recommended value is to set the same as Brk I Max A.
The fault that is logged is 417 Bk SW Oct
Brk Bus UVT % Applicable only for 428 and 460 drives.
Trip point set as percentage of brake pick current to declare a Brake bus
undervoltage fault.
Brk Nom DC V Applicable only for 428 and 460 drives.
The nominal voltage on the brake DC link. This value is a result of the input AC
line voltage and the ratio of the brake transformer. This parameter is used to
scale the gains in the brake current regulator.
Brk dcv fscale V Applicable only for 428 and 460 drives.
When the inside of the DSP carries out an operation, brake bus voltage full scale.
Brk R Used if Brk Cnt Type = 3.
Sets the Brake coil resistance in Ohms.
Brk L Used if Brk Cnt Type = 3.
Sets the Brake coil inductance in Henrys.
Brk War Det Cnt Visible only for “JIS Function” = 1
When the "420 Bk Dly DetW" was detected, the Drive moves to the IDLE state.
The drive repeats a re-try running with the cycle of this parameter value.
6.6.4 3-4 MACHINE

The following parameters are visible only when parameter Motor Type is set to 901 or 902.
These parameters are used only if the motor is not included in the list of predefined motors in
Section 9. If Motor Type is NOT set to 901 or 902, these parameters are automatically set
according to predefined motors in Section 9 and cannot be modified.

Mtr Shft Pwr kW Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
This parameter is used when the drive is in self-tune mode only. Enter the motor
power in kilowatts shown on the motor nameplate.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 123 of 183

Rtd Mtr Spd RPM Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
This parameter is used when the drive is in self-tune mode only. Enter the rated
motor speed in rpm shown on the motor nameplate. Do not enter the contract
rpm.
Rtd Mtr Ln-Ln V Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
motor voltage shown on the motor nameplate.
Rtd Mtr I Arms Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
This parameter is used to calculated rated magnetizing and rated torque current
in case the measurement-based calculation fails.
Rtd Mtr Freq Hz Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
motor frequency in Hertz shown on the motor nameplate.
LR Ampl KP/Ki PU Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
Parameter used by self-commissioning. This limits the drive current during the
locked-rotor Kp and Ki portion of the self commissioning tests. This value
should be set to 0.2, which corresponds to 20% of the rated drive current.
LR Ampl RTC PU Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
Parameter used by self-commissioning. This limits the drive current during the
locked-rotor RTC portion of the self commissioning tests. This value should be
set to 0.35, which corresponds to 35% of the rated drive current.
Mtr Lsigma mH Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1 and ” Motor Type” = 901.
This parameter is used when the drive is in self-tune mode only. Enter the motor
transient inductance (Lσ) if known. If not known, enter 0.001. The drive will
determine this value during the self-commissioning tests
Self Tune Config Visible only when ”Self Tune 0/1” = 1
This parameter should only be used after consultation with engineering. This
parameter should be used only if the default settings for self commissioning fail or
result in unsatisfactory results.
This parameter sets the self tune test configuration and specifies which tests will
run.
0 – default test configuration; determines locked rotor RTC using real
impedence.
1 – enable frequency sweep test during locked rotor test
2 – determine locked rotor RTC using imaginary impedenece
3 – determine locked rotor RTC using imaginary impedenece and enable
frequency sweep test
4 - Determine inertia using only speed criteria (speed > ½ rated speed).
Otherwise, the default for the inertia test is to use only the deceleration
portion of the run.
Low Volt Op 0/1 Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies that the motor is a low voltage motor as typically found in
modernization. When set to 1, the converter regulates the DC bus to the rectified
AC line voltage and sets the PWM frequency to 8KHz.
0 – Low voltage operation for modernization disabled.
1 – Low voltage operation for modernization enabled.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 124 of 183

Geared StrJR 0/1 Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902 and Interface Type = 1.
This parameter is set to 1 only for certain geared applications in China that have
extremely low gear box efficiencies, and works only for CAN based systems, but
not 422 based systems.
Setting this parameter to 1 enables a modification to the pretorque in which the

pretorque is scaled by the parameter “Pretorque Trim2%” for regenerative runs
only. For non-regenerative runs, the pretorque is scaled by the parameter
“Pretorque Trim %”. This allows pretorque to be adjusted in a non-linear fashion
to account for non-linearities in certain worm-gear machine.
Number of Poles Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies the number of poles of the motor.
Rated Trq Nm Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies the torque produced by the motor at the rated torque current (and rated
magnetizing current when using an induction motor).
Rated Trq I A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Rated torque current (peak value).
Ld mH Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies the transient inductance in the d-axis of the motor, including any filter
inductance. The value represents the per-phase equivalent circuit of the motor
and filter.
Lq mH Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies the bulk inductance in the q-axis of the motor. For induction motors, Ld
should be set equal to Lq.
R Ohm Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies the equivalent resistance of the motor including any filter resistance.
This parameter is used to set the integral gain of the current regulators, and
should be adjusted to achieve desired performance of the regulators.
T/A Slope % Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
This parameter and the next are used to achieve the maximum torque per amp in
a PM motor by modifying the d-axis current reference as a function of q-axis
current. This achieves higher motor efficiency. The parameter specifies the
percentage change in d-axis current per unit change of q-axis current. The
equations are:
Id = −
TA slope
100
( )
Iq − TA offset , Iq > TA offset
Id = 0, Iq ≤ TA offset
To disable this feature, set this parameter to zero.
T/A Offset A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
See previous parameter. This parameter specifies the amount of q-axis current
below which d-axis current is zero.
Kt Slope 1/kNm Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
This parameter is used to modify the torque gain of the inner velocity loop. This
accounts for the change in the actual torque gain of the machine during field
weakening to ensure consistent velocity loop performance. The parameter
specifies the amount of change in the d-axis current (defined in A) per unit
change in the inverse of the torque constant (defined in A/kNm). The reason that
the units is in A per kNtm is due to the fact that this parameters tends to be small
to be able to enter from the SVT. To disable this feature, set this parameter to
zero.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 125 of 183

Id Saturation A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
This parameter specifies the negative d-axis current level at which the d-axis
motor inductance begins to saturate. Below this current level, the inductance is
treated as constant and is specified by the parameter:
Ld mH
Iq Saturation A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
This parameter specifies the absolute q-axis current level at which the q-axis
motor inductance begins to saturate. Below this absolute current level, the
inductance is treated as constant and is specified by the bulk inductance
parameter: Lq mH
Ld Slope mH/A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902 and the drive type is NOT 428 and
460.
This parameter is used to modify the proportional gain of the d-axis current
regulator. This accounts for the change in the actual inductance of the machine
due to saturation of the motor iron to ensure consistent current regulator
performance. This parameter specifies the reduction in inductance per unit
increase in d-axis current. To disable this feature, set this parameter to zero.
Lq Slope mH/A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902 and the drive type is NOT 428 and
460.
This parameter is similar to the previous parameter, except it applies to the q-axis
instead of the d-axis of the motor.
Ld Slope uH/A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902 and Drive Type = 428 or 460.
This parameter is used to modify the proportional gain of the d-axis current
regulator. This accounts for the change in the actual inductance of the machine
due to saturation of the motor iron to ensure consistent current regulator
performance. This parameter specifies the reduction in inductance per unit
increase in d-axis current. To disable this feature, set this parameter to zero.
Lq Slope uH/A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902 and Drive Type = 428 or 460.
This parameter is similar to the previous parameter, except it applies to the q-axis
instead of the d-axis of the motor.
Lq0 mH Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
The parameters Lq0, Lq1 and Lq2 affect the accuracy of the encoder position
error fault management only. These parameters are coefficients of a polynomial
curve fit of the q-axis bulk inductance, which is used to calculate the q-axis bulk
inductance value of the motor at a given operating point. The resulting q-axis bulk
inductance is used as an input to the Secondary Magnet Position estimator, which
is used to detect encoder slip.
If these parameter values are not known, then set Lq0 = Lq, and set Lq1 = Lq2 =
0. This makes the bulk inductance equal to the nominal value of incremental
inductance Lq. See related fault detection: 504 Enc Pos Err.
Lq1 1/mA See previous parameter.
Lq2 1/mA^2 See previous parameter.
Ld0 mH Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
The parameter Ld0 is used to tune the field weakening motor voltage regulator. It
is important this value is correct to guarantee that the drive can provide the
necessary bandwidth in controlling the motor voltage as a result of back emf due
to magnets and resistive voltage drop due to currents. Set Ld0 = Ld if the exact
value is not known.
Rated Mag I A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901
Specifies the rated magnetizing current when using an induction motor (peak value,
not RMS).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 126 of 183

Peak Mag I A Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901
Specifies the peak value (not RMS) to which the d-axis magnetizing current is
ramped during magnetization when using an induction motor. If this parameter is
set larger than the rated magnetizing current, then fast fluxing of the motor
occurs. Once the motor is fluxed, the magnetizing current is ramped down to the
rated magnetizing current. As this parameter is increased, flux time decreases
(hence “fast fluxing”) which may improve elevator flight time. If this parameter is
equal to or smaller than the rated magnetizing current, then fast fluxing does not
occur and the magnetizing current simply ramps up to the rated magnetizing
current.
Rtr Time Const s Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901
Specifies the rotor time constant in seconds when using an induction motor.
Max Flux time s Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901(Induction Motor)
This parameter sets the time which returns RTR.
The Pre-torque should be secured till brake is opened.
There is possibility that the vibration originates in the time of the start when the
time is short.
Rated Motor rpm Visible only when” Motor Type” = 901 or 902
Specifies the true rated rpm of the motor independent of a particular elevator
application. This parameter is used to set the velocity threshold for the “504 Enc
Pos Err” fault management. This fault management becomes active when either
the velocity command or the velocity feedback is greater than 30% of this
parameter setting. For future software releases, this parameter will also be used
for a self-commissioning feature for both induction and PM motors.
See fault: 504 Enc Pos
Mag err thr eDeg Visible only when” Motor Type” = 902
This parameter specifies the allowable difference between the magnet position
derived from the encoder and the result of the Locked Rotor Test (LRT), and the
estimated position of the magnets based on the back-EMF of the motor.
See fault: 504 Enc Pos
LRT DC Level PU Visible only for PM motors.
Specifies the DC current offset to be used during the Locked Rotor Test (LRT). It
is specified in per unit of the rated motor torque (Rated Trq I A). It is subject to a
minimum of 4% of the full-scale current of the drive (see Drive Type).
LRT mot err eDeg Visible only for PM motors.
During the locked rotor test to ensure the brake is dropped, there is a minimum
allowable variation that the encoder can move. This is specified in electrical
degrees with this parameter. This could occur when the brake is loose or when
the locked rotor test current is producing significant torque as a result of
unmatched brake-motor combination.
If the minimum is exceeded, the fault 503 LRT Motion will be logged.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 127 of 183

Fld Wkn Lvl % Visible only for PM motors.
The Field Weakening Controller (FWC) is a voltage regulator that allows higher
motor speeds without exceeding maximum sinusoidal inverter output voltage and
is applicable to PM motors only. This parameter specifies the voltage level at
which the FWC begins to dictate negative d-axis current. This parameter is a
percentage of the maximum sinusoidal output voltage, which is equal to the bus
voltage divided by sqrt(2) minus some small voltage drops due to the impedance
of the IGBTs (line-to-line rms). This parameter is typically set to 100, which
equals a 513 V line-to-line rms drive output. To disable the FWC, set this
parameter to 200.
Fld Wkn BW Hz Visible only for PM motors.
The Field Weakening Controller (FWC) is a voltage regulator that allows higher
motor speeds without exceeding maximum sinusoidal inverter output voltage and
is applicable to PM motors only. This parameter specifies the bandwidth of this
regulator. This parameter is set typically to 10 Hz, but may be lowered down to
about 2.5 Hz for certain motor applications with a low electrical frequency
depending on perfromance.
Inv Hrmnc On 0/1 Visible only for PM motors.
This parameter turns the inverter 6th harmonic inverter current regulator for the
PM machine. The default is turned off as a comprehensive tuning process is
needed if deemed necessary. The parameter for all predefined motor types is
turned off except motor type 104 (Date 5/21/2010). In the feature it can be turned
on if the tuning is done for the specific motor. It is suggested to be set to 0 If the
user defined motor 902 is used.
Inv Hrmnc dS % Visible only for PM motors and the Inv Hrmnc On 0/1 is set to 1.
This defines the amount of d axis current in phase with the magnet position as
percentage of torque current reference. Note that negative values indicates 180
degrees phase shift to allow greater tuning flexibility.
Note: This parameter can have negative values. Key DOWN (SHIFT-3) must be
pressed before entering a negative value.
Inv Hrmnc dC % Visible only for PM motors and the Inv Hrmnc On 0/1 is set to 1.
This defines the amount of d axis current in quadrature with the magnet position
as percentage of torque current reference. Note that negative values indicates
180 degrees phase shift to allow greater tuning flexibility.
Inv Hrmnc qS % Visible only for PM motors and the Inv Hrmnc On 0/1 is set to 1.
This defines the amount of q axis current in phase with the magnet position as
Inv Hrmnc qC % Visible only for PM motors and the Inv Hrmnc On 0/1 is set to 1.
This defines the amount of q axis current in quadrate with the magnet position as
6.6.5 3-5 PROFILE

Man Speed mm/s Visible only when “Interface Type” = 0
Speed during manual mode operation.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 128 of 183

Man Acc mm/s2 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 0
Acceleration during manual mode operation.
Man Dec mm/s2 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 0
Deceleration during manual mode operation.
Insp Speed mm/s Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Speed at inspection run.
Note: Value may be changed to 300 by the system’s auto-installation routines.
Nom Speed mm/s Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Nominal speed.
Note: this automatically sets "Corr Speed mm/s" when changed, except for JIS.
Note: If “TwoStepSpeed 0/1” ” = 1, this parameter is used increased speed (High
speed)
Min Speed mm/s Visible only for Low Voltage Drives.
The minimum speed the elevator will operate for battery state of charge >=50%.
This speed condition usually happens with full car up or empty car down.
Min Speed Load % Visible only for Low Voltage Drives.
This is the load in car as a percentage of the duty load where minimum elevator
speed (Min Speed mm/s) is commanded when the car is going up.
Max Speed Load % Visible only for Low Voltage Drives.
This is the load percentage in car, where the elevator speed starts to decrease
from the nominal maximum value when the elevator is going up.
Spd Drop vMin V Visible only for Low Voltage Drives.
This parameter indicates the battery voltage below which the elevator speed will
be reduced by 10% to avoid overloading of the battery. The duration for the
decision to reduce the speed is 2s.
Spd Drop vMax V Visible only for Low Voltage Drives.
This parameter indicates the battery voltage above which the elevator speed will
be reduced by 10% to avoid overcharge across the battery. The duration for the
decision to reduce the speed is 2s.
Spd Drop iMax % Visible only for Low Voltage Drives.
This parameter indicates the motor field weakening current level above which the
elevator speed will be reduced by 10% to avoid overloading of the battery (and
the motor). The duration for the decision to reduce the speed is 2s.
Accel mm/s2 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Nominal acceleration rate.
Decel mm/s2 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Nominal deceleration rate.
Jerk mm/s3 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Nominal jerk rate.
Corr Speed mm/s Visible only when "Interface Type" = 1
Speed used for correction runs. Automatically set when "Nom Speed mm/s" is
changed.
If the customer complains about the correction run speed being too fast or
being uncomfortable, the correction run speed can be lowered. Lowering
the correction run speed can lessen the “falling” effect felt by passengers.
This should be negotiated with the customer to accommodate time versus
speed trade offs for tall building applications.
Notes:
- Upper limit is actual value of "Nom Speed mm/s" resp. 2000 mm/s.
- A lower limit of 500 is recommended because of thermal concern
for longer correction runs.
- Parameter DDP sec has to be adjusted if necessary.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 129 of 183

Base Speed % Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
This parameter is a profile adjustment parameter. Nominally it is set to 75%. Its
main function is to start removing the acceleration (jerking out of constant
acceleration or jerking into constant velocity) at a point where the speed is 75%
(or the value entered by the user/operator) of the nominal speed. The main
purpose of this parameter is to limit the converter peak current and/or to limit the
maximum motor voltage (especially for induction machines).
Creep Speed mm/s Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
This is the final landing speed of the profile generator. When the profile hits this
speed after it decelerates to the target it travel with a constant velocity of “Creep
Speed” for a certain distance defined in “Creep Length”. If the “Creep Speed” is
set to zero this feature is disabled.
Creep Length mm Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
The distance covered between the events that the profile reaches the creep
speed and it finally lands to the target. Setting this value to zero disables this
feature.
Creep Jerk 0/1 Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
This service tool selection provides the choice of ending the creep zone via either
a limited jerk profile, where the jerk value is defined in “Jerk mm/s3” or a
timed deceleration.
0 – Infinite jerk values are used during final landing (i.e., timed decel)
1 - Finite jerk values are used during final landing (i.e. profile)
Choice “1” results in smoother landing, while choice “0” results in faster landing
(shorter flight time).
Zero Vel Tim ms Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
This parameter sets the time for holding the velocity reference at zero speed at
the end of a run to ensure car motion has stopped before dropping the brake.
MCSS Overspeed % Visible only when “Interface Type” = 0
Overspeed trip point as a percentage of the parameter: Duty Speed mm/s
See fault: 500 Overspeed.
MAN Overspeed % Visible only when “Interface Type” = 0
Overspeed trip point as a percentage of the parameter: Man Speed mm/s
See fault: 500 Overspeed.
ARO Overspeed % Visible only for Duty Type = 1 and ARO Type = 2 or 5.
Overspeed trip point as a percentage of the parameter: ARO Speed mm/s. 0
disables the overspeed trip. See fault: 533 ARO Overspd.
ARO Speed mm/s Visible only when “ARO Type” = 2, 3, 5 or
when “Interface Type” = 1 and when “ARO Type” = 4.
Speed during ARO type run. See related fault: 533 ARO Overspd.
ETP Spe %DutySpe Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
The Emergency Terminal Protection (ETP) feature is used at units above 2.5 m/s
in case of reduced buffer stroke. This parameter specifies the speed below which
the message DriveSpeedCheck2 is sent to the OCSS. The OCSS then operates
the ETS1 relay. The unit is percent of the parameter "Duty Speed mm/s".
ETP2 Spe %Duty Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Refer to “ETP Spe %DutySpe” above. This is threshold of “ETP secondary”. Drive
sends the message of DriveSpeedCheck2(EtpSecondary) to OCSS.
ETP delta % Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Hysteresis for ETP Spe and ETP2 Spe to avoid toggle of the message
Buffer/ETSD mm/s Visible only when “Interface Type” = 1
Speed for the Buffer/ETSD test run.
Note: this parameter is automatically limited to Duty Speed mm/s and Nom
Speed mm/s (whatever is lower).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 130 of 183
Man Load % This is used when a load weight device is unknown in a case like construction
mode. Sets the value as in-car load%.
UCM Acc Up mm/s2 Visible only when Interface Type = 1
Specifies the acceleration rate for the free-roll simulation profile used in
the UCM-EN handover test, empty car up.
UCM Acc Do mm/s2 Visible only when Interface Type = 1
Specifies the acceleration rate for the free-roll simulation profile used in
the UCM-EN handover test, full load down.
Dec Speed mm/s Visible only when “TwoStepSpeed 0/1” = 1.
This parameter specifies the Decreased Speed (or Lower speed) that the car
reduces to after passing the 1DS or 2DS sensor. It should be set so that the
buffer impact allowance speed is satisfied. See the parameter
“TwoStepSpeed 0/1” for more details.
6.6.6 3-6 FACTORY

Factory Password When the correct password is entered, the following parameters become visible
to the user.
DC Bus fscale V Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
Specifies the full-scale voltage for the DC bus voltage sensing. This parameter is
adjusted at the factory so that the DC bus voltage shown in the service tool
matches the DC voltage measured using a DVM.
Note for 60A V.2 drives with eI2C EEPROM storage capability: the trim
parameter is stored in the power section EEPROM and is read automatically. This
parameter will therefore be set automatically to its default value of 1000 and does
not need to be adjusted.
AC Line fscale V Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
Specifies the full-scale voltage for the AC line voltage sensing. This parameter is
adjusted at the factory so that the AC line voltage shown in the service tool
matches the AC voltage measured using a DVM. The average of the sensed
voltages should be used for this calibration procedure. For example, the 60A
drive has only two line-to-line voltage sensors (Vrs and Vst). These two line-to-
line voltages should be averaged for this calibration procedure. It is preferred that
the factory has a balanced AC line supply for this procedure, but it not necessary.
Note for 60A V.2 drives with eI2C EEPROM storage capability: the trim
parameter is stored in the power section EEPROM and is read automatically. This
parameter will therefore be set automatically to its default value of 1000 and does
not need to be adjusted.
Ac/Dc Calibra PU Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
Applicable only when “Low Volt Op 0/1” is set to 1.
This is the calibration factor that ensures AC voltage sensing and DC voltage
sensing are commensurate.
6.7 Engineering Parameters Detailed Description

Parameters in the engineering SVT menu are meant for engineering purposes only. Please
do not arbitrarily change SVT parameters in the engineering menu without consultation
from engineering first. Otherwise, damage to equipment is possible. The parameters are
visible only when the engineering password has been entered.
6.7.1 6-1 ENG ADJUST

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 131 of 183

Engineer Passwrd When the correct password is entered, the engineering menus become visible to
the user.
Min IGBTpulse us Applicable to UD403 only.
In UD403, the gate drive has an issue with narrow pulses, so the software
enforces a minimum pulse width that is determined by this parameter.
PX Pick In IDLE Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
0 = The PX relay is NOT PICKED (NOT CLOSED) during the idle state. This is
the default value for this parameter. The default configuration satisfies VDI
requirements in Europe through power saved by not picking PX relay.
1 = The PX relay is PICKED (CLOSED) during the idle state.This configuration
satisfies code tests in China where the inspector may push close the SX relay
during inspection.
CAUTION: there is risk of hardware damage if the SX relay is pushed in during
inspection test in China and this value is not set to 1.
PFC Volt Lvl % Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
The Power Factor Controller (PFC) is a voltage regulator that allows higher ac
input voltages without exceeding maximum sinusoidal converter output voltage
and is applicable to regen drives only. This parameter specifies the voltage level
at which the PFC begins to dictate positive d-axis current. This parameter is a
percentage of the maximum sinusoidal output voltage, which is equal to the bus
voltage divided by sqrt(2) (line-to-line rms). This parameter is typically set to 100.
To disable the PFC, set this parameter to 200. This parameter is usually useful in
NAA area as for other regions the ac input is lower.
PWM freq Hz Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies the PWM frequency of the inverter and the converter. The current
regulators run at half the PWM frequency.
Min IGBT on t us Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Sets an IGBT minimum on–time different from default settings. Note: parameter
Engineering Test must be set to 2006 (enable minnimum IGBT time) prior to this.
Pos Gain Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Proportional gain of the position regulator.
Pos Err Lim mm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies the limit used to detect tracking error. If the absolute difference
between the predicted position (based on the profile generator position reference)
and the position feedback (based on the encoder) exceeds this limit, a fault is
logged and an emergency stop results. See fault: 501 Pos Tracking
Vel fscale PU Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Per unit value of the internal software scaling of the velocity.
LRT Frequency PU Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This is the frequency of the test current signal as a per unit of the desired current
inverter regulator frequency to calculate rotor magnet postion with respect to the
encoder.
LRT Ld Cycles Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This is the number of periods of the rotor inductance waveform. The rotor
inductance waveform repeats itself over a mechanical revolutions by the number
of pole pairs. A good number minimum number for this would be the number of
pole pairs. Anything larger will improve noise immunity of the results.
Vq out thresh PU Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Q-axis current regulator output threshold when the brake is not lifted yet. This is
used to detect failed current sensors or disconnected motor from the drive as a
result of wiring errors or relays not working etc. See fault 111 No Id fdbk.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 132 of 183

Sngl PWM ang deg Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter determines when one of the converter legs (R- or S-phase) not to
be switched while the other is being switched. The threshold is as a function of
the utility angle (utility voltage signal crossing zero volts is the reference). A value
of zero disables the feature all together leaving a sine triangle PWM method,
while a very small nonzero value will cause one cycle not to switch and the other
switching, while the next cycle this role swaps as far as the phase concerns.
Test Noise Lvl % Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter along with “Test Noise BW Hz” control the characteristics of the
noise injected to the control loops in special test modes. This parameter
multiplies the noise by unity at 100 percent and linearly otherwise. This parameter
is especially used to filter the noise heavily for low bandwidth loops while
generating enough excitation for acceptable coherence.
Test Noise BW Hz Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter sets the bandwidth (Hz) of the white noise used during the test
modes for the inner and outer velocity regulators, the field weakening regulator,
and the position regulator.
Target mm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Position target, applicable only in DAT_PROFILE test mode.
Drive Pmax kW Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter specifies the set point for the power-limiting feature in the profile
generator. This is an engineering parameter, normally set to a very high value so
that the function is disabled. When it is set to a value close to the drive capability,
a near-optimal trajectory is calculated to limit the maximum output power (in the
profile generator this controls J4f and J6f).
Load in car % Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter is used in conjunction with the power-limiting feature of the profile
generator (see "Drive Pmax kW" above). This is an engineering parameter used
only in the DAT_PROFILE mode. In all other normal modes, the actual load from
the load weight system is used.
Drive Vrated m/s Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter is used in conjunction with the power-limiting feature of the profile
generator (see "Drive Pmax kW" above). This value should be larger than or
equal to the nominal speed of the elevator. This is useful when a high speed
machine is to be used at lower speeds.
Belt Cmp Off A Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter is used to over-ride the learned compensation parameter for belt
and traveling cable imbalance. This parameter specifies half of the difference of
the torque current during the constant speed portion of the run near the bottom
and near the top of the hoistway. The variation should not exceed 30% of rated
motor torque.
See display parameter: BeltCmp:Offset A
Belt CmpSlp mA/m Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter is used to over-ride the learned compensation parameter for belt
and traveling cable imbalance. This parameter determines how much current
variation is observed per meter of hoistway due to belt and traveling cable
imbalance. The drive calculates the necessary current needed to add to the
pretorque based on the current position in the hoistway.
See display parameter: BeltCmp:Slp mA/m

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 133 of 183

BeltCmp Lrn? 0/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies if the learned parameters to compensate for belt and traveling cable
imbalance should be used or over-ridden:
0 – over-ride the learned values and use the parameters specified in
EEPROM instead (see above)
1 – use the learned compensation values
LowSpdBnd mm/sec Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
To disable this functionality, set the LowSpdBnd and SpdSteps to 0.
This parameter is used to adjust start jerk performance at the beginning of an
elevator run using velocity loop gain scheduling for discrete loadweighing (or no
loadweighing) systems. For the low speed velocity calculations, this parameter is
the minimum velocity threshold that is compared with the absolute value of the
velocity error (the reference minus feedback). If the velocity error is less than this
threshold, then the velocity feedback calculation is not updated. If the velocity
error is above this threshold and the maximum time for receiving no encoder
pulses expires, then the velocity feedback calculation is adjusted by the
“SpdSteps mm/sec” value.
SpdSteps mm/sec Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
To disable this functionality, set the LowSpdBnd and SpdSteps to 0.
This parameter is used to adjust start jerk performance at the beginning of an
elevator run using velocity loop gain scheduling for discrete loadweighing (or no
loadweighing) systems. This parameter is used to adjust the low velocity
feedback calculation. If the absolute value of the velocity error is above the
“LowSpdBnd mm/sec” and the maximum time for receiving no encoder pulses
expires, then the velocity feedback calculation is adjusted by this parameter
value.
2D Enable? 0/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter is used to enable transmission of the CAN message
“DriveStoppingInfo”, which is sent every 30ms, when enabled.
ARO Bus LwrLim V Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only during ARO(EN) mode.
During ARO with the regenerative drive, no regenerative energy is allowed to
return to the battery. Instead, the DC bus is allowed to increase and the
regenerative energy is dissipated in the losses. If the regenerative energy
exceeds the nominal losses in the drive such the the bus voltage rises above a
voltage threshold, then d-axis current is increased in the motor in order to
increases the losses in the motor, thereby limiting the DC bus voltage rise. This
parameter specifies the voltage limit on the DC bus, and the parameter
ARO Mot Id PU specifies how much d-axis current is to be commanded if
the bus voltage were to reach 750 Vdc (thereby setting the gain of the control).
ARO Mot Id PU Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Used in conjunction with the parameter ARO Bus LwrLim V above.
Max Bat Chrg I A Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter specifies the amount of regenerative (charging) current during
ARO operation. It is nominally set to zero. When it is set to zero, if the drive
detects current less than zero, the fault 211 Battry Chrgd will be logged and the
drive will ESTOP. When it is set greater than zero, then regenerative (charging)
current is allowed up to the value specified.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 134 of 183
Brk Min Hold I A Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.

Applicable only when Brk Sw Type 0-7 is set to 4 and Brk Cnt Type
0-3 is set to 2-3.
This specifies the acceptable brake pick and drop thresholds for the brake current
feedback when using the internal brake control. The faults that will be logged are:
405 Brake I Drop or 406 Brake I Hold.
The value is automatically selected corresponding to Motor Type and cannot be
changed unless Motor Type is set to user specified type 901 or 902 - there the
parameter is still hidden in the Engineering Menue (PW protected).
Brk Min Pick I A Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
0-3 is set to 4.
This specifies the acceptable brake pick threshold for the brake current feedback
when using the internal brake control without BS. The fault that will be logged
is:418 Bk lft tmout.
parameter is still hidden in the Engineering Menu (PW protected).
Brk I Max A Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
0-3 is set to 2-3.
This specifies the maximum brake current feedback when using the internal
brake control. The fault that will be logged is 407 Brake I Max.
parameter is still hidden in the Engineering Menue (PW protected).
Brk I Offset A Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only when using brake current monitoring (Brk Cnt Type 0-3
= 2 or 3).
Specifies the allowable offset current when using brake current montoring. If the
threshold is exceeded, the fault that is logged is 404 Brake I Off.
Brk PWM Freq div Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Controls the brake PWM frequency. The base frequency is 1 KHz, and the
parameter specifies the frequency divisor. Thus:
brake PWM frequency = 1 KHz / divisor.
Default value is 3 -> 333Hz.
SVT Timeout min Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
When a remote (MCSS pass-through) SVT is connected and no local SVT is
connected, the remote SVT gets direct access. However, if a local SVT has been
connected for less than the amount of time specified by this parameter, then
remote access is not automatically granted. Instead, a prompt is sent to the
remote SVT warning that a local SVT is connected. The prompt allows for the
local SVT to be manually overridden. The default for the timer is 4 hours.
Cnv PWM 2/3 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies the PWM type for the converter:
2 = Discontinuous PWM (2-phase switching)
3 = Continuous PWM (3-phase switching)
Micro Wrn 0 - 4 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies the number of consecutive bad packets that will be ignored before a
fault is declared. The fault declared is 924 Micro Warn.
Dis Chg Time sec Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only to 416 and 460 drives.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 135 of 183
Rollback Call mm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.

This parameter is valid for JIS and CAN system.
The drive checks if the rollback distance is over this setting.
PrChg Min Thrs V Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only to LVD
The minimum bus voltage required in order to advance from the pre-charge state.
PrChg Min Time s Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only to LVD
The minimum time required in order to advance from the pre-charge state
Precharge Type Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter allows removing the PX relay control when DC BUS is already
charged. This may be desired in the case UD403 with OARO if the acoustic noise
of a front of drive is high level with PX relay ON.
Precharge Type:
• In UD403 without OARO, MX relay is turned ON and OFF every run, and is
turned OFF in idle state. In this case, precharge is always needed each run
via PX relay control and this parameter should be set to 0.
• In UD403 with OARO, MX relay remains ON in Idle state. In this case,
subsequent precharge is not needed if the bus voltage is greater than the
minimum charge threshold, and this parameter may be set to 1 if desired.
0 = Precharge every run (default setting)

1 = Precharge only if bus voltage lower than minimum charge threshold
The DEFAULT value for this parameter is 0.
See also the related parameter “SX Pick Time ms”.

Inv ReLe ILimit% Visible only when “JIS Function” = 1 and "Engineer Passwrd" is set.
Also you can check this setting by F12 " I% IA IR% IRA " of SVT monitor.
Specifies the current limit of Re-level for the inverter as a percentage of the full
scale current for the drive. This also determines the overcurrent trip level, which
is set at 105% of the current limit of Re-level.
See fault: 100 Inv SW Oct
ML TRIP EN 0/1/2 Applicable to 430ML drive only.
6.7.2 6-2 ENG TEST

Parameters in the engineering SVT menu are meant for engineering purposes only. Please
do not arbitrarily change SVT parameters in the engineering menu without consultation
from engineering first. Otherwise, damage to equipment is possible. The parameters are
visible only when the engineering password has been entered.

Engineer Passwrd When the correct password is entered, the remaining engineering menus become
visible in the service tool.
Engineering Test Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.

Used to activate one of several tests used by engineering. The test are listed in
the table below.
Test Description
10...99 Individual sets of variables are monitored via Test Vars (M18).
100 Set ICD version manually, ep1:= ICD version

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 136 of 183
101 Monitor pos fbk shift in test vars, IF (ep4==1234 AND ep5==1234): trigger one-time
EndRun cmd injection at (22000mm-ep1/10)
102 Determine LS lag :
A) IF (ep5==2345 AND ep1>0): invalidate current floor (and NCF and TgtFloor) ep1 ms
after entering IDLE -> cycles system in CORR runs.
B) In CORR runs : Monitor first fbk correction after LS recovery:
TestVariable1=max corr in up dir, TestVar2: min corr in up dir,
TestVariable3=max corr in down dir, TestVar4: min corr in down dir.
C) Outside CORR runs : Monitor corrections at vanes:
TestVariable1=max magnitude correction, any dir,
TestVariable2: sum of corrections in UP runs,
TestVariable3: sum of corrections in DOWN runs,
TestVariable4: num of corrections monitored (both dir).
Note: Negative correction = Pos.fbk step upwards.
103 Inject UIS DIS: Sets the UIS or DIS signal in s/w to simulate a PRS transition. It is used
to cause a position correction with specific timing. Details: See description in code.
104 Inject vane state after LS: This test sets the PRS signals in s/w to simulate a PRS
transition causing a position correction. The timing of this transition is preset to a
chosen delay after Floor.current changed from INVALID to valid, e.g. after an LS
transition. After setting and holding HwySignals, the test's intrusion is ended when
- The PRS input reaches the state preset by s/w, or
- 5s have expired
Parameters and outputs: See source code.
105 Emulate hysteresis and latency in PRS: This test delays PRS signal transitions to
introduce latency or/and modifies mm-position captured at PRS transitions to introduce
additional hysteresis. The purpose of the test is to verify process identification tools and
to simulate effects of low-quality PRS’s. The hysteresis and latency can be specified for
each sensor (UIS, 1LV, 2LV, DIS) individually.
106 Set speed thresholds for switch to High Speed Vane Tracking:
ep1 = lower threshold in mm/s (HSVT -> full tracking)
ep2 = higher threshold in mm/s (full tracking -> HSVT)
107 ENGTEST_EMULATE_RLEV_SIG_SEQUENCE
This test emulates UIS/DIS during an ongoing RELEVEL run such that two UIS/DIS
transitions are injected after the run has entered the NRZ. This test provides reduced
functionality of test 108.
108 This test emulates UIS/DIS during an ongoing RELEVEL run such that two UIS/DIS
transitions are injected after the run has entered the NRZ.
109 ENGTEST_ESTOP_SLIDE1
110 ENGTEST_ESTOP_SLIDE2
111 Single phase test. When this value is set the drive configures the test variables to send
the following variables:
Test Frac 1 = Converter x phase voltage before Single phase PWM forced.
Test Frac 2 = Converter y phase voltage before Single phase PWM forced.
Test Frac 3 = Sin of converter phase angle;
Test Frac 4 = Sin of the converter phase angle at which single phase PWM is invoked
112 ENGTEST_TRIGGER_FAULT
113 ENGTEST_DELAY_PRS_AFTER_10MS_LATCH
114 ENGTEST_DISABLE_LR_SAF_CHAIN_CHECK
115 ENGTEST_MICRO_PX_ACTIVE
116 ENGTEST_MICRO_BRK_ACTIVE
117 ENGTEST_MICRO_UIB_ACTIVE

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 137 of 183
118 ENGTEST_MICRO_DIB_ACTIVE
119 ENGTEST_FAULT_IN_LRT
120 ENGTEST_MASK_DBD_FAULT_IN_BATMODE
121 ENGTEST_DYNAMIC_BUS_VOLTAGE_CNTL
122 ENGTEST_SIMULATE_BAT_VOLTAGE
123 ENGTEST_I2C
124 ENGTEST_DBR_PWM
125 ENGTEST_FAN_PWM
126 ENGTEST_OCBT_TRIP
127 ENGTEST_OPTION_PORT_GPIO
128 ENGTEST_OPTION_PORT_ADC
129 ENGTEST_OPTION_PORT_PWM
130 ENGTEST_OPTION_PORT_SCI
131 ENGTEST_DBR_SHORT
132 ENGTEST_DISABLE_FAST_LW_AT_RLEV
133 ENGTEST_DISABLE_FAST_LW_AT_RLEV
134 ENGTEST_TURNOVER_TEST_SAFEGUARD
135 ENGTEST_SPIFLASH
136 ENGTEST_BELT_SLIP
137 ENGTEST_PWM_DOWNSHIFT
200 ADC_FILTER
400 Test mode where both inverter and converter are disabled
401 Test mode where the converter control is disabled and the inverter is enabled. Second
digit refers to converter and third refers to inverter
410 Test mode where converter is enabled but inverter disabled
420 ENGTEST_UPS
463 makes landing table invalid (once per setting)
464 ENGTEST_INVALIDATE_FLOOR_CURRENT
Floor.current is set to “FLOORNUM_INVALID”.
465 ENGTEST_INVALIDATE_LDGTABLE_IN_E2P
makes landing table invalid (persistent in E2P)
470 Setting this test triggers (once) position recovery from SPBC/GECB, monitored in test
vars M18.
482 Not used (was applicable only for non-regen drives).
497 manipulates detected pos and floor at transition into 1LS
IF (ep1!=0 or ep2!=0): detctdPos := learnedPos+ep1-ep2
IF (ep3!=0 or ep4!=0): curFlr := learnedFlr+ep3-ep4
498 ENGTEST_2LS_FLASH_WHEN_1LS_ON
499 ENGTEST_2LS_ON_WHEN_1LS_ON
500 ENGTEST_1LS2LS_ON_WHEN_2LS_OFF
512 PRS Override
513 lower speed check limit for releveling, triggers RLEV abort
600 ”BrakeState” CAN message is derived from BY relay instead of BS1/2
601 Simulates different states of BS1 and BS2 inputs. Affects only the ”BrakeState” CAN
message, not drive operation.
766 Monitor internal learn run vars in test.xy display vars.
800 JIS DEFAULT PARAM
This should be set after the end of a test of “801 JIS UCMP TEST” to return to default
parameters.
801 JIS UCMP TEST
This is used for UCMP test. If "EngTest Param1" is set from 0 to 180, the pole position
is shifted to start with an un-intended motion which is called “Rocket start”.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 138 of 183
802 JIS TRACKING INVALID

This is used for any engineering test without “velocity tracking fault”.
803 JIS WITHOUT LWS
This is used for CAN simulator without LWS. If this is set, a releveling mode is enabling
with invalid data of the Load.
804 ENGTEST_JIS_REI_BTI
805 ENGTEST_JIS_IO_CHECK
806 ENGTEST_JIS_FAULT_OUTPUT
This is used for Brake switch and delay detection monitor
Test.x1 = Brake.delayDetectWar
Test.x2 = Brake.delayDetectErr
Test.x3 = BRAKE_Faults.brkBs1Fault
Test.x4 = BRAKE_Faults.brkBs2Fault
807 ENGTEST_JIS_DBR_TEST
This is available to set the DBR status to ON or OFF.
808 ENGTEST_AROMRO_MODE_MON
This is used for Aro and Mro monitor
Test.x1 = AroMro.GeneratePowerMode
Test.x2 = AroMro.optimizedAroMode
833 ENGTEST_CAN_OVERSPEED
This mode is used for “115% Overspeed running” with CAN Interface.
If this mode is set, the Overspeed threshold is changed from 110% to 120%.
841 ENGTEST_LRT_24H_TEST
This test mode is for LRT quality during 24 hours cycle run.
Every running does the LRT before start of the run.
851 ENGTEST_ETSD_MODE
This is used for NTSD and ETSD test of HSOVF or OVF412RCR with CAN interface.
NTSD: If the "EngTest Param1" is set to 120%, the "Decel mm/s2" is 120% for the
profile.
ETSD: If the "EngTest Param2" is set to 100, the NTSD mode is disabled.
852 ENGTEST_POWER_DOWN_MODE
This is used for a test of “Power down” with MX-OFF.
If the "EngTest Param1" is set to 100, the “Drive.dischargeRequest" is set to TRUE.
Then Drive state moves to “Power Down” with MX-OFF.
900 - Self Commisioning fault management tests. Each test simulates one of the self
929 commissioning faults.
930 ENGTEST_ADVANCED_STOPPING_DISTANCE
931 ENGTEST_MM_POSITION
932 OARO STATE MACHINE
933 ENGTEST_OARO_CHARGER_POWER
934 ENGTEST_OARO_BATTERY_FAULT
935 ENGTEST_OARO_OVER_TEMP
937 ENGTEST_OARO_TYPE_MIS
938 ENGTEST_OARO_DISCHARGED_BATTERY
939 ENGTEST_OARO_FAULT
940 ENGTEST_OARO_BLV_RELAY
941 ENGTEST_OARO_AR_RELAY_PICK
942 ENGTEST_OARO_AR_RELAY_DROP
943 ENGTEST_MICRO
1000 Vdc cap failure test. When setting the engineering parameter to this value it generates
a dc cap failure fault, even it is not happened.
1502 This is to indicate the software the drive hardware is configured for ARO test mode
where the dc bus is regulated to 150volts (regen drive only) with the exception that if

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 139 of 183
“EngTest Param1” is set greater than 99 volts, then the bus voltage reference will be
whatever “EngTest Param1” is set to.
1503 Makes profile delay setting effective during ARO. Captures selectable sets of variables
related to ARO roll and converter current threshold detection in the Test.x DAT
variables, see source code for details.
This test is automatically activated after POR by the one-shot parameter set
E2_ENG_TESTPARAM1:= 20, PARAM2:= 6, PARAM3:= 64.
1504 UCM_FAULT
1505 ARO_BOOST2: This engineering test mode enables the global regenerative drive to be
run from batteries while the battery is connected on L1 –L3 and also it allows the
Korean Regen drives to operate on battery dc bus voltage boosting mode. The Korean
Regen drive requires the batteries being connected on L1-L3 of the input phase. Note
also that the global REGEN drive needs an external precharge circuitry, otherwise
damage could occur.
1900 OARO_BATTERY_TEST
1901 OARO_BATTERY_TEST2
2000 Fan test (fan is on with specified duty cycle). The duty cycle is commanded via the
the engineering menu and setting parameter EngTest Param1.
2001 Position Filter Test. Sets the following test varaibales for visibility:
Test.x1 = Pos.correction;
Test.x2 = wholeUnits;
Test.x3 = incrementalCorrection;
2002 Profile test 1. Sets test variables as follows:
Test.x1 = _IQ((Prof.pos+Prof.sd)/100.0);
Test.x2 = _IQ(nextStoppingPosition/100.0);
Test.x3 = _IQ(advProfStatePtr->dataInvalid_decelPhase);
Test.x4 = _IQ(advProfStatePtr->acc);
2003 Profile test 2. Sets test variables as follows:
Test.x1 = Pos.latch + Pos.direction * ProfStateIn350ms.pos;
Test.x2 = nextStoppingPos;
Test.x3 = nextStoppingPosIn350ms;
Test.x4 = ProfStateIn350ms.dataInvalid_decelPhase;
2004 Start delay test. Sets test variables as follows:
Test.x1 = possibleStartDelayMs;
2005 Temperature test. Sets temperature reading based on DAT:
Inv.temp.in = _IQ(((OInt32)(Pc_to_logger.ref_0 + Pc_to_logger.ref_1)) /
HEATSINK_FULLSCALE);
2006 Enables minimum IGBT on-time for regen drive also and allows minimum on-time to be
set according to the SVT parameter “Min IGBT on t us” for both types of drives.
2007 ENGTEST_OCBT_VOLTAGE_TRIP
4001 PLL test in which the converter and the inverter is disabled. This test mode works in
conjunction with the DAT to get signal values from the DAT. See Table 8-2 Test Mode
I/O.
8010 ZERO_OUT_LOAD_WEIGHING: This test mode independently disables the pretorque
value and sets it to balanced car (load) condition (=0).
9010 Simulates failed 1LS signal in low state
9011 Simulates failed 1LS signal in high state
9020 Simulates failed 2LS signal in low state
9021 Simulates failed 2LS signal in high state. in high state
9022 ENGTEST_ZKIP - Returns the access level in Test.x1.
9027 ENGTEST_I2C_BRAKE_IO
9028 ENGTEST_SPI_FPGA_COMM
9422 ENGTEST_ALWA_422 - Enable ALWA algorithm in 422 mode

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 140 of 183
9431 ENGTEST_ALWA_ALL - Enable ALWA for all run types.

9432 ENGTEST_STATE_MACHINE_UIB
9434 ENGTEST_ADC_BLOCKING_INT
9435 ENGTEST_422_OVER_CAN
9436 ENGTEST_SET_OMU_PROBIHIT
9437 ENGTEST_CLR_OMU_PROBIHIT
9500 ENGTEST_SINGLE_PH_HARMONIC_REG
9501 ENGTEST_SINGLE_PH_HARMONIC_REG
9502 ENGTEST_INVERTER_HARMONIC_REG_D
9503 ENGTEST_INVERTER_HARMONIC_REG_Q
9504 ENGTEST_BRAKE_CURR_SENSE
9505 ENGTEST_LVD_DBR_SET_POINT
9506 ENGTEST_FWC_LOOP_NOTCH_FILTER
9507 ENGTEST_ABS_ENCODER
9508 ENGTEST_DISABLE_BIPOLAR_MOD
9509 ENGTEST_BIPOLAR_MODULATION_FOR_INV_AND_CNV
9510 ENGTEST_ML_TRIP_ZONE
9511 ENGTEST_DYNE_CYCLING_TEST
Note: “ep” = “EngTest Param”
EngTest Param1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.

EngTest Param2 These parameters are MULTI PURPOSE test parameters that have different
EngTest Param3 purposes depending on what test was selected via the "Engineering Test"
EngTest Param4 parameter.
EngTest Param5
HrmncReg enb 0/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies if the converter harmonic regulators are active.
0 – The converter harmonic regulator is disabled
1 – The converter harmonic regulator is enabled.
This parameter can be changed while the drive is running.
Inv HrmncCmp Deg Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter is used to tune the 6th harmonic inverter current regulator stability
and to account for computational delays. This heavily depends on the rated
frequency of the machine to have harmonic regulators turned on.
Inv Hrmnc BW Hz Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This is the default BW of the 6th harmonic inverter current regulator and
potentially needs to be revisited if a new machine is to be tune.
Inv Hr Thrs mm/s Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
The 6th harmonic inverter current regulator ideally needs to be tuned based on
speed. If not, it is better to turn it on beyond a speed. This parameter defines that
threshold. However there is a range of tolerable speeds that the harmonic
regulator is supposed deliver stable harmonic current control.
TimeDec Test 0/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter allows the user to initiate a timed-decel during a run and is used
for test purposes only.
0 – no action taken
1 - Initiate timed-decel.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 141 of 183

Encoder Test 0/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This parameter allows the user to virtually disconnect the encoder from the
control and is used for test purposes only.
0 – normal operation
1 - the velocity feedback and the position feedback are not used in the
velocity regulator, the position regulator, nor the field orientation. The
velocity feedback calculation and the position feedback calculation
can still be viewed in the service tool display.
Ovrtmp Estop 0/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Determines how the drive will respond to a heatsink overtemperature fault.
0 – The drive will log the fault 601 Inv Tmp Over using the default
temperature trip point, and the fault response is to complete the run
(COMP).
1 – The drive will log the fault 601 Inv Tmp Over using the temperature
trip point specified by the parameter HS Overtmp deg C, and the fault
response is an emergency stop (ESTOP).
HS Overtmp deg C Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Specifies the trip point for the overtemperature fault when the parameter Ovrtmp
Estop 0/1 is set to 1.
Flr To Test Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Used only for testing vane positions. Specifies the floor to be tested (bottom floor
= 0)
Flr Pos mm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Used only for testing vane positions. Displays the center position of vane at the
specified floor (previous parameter)
Flr New Pos mm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Used only for testing vane positions. Allows the center position of vane at the
specified floor to be changed. Normally displays 0, and resets to 0 after change
occurs.
Flr Vane Len mm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Used only for testing vane positions. Displays the learned length of the vane at
the specified floor. Top and bottom vanes are not learned.
ALWA Confg 0/1/2 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Visible only when“ Interface type” = 1
0 – Doesnot update pretorque using ALWA gain and offset.
1 – Update pretorque using ALWA gain and offset.
2 –Reset ALWA algorithm.
ARO FLAG AR-Rly Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only to Optimized ARO when “Interface Type” = 3.
Indicates the status of the BLV/AR fault management for Oprimized ARO.
0 = No fault
1 = First attempt to pick BLV resulted in AR relay fault
2 = Second attempt to pick BLV resulted in AR relay fault
This parameter defaults to zero, if it is stored to be nonzero during a power up
sequence, then optimized ARO is blocked. This parameter is used in the software
to report ARO blockage.
ARO FLAG BLV-Rly Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only to Optimized ARO when “Interface Type” = 3.
This parameter defaults to zero, if it is stored to be nonzero after an optimized
ARO sequence, then this parameter is used as an indicator to report the
controller that the BLV relay is welded and needs to be serviced.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 142 of 183

ARO Faults Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable to NSAA ARU only.
Used as a mailbox for saving ARU fault status for when power returns.
OARO_FAULTS_NONE 0
OARO_FAULTS_START 1
OARO_FAULTS_MISSING_BATTERY 2
OARO_FAULTS_TYPE_MIS 3
OARO_FAULTS_DISCHARGED_BATTERY 4
OARO_FAULTS_FAULT 5
OARO_FAULTS_PASS 6
ARO Alarm Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable to NSAA ARU only.
If an ARU alarm condition exists, it is set true, false otherwise.
Fan Random Area Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Changes the carrier frequency of the fan. At the time of Random Area = 0, it is
usual control.
As for Gen2P&B, the standard is Random Area=10.
Temp Over Test Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
This is only for Over temperature test. This increases the temperature of
Converter monitor data.
This value is set “0” in Initialize.
Abs Enc um/ The drive subscribes to the CAN message ReceivedEncoderData sent from the
cnt Safety Sub-System. The data is avaialble in the DAT when engineering test mode
ENGTEST_ABS_ENCODER is set. The data can be used for system
troubleshooting such as rope stretch. This parameter allows the scaling in
micrometer per encoder count to be defined.
UCM-EN BlkLatchd Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set. Applicable only when
Interface Type = 1 and UCM-EN on/off = 1.
Shows if blockage due to UCM Fault or Brake Monitoring fault is latched in non-
volatile memory.
0 = no blockage active
1 = blockage active, caused by 723 UCM in Run
2 = blockage active, caused by 724 UCM in Slide
3 = blockage active, caused by 725 UCM BrkBlock
DDP Fault Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Indicates if a DDP fault is active or not.
0 – DDP fault not active
1 – DDP fault active
This parameter is used to remember the state of the DDP fault through a power
cycle.
FAN off/0 on/1 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set.
Applicable only when drive type is 428 and 460 drives
0 = fan is off
1 = fan is on
SSM Config Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Static (Belt) Slip Mitigation feature config key and activation status.
SSM PhantRPeriod Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Latches currrent slip reaction status: Blockage and/or phantom run interval.
SSM MaxSlip Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Static Slip Mitigation: Latches largest absolute deviation (expected-measured)
exit pos.
SSM MaxSlip2 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Static Slip Mitigation: Latches largest deviation beyond margin (if magn>margin)
or closest to (if magn<margin).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 143 of 183
SSM MaxSlip3 Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Static Slip Mitigation: Latches largest slip rate or next largest deviation vs. margin.
VTE LdRatio Hyst Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Vane Transition Estimator: Parameters for ratio EmptyCar vs. DutyLoad and for
PRS hysteresis.
VTE Hitch Strtch Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Vane Transition Estimator: Parameters for hitch spring compression and for rope
stretch.
VTE MaxErrSameEg Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Vane Transition Estimator: Latches max. estimator errors for entry+exit on same
edge.
VTE MaxErrOtherE Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Vane Transition Estimator: Latches max. estimator errors for entry+exit on
opposite edge.
VTE MaxDevFrmNom Visible only when “Engineer Passwrd” is set and Interface Type = 1.
Vane Transition Estimator: Latches max. deviation from nominal exit point and
corresponding residual error of estimator.
6.7.3 6-4 I2C EEPROM

Factory Password When the correct password is entered, the remaining menus become visible in
the service tool.
I2CEE Val@2.0000 Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
Displays or modifies value stored in I2C EEPROM with device address 2 and
specified subaddress 0000 (example). See description below.
I2CEE Val@3.____ Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
I2CEE Val@4.____ Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
intEE Val@i.0000 Visible only when “Factory Password” is set.
Applicable only for Low voltage Drives.
Displays or modifies value stored in internal SPIFLASH device on specified
subaddress 0000 (example). See description below.
Description:
For the ULTRA drives the required data is stored in an EEPROM which is located on the DCPB board
(same as the main DSP). For compatibility reasons with the GDCB this EEPROM data range is accessed
by a menu showing device address 2.
This menu entry consists of 2 switchable modes:
• Data mode (default):
I2CEE Val@2.0010
15000> XXXXX
- The value of I2C EEPROM device 2 at subaddress 0x0010 (example) is displayed and can be
modified like any other setup parameter.
Display format is: decimal unsigned integer. Value range is: [0..65535].

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 144 of 183
A negative value -x must be entered in the format: 65536 - |x|.

Example: to obtain -2 enter 65534.
- A row of "*******" is displayed instead of the data value when the device is not readable.
- Press UP or DOWN to increment or decrement the current selected subaddress.
- Press ON to switch to address mode.
• Address mode (entered when ON key has been pressed):
I2CEE Adr 2.____

0010> XXXX
- The selected subaddress for device 2 (example) is displayed and can be modified like any other
setup parameter.
Display format is: hexadecimal. Value range: [0..1FFE], EVEN values only.
- Press numeric keys and hexadecimal keys ('A ..'F') to enter a new address value.
- Press ENTER to accept the new address and switch back to data mode.
Note that the entered address will be adjusted automatically to an EVEN value.
- Press OFF to abort address mode immediately and switch back to data mode.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 145 of 183
6.8 Test Menu Detailed Description

6.8.1 5-1 FAN TEST
When this test is activated, the fan should run with full speed for one minute.
The FAN test display sequence after entering menu 5-1 is shown below:
Run Fan Test Fan Running

Enter to Start ENTER Please check
After 1 minute
6.8.2 5-2 TURNOVR TST

When this test is activated, some functions are temporarily disabled or modified for several
elevator runs:
• The check for proper brake switch state is disabled for 3 runs to allow the single-brake-
shoe test. The braking distance is estimated by the drive and displayed by the parameter
Braking Dist mm.
• The response to a velocity-tracking fault is delayed to accommodate the testing of the
safeties. The default delay time is 1.0 second. When Interface Type is set to MCSS-
type controller, the time can be adjusted using parameter Turnovr Delay ms.
• The encoder-timeout fault check is temporarly disabled. This extends the usability of this
test mode especially when the motor sheave is blocked (sticky brake; probably pullout of
safeties).
• The incoming load weighing information is limited to 109% of full load. This ensures that:
- the OCSS leaves the "OLD" (Overload) mode temporarly so that runs for
overload tests are possible.
- especially for LV-drives the overload speed reduction is disabled temporarly to allow
tests with nominal instead of reduced speed.
Note that there might be other limitations in the system; e.g. battery overvoltage which
must be disabled separately.
This feature is implemented for "Load Weigh Type" = 2 (Hitch-LW) only.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 146 of 183
The SVT display sequence after entering menu 5-2 is shown below:
First a warning message will be displayed: No passengers in

car? Press ENTER
<ENTER>
Press ENTER to enable turnover tests for the next Turnover Tst OFF
3 runs: ON: Press ENTER
<ENTER>
Indicates that the turnover test has been Turnover Test ON

enabled for the next 3 runs: for next 3 runs
<After 3 Runs>
Indicates that the 3 runs with turnover test
enabled have expired. This will only be Turnover Test
displayed for 2 seconds: Complete
< 2 Seconds>
Notes:
• It is possible to leave this service tool menu without canceling this test. To abort the test,
press the CLEAR button. A test-aborted message will be displayed. Press GOON to proceed
(e.g. to start this test again).
• This test is NOT intended for buffer testing (i.e. 1LS is NOT disabled for one run). For buffer
testing please use 6.8.6 "5-6 BUFFR/LOWPIT" instead.
• A failure during the locked-rotor test (e.g. "503 LRT Motion" during single-brake-shoe test)
does not decrement the 3-run counter. This allows easier continuation of this test.
• When the UCM feature is enabled (parameter UCM-EN on/off = 1) and the "One-shoe
brake test" has been performed on a machine with physical brake switches then a possible
UCM blockage must be cleared after restoring the brake (by performing an ERO run).

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 147 of 183
6.8.3 5-3 BrakeTRQ TST

Reference document: 30924_SDD_BrakeTrq
Purpose
Provides an inspection tool of braking torque.
This test mode provides the safe quality of the brake.
Effect
This brake torque tool becomes improvement of maintenance.
The braking torque test can be done easily.
The test weight transportation cost is reduced, because test-weights are unnecessary.
MONITOR 1
<>
Function Key and “DISP IN” (SHIFT+4)
BRTRQ = 1 BTLOG = 2
Sets “1”
Shifts to the brake torque mode.
BRK TRQ TEST
PRESS ENTER
Sets “ENTER”
Sets the brake torque Mode
brk trq 150%load The "brk trq" (lowercase) of the display means the
REQ PRESS ON non-authorized state.
Sets “ON”
The drive sends a permission request of the braking torque mode to MCSS.
NO Wait for Resp. Sets “CLEAR”

Permission? Cancel CLEAR
YES or Manual mode

（OC/MCSS→DRIVE: Permission）
The braking torque mode is the authorized state.
BRK TRQ 150%load The “BRK TRQ” (uppercase) of the display means an authorized state.
Cancel CLEAR If PTR is sent, the torque reference starts.
The display changes into "LOAD" from "load" when the current
reference starts.
After the test end, the display shifts to the judgment screen
brk trq 150% OK automatically.
PRESS CLEAR
Flow chart of the SVT operating method

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 148 of 183
6.8.4 5-5 SAFETY TEST (UD)

The following description is valid for UD (Ultra Drives) only.
This test simulates the drive response to improper functioning of any of the safety relays.
Make sure there are no passengers in the car No passengers in

car? Press ENTER
<ENTER>
1. Test SW contactor Test SW Contact:

Enter to Start
<ENTER>
Commmand Up or Down ERO run.The Cmd ERO Run

elevator will ESTOP Drive Evnt ESTOP
<ERO Run Up/Down>
704 DBD Fault

Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
2. Test PWM Buffer Test PWM Exists:

Enter to Start
<ENTER>
Command Up or Down ERO runs. The Cmd ERO Run

<ERO Run Up/Down>
721 PwmExistsFlt
Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
(continued on next page)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 149 of 183
(continued from previous page)
3. Test Safety Chain Test Sfty Chain

Enter to Start
<ENTER>

elevator will ESTOP. Drive Evnt ESTOP
<ERO Run Up/Down>
704 DBD Fault

Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
4. Test Brake relay
Test BY Relay:
Note: Actual name is BR relay but still referred
Enter to Start
here as BY relay for downward compatibility.
<ENTER>

<ERO Run Up/Down>
403 Brake BY
Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
Safety Test
Complete
<10 seconds>
Note: this test will be aborted:

• if the user does not press a key for more than 60 seconds.
In this case a message “Safety Test ABORTED or FAIL” will be displayed for 10 seconds.
After this the test can be started again with the first step.
• if the user presses the CLEAR key,
• if the user leaves this menu, e.g. by pressing the MODULE key.
In this test mode only ERO runs are possible since normal runs will end up in a drive blockage
after consecutive failures.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 150 of 183
6.8.5 5-5 SAFETY TEST (LVD)

The following description is valid for LVD (Low Voltage Drives) only.
This test simulates the drive response to improper functioning of any of the safety relays.

car? Press ENTER
<ENTER>
1. Test BR relay picked (stuck in ON state) Test BR Picked:

Note: Actual name is BR relay but event messages Enter to Start
still show BY relay for downward compatibility.
<ENTER>

elevator will start. Drive starts
<ERO Run Up/Down>
Stop ERO run.The elevator will stop. After stop

Drive Shutdn&Flt
<ERO Stop>
Start ERO run again: the drive will NOT start 403 Brake BY
again. Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
2. Test S1 relay picked (stuck in ON state) Test S1 Picked:

Enter to Start
<ENTER>

<ERO Run Up/Down>

Drive Shutdn&Flt
<ERO Stop>
Start ERO run again: the drive will NOT start 703 S Rly Fault

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 151 of 183

<GO ON>
3. Test S2 relay picked (stuck in ON state) Test S1 Picked:

Enter to Start
<ENTER>

<ERO Run Up/Down>

Drive Shutdn&Flt
<ERO Stop>
Start ERO run again: the drive will NOT start 730 S2 RlyFault
<GO ON>
4. Test BR relay dropped (stuck in OFF state) Test BR Dropped:

Note: Actual name is BR relay but event messages Enter to Start
still show BY relay for downward compatibility.
<ENTER>

<ERO Run Up/Down>
403 Brake BY
Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
5. Test S1 relay dropped (stuck in OFF state) Test S1 Dropped:

Enter to Start
<ENTER>

<ERO Run Up/Down>
703 S Rly Fault

Test Pass; Go ON

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 152 of 183
<GO ON>
6. Test S2 relay dropped (stuck in OFF state) Test S2 Dropped:

Enter to Start
<ENTER>

elevator will ESTOP. Drive starts
<ERO Run Up/Down>
730 S2 RlyFault
Test Pass; Go ON
<GO ON>
Safety Test
Complete
<10 seconds>
Note: this test will be aborted:

• if the user does not press a key for more than 60 seconds.
In this case a message “Safety Test ABORTED or FAIL” will be displayed for 10 seconds.
After this the test can be started again with the first step.
• if the user presses the CLEAR key,
• if the user leaves this menu, e.g. by pressing the MODULE key.
In this test mode only ERO runs are possible since normal runs will end up in a drive blockage
after consecutive failures.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 153 of 183
6.8.6 5-6 BUFFR/LOWPIT

The buffer/LowPit test is a test run with disabled stop control point and disabled 1LS / 2LS, i.e.
the car runs with steady speed until it hits the final limit switch, the buffer, the low pit prop etc. .
The speed for this test can be adjusted by the parameter Nom Speed mm/s .
The test allows to check the car / CWT buffer or the Low Pit maintenance prop.
The SVT display sequence is different depending on selected direction and configuration:
• Buffer test (DOWN w/o. Low Pit configuration or UP in every case)
• Low Pit prop test (DOWN with Low Pit configuration only)
Low pit configuration is determined by the parameter LowPitCnfg 0/1/2.
Buffer test (DOWN w/o. Low Pit configuration or UP in every case):

car? Press ENTER
<ENTER>
Test speed Nom Speed mm/s has to be confirmed. Test Speed mm/s
Note: for LV-drives the actual speed can be lower 1000 y=1/n=0
dependent on actual car load and run direction. The <1>
actual speed is displayed during run, see below.
Enter requested test direction: Run DN in 1LS =1
1 for Run Down into 1LS (for e.g. car buffer test) Run UP in 2LS =2
2 for Run Up into 2LS (for e.g. CWT buffer test) <1> <2>
Buffer Test DN Buffer Test UP

ON: Press ENTER ON: Press ENTER
Test run is started when a CORR run <ENTER> <ENTER>
down / up has been initiated by the
controller (e.g. GECB, SP). Next Corr Down Next Corr Up
Note: One additional non-correction run hits Buffer hits Buffer
is allowed in order to adjust car position.
This mode is aborted when:
- no CORR run in requested direction
is performed within three runs,
- no run is performed within 60 sec.
- on power-down.
ATTENTION: If the test menu is left at this point and a CORR run down is
started within the next 2 runs, the CORR run will run onto the buffer!
The actual speed is displayed during Buffer Test DN Buffer Test UP

test run Speed/mm/s 1000 Speed/mm/s 1000
Test run is completed when the safety

Buffer Test DN Buffer Test UP
chain opens.
Complete > Complete >

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 154 of 183

Low Pit prop test (DOWN with Low Pit configuration only):
The Low Pit Test run is similar to the standard buffer test. A DOWN run with nominal speed is
performed, deceleration control points and 1LS are ignored, until the safety chain opens. There
are two main differences:
The test is performed w/o support of the controller (e.g. GECB, SP), that means the run is
started by a SVT command from the drive itself, not by a correction run command from the
controller.
The ULTRA drive does not know the state of the safety chain before the start of a run, therefore
the state of the safety chain must be confirmed by the SVT user before the run is started. In case
of open safety chain the run is not possible and the Low Pit Test will be aborted.
Make sure that there are no passengers in car No passengers in

car? Press ENTER
<ENTER>
Test speed Nom Speed mm/s has to be confirmed. Test Speed mm/s
Note: for LV-drives the actual speed can be lower 1000 y=1/n=0
dependent on actual car load and run direction. The <1>
actual speed is displayed during run, see below.
Enter requested test direction: Run DN in 1LS =1

1 for Run Down into 1LS (necessary for prop test) Run UP in 2LS =2
(Note: for 2 see description under "Buffer test" on <1>
previous page)
PMSN and PMSI
blocked? Press 3
Preconditions for Low Pit Test run have to be <3>
confirmed. Additional messages are provided Prop in middle
if car is inside 1LS (must be outside 1LS) of pit? Press 8
<8>
Toe guard not
fixed? Press 5
<5>
Drive does not know if the safety chain is Ready for Normal
closed in IDLE. Runs? Press 9
<9>
Low Pit test run is started by the drive itself (no Low Pit Test
initiation of a CORR run necessary) ON: Press ENTER
<ENTER>
The actual speed is displayed during test run. Low Pit Test
CLEAR command aborts the Low Pit Test run Speed/mm/s 1000
by a timed deceleration.
Test run is completed when the safety Low Pit Test

chain opens. Complete >

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 155 of 183
6.8.7 5–8 EEPROM Backup Feature

This feature allows all the drive parameters to be backed up into EEPROM memory.The feature allows
users to modify drive parameters after backup and if needs be they can restore the original settings
backed up.
BACK UP EEPROM ?
Press ENTER.....
ENTER
Saving Contract
Parameters -->
BACK UP COMPLETE
HIT > TO EXIT
Go ON
Limitations
• The feature requires a Level 2 and above OFT.
• The drive does not accept any run commands while the feature is active.
• The feature can be initiated only while the drive is in IDLE state or less.
• Restore is allowed only if there is a valid back up. The software checks to see if there was a valid
back up before trying to restore.
• Every parameter is checksum validated during the restore process and a fault is generated if the
check sum fails.
• Every write during the backup process is validated by a following read. If a write fails, the backup
feature is aborted and an E2 write fault is generated.
• Back up is not allowed until all E2 parameters are configured and valid.
• During the restore process, a warning message will be generated if there is a mismatch between
number of parameters backed up and the number of parameters being restored. This could
happen if the drive software version was changed between backup and restore processes.
• Hardware specific parameters are not backed up or restored using this feature.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 156 of 183
6.8.8 5-9 EEPROM Restore Feature

This feature allows drive parameters to be restored as long as there is a valid back up.
RESTORE EEPROM ?
Press ENTER.....
ENTER
Restoring EEPROM
Parameters <---
RESTORE COMPLETE
HIT > TO EXIT
Go ON
All the limitations in section 6.7.6 also apply here.
6.8.9 8-1 NTSD TEST

The NTSD test is a test run (started as CORR run) that is terminated by the NTSD (“Normal
Terminal Stopping Device”) function as the regular profile is targeted to a point beyond the
terminal landing. This requires recovery of position in 1LS/2LS.
The speed for this test can be adjusted by the parameter Corr Speed mm/s.
For the purpose of this test, the CORR speed can be raised above the 2m/s limit applied to
regular CORR runs.
Note: the value of this parameter is automatically limited to Duty Speed mm/s
and Nom Speed mm/s (whatever is lower).
Make sure that there are no passengers in car No passengers in

car? Press ENTER
<ENTER>
Test speed Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht Test Speed mm/s

gefunden werden. 4000 y=1/n=0
has to be confirmed. <1>
Enter requested test direction: Run DN to 1LS =1

1 for Run Down into 1LS (for NTSD test) Run UP to 2LS =2
2 for Run Up into 2LS (for NTSD test)

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 157 of 183
<1> <2>
NTSD Test DOWN NTSD Test UP

ON: Press ENTER ON: Press ENTER
Test run is started when a CORR run
down / up has been initiated by the <ENTER> <ENTER>
controller (e.g. GECB, SP).
Note: One additional non-correction run Next Corr Down Next Corr Up
is allowed in order to adjust car position. runs into NTSD runs into NTSD
This mode is aborted when:
- no CORR run in requested direction
is performed within three runs,
- no run is performed within 60 sec.
- when CLEAR button has been pressed,
- on power-down.
ATTENTION: If the test menu is left at this point and a CORR run down is
started within the next 2 runs, the CORR run will potentially be executed at
more than 2m/s!
The actual speed is displayed during NTSD Test DOWN NTSD Test UP
the test run Speed/mm/s 3999 Speed/mm/s 4001
and the NTSD decel phase is NTSD decel NTSD decel

indicated. Speed/mm/s 2683 Speed/mm/s 2683
The test run is completed
NTSD Test DOWN NTSD Test UP
successfullywhen the CORR run
Complete > Complete >
completes without ESTOP.
A test abort is displayed for the following scenarios:
All abort scenarios described in Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden..
Additionally:
ESTOP: Abort if the NTSD deceleration was interrupted by an ESTOP

Test aborted > (potentially triggered the final limit switch or ETSD).
7 Data Acquisition Tool

The Data Acquisition Tool (DAT), Software Configuration Number AAA31424AAA, is a PC-based
application for acquiring data from the drive using the drive service tool port. Refer to the DAT
User Guide, Otis document 31424_UG, for a description on how to use the application.
7.1 Signals
Different signals can be specified for data acquisition by setting the desired signal for each of the
four channels in the DAT. Each signal has a default gain that can be modified using the up/down
buttons in the DAT. The gain should be increased to achieve the maximum dynamic range
without exceeding 100% of the available dynamic range. The percentage of dynamic range is
indicated in the DAT.
The signals that are available for acquisition are given in the following table.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 158 of 183
DAT DEFINES VERSION: 121

Signal Name Units Description
Inverter Current Regulators
0 Inv Ix Amps Inverter X-phase current feedback
1 Inv Iy Amps Inverter Y-phase current feedback
2 Inv Iz Amps Inverter Z-phase current feedback
3 Inv Id Ref Amps Inverter synchronous d-axis current regulator reference
4 Inv Id Fbk Amps Inverter synchronous d-axis current regulator feedback
5 Inv Id Err Amps Inverter synchronous d-axis current regulator error
6 Inv Id ErrF Amps Inverter synchronous d-axis current regulator error, filtered
7 Inv Iq Ref Amps Inverter synchronous q-axis current regulator reference
8 Inv Iq Fbk Amps Inverter synchronous q-axis current regulator feedback
9 Inv Iq Err Amps Inverter synchronous q-axis current regulator error
10 Inv Iq ErrF Amps Inverter synchronous q-axis current regulator error, filtered
11 Inv Vde Duty(%) Inverter synchronous d-axis voltage command
12 Inv Vqe Duty(%) Inverter synchronous q-axis voltage command
13 Inv Vds Duty(%) Inverter stationary d-axis voltage command
14 Inv Vmag Duty(%) Inverter voltage command magnitude squared
15 Inv Vmag Filt Duty(%) Inverter voltage command magnitude squared and filtered
16 Inv Vx Duty(%) Inverter X-phase voltage command
17 Inv Vy Duty(%) Inverter Y-phase voltage command
18 Inv Vz Duty(%) Inverter Z-phase voltage command
19 Inv Vx Pos Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
20 Inv Vx Neg Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
21 Inv Vy Pos Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
22 Inv Vy Neg Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
23 Inv Vz Pos Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
24 Inv Vz Neg Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
25 Inv Dead x Duty(%) Inverter X-phase dead-time compensation voltage command
26 Inv Dead y Duty(%) Inverter Y-phase dead-time compensation voltage command
27 Inv Dead z Duty(%) Inverter Z-phase dead-time compensation voltage command
28 Inv IMAGSQRT Amps Inverter current
29 Inv Downshift PU Flag to indicate Inverter PWM downshift
Converter Current
Regulators
30 Cnv Ix Amps Converter X-phase current feedback
31 Cnv Iy Amps Converter Y-phase current feedback
32 Cnv Iz Amps Converter Z-phase current feedback
33 Cnv Id Ref Amps Converter synchronous d-axis current regulator reference
34 Cnv Id Fbk Amps Converter synchronous d-axis current regulator feedback
35 Cnv Id Err Amps Converter synchronous d-axis current regulator error
36 Cnv Iq Ref Amps Converter synchronous q-axis current regulator reference
37 Cnv Iq Fbk Amps Converter synchronous q-axis current regulator feedback
38 Cnv Iq Fil Amps Converter synchronous q-axis current regulator filtered feedback
39 Cnv Iq Err Amps Converter synchronous q-axis current regulator error
40 Cnv Vde Duty(%) Converter synchronous d-axis voltage command
41 Cnv Vqe Duty(%) Converter synchronous q-axis voltage command
42 Cnv Vds Duty(%) Converter stationary d-axis voltage command
43 Cnv Vmag Duty(%) Converter voltage command magnitude squared
44 Cnv Vx Duty(%) Converter X-phase voltage command
45 Cnv Vy Duty(%) Converter Y-phase voltage command
46 Cnv Vz Duty(%) Converter Z-phase voltage command
47 Cnv Vx Pos Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
48 Cnv Vx Neg Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
49 Cnv Vy Pos Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
50 Cnv Vy Neg Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
51 Cnv Vz Pos Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
52 Cnv Vz Neg Duty(%) Applicable to 430ML drive only.
53 Cnv ZeroState PU Converter PWM zero state
54 Cnv Dead x Duty(%) Converter X-phase dead-time compensation voltage command

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 159 of 183

55 Cnv Dead y Duty(%) Converter Y-phase dead-time compensation voltage command
56 Cnv Dead z Duty(%) Converter Z-phase dead-time compensation voltage command
57 Cnv Notch In PU Converter notch filter input
58 Cnv Notch Out PU Converter notch filter output
Bus Voltage Regulator
59 Vbus Ref Volts Bus voltage regulator reference
60 Vbus Fbk Volts Bus voltage regulator feedback
61 Vbus Err Volts Bus voltage regulator error
62 Vbus Ref Intg Volts
63 Vbus Required Volts
64 DBR duty cycl Duty(%) DBR Duty Cycle
65 V Battery Fil Volts Filtered Battery Voltage
66 CNV N Sense Volts Applicable to 430ML drive only.
67 INV N Sense Volts Applicable to 430ML drive only.
Gain Scheduling for Current
Regulators
68 Inv Id K gsch PU Inverter d-axis gain scheduling factor
69 Inv Iq K gsch PU Inverter q-axis gain scheduling factor
70 Cnv Id K gsch PU Converter d-axis gain scheduling factor
71 Cnv Iq K gsch PU Converter q-axis gain scheduling factor
Phase Lock Loop (PLL)
72 PLL Vmag Out PU PLL voltage magnitude squared, low-pass filter output
73 PLL Vmag In PU PLL voltage magnitude squared, input to low-pass filter
74 PLL Vds filt PU PLL filtered line-to-line voltage during single-phase operation
75 PLL Vxy smpl Volts PLL Vx-Vy (from A/D converter + scaling).
76 PLL Vyz smpl Volts PLL Vy-Vz (from A/D converter + scaling)
77 PLL Vxz(Batt) Volts PLL Vx-Vz (from A/D converter + scaling). This variable is used to capture battery
voltage for Low cost regen drive in battery mode, or ARO_BOOST mode
78 PLL Vds PU PLL synchronous d-axis voltage feedback
79 PLL Vqs PU PLL synchronous q-axis voltage feedback
80 PLL Vde PU PLL stationary d-axis voltage feedback
81 PLL sin PU PLL sine
82 PLL PI Fbk PU PLL regulator feedback
83 PLL Nseq In PU PLL q-axis negative sequence voltage
Locked Rotor Test
(LRT)
84 LRT theta PU LRT small signal angle
85 LRT sin PU LRT small signal sine
86 LRT theta1 PU LRT motor electrical angle
87 LRT Ld PU LRT inductance calculation
88 LRT Id A1 PU LRT A1 DFT coefficient for current feedback
89 LRT Id B1 PU LRT B1 DFT coefficient for current feedback
90 LRT Vd A1 PU LRT A1 DFT coefficient for voltage command
91 LRT Vd B1 PU LRT B1 DFT coefficient for current command
92 LRT Ld A1 PU LRT A1 DFT coefficient for inductance calculation
93 LRT Ld B1 PU LRT B1 DFT coefficient for inductance calculation
94 LRT Ld A2 PU LRT A2 DFT coefficient for inductance calculation
95 LRT Ld B2 PU LRT B2 DFT coefficient for inductance calculation
MCSS Interface
96 MCSS VEL mm/sec Velocity command from MCSS
97 MCSS ACC mm/sec^ Acceleration command from MCSS
2
98 MCSS LW % Load weigh % command from MCSS
99 MCSS Torque Adc
counts
Encoder
100 ENC WR mm/sec Velocity feedback, unfiltered (does not include adjustment at low speeds). For
speed feedback with low speed calculation, see "ENC WR INC"
101 ENC DELTAT PU Time between last encoder transition and last encoder transition from the previous
velocity task.
102 ENC TNEW PU Time of the last encoder transition
103 ENC DELTACNT PU

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 160 of 183

104 ENC WR INC mm/sec Speed calculation based on incremental pulses for both encoder types.
105 ENC SIN PU SINE wave component of sinusoidal encoder.
106 ENC COS PU COSINE wave component of sinusoidal encoder.
107 ENC RES PER PU Number of encoder sinusoidal periods passed by during one speed calculation
cycle (1ms)
Velocity Regulators
108 Vel Inner Ref mm/sec Inner velocity regulator reference
109 Vel Inner Fbk mm/sec Inner velocity regulator feedback, unfiltered
110 Vel Inner Err mm/sec Inner velocity regulator error
111 Vel Outer Ref mm/sec Outer velocity regulator reference
112 Vel Outer Fbk mm/sec Outer velocity regulator feedback, unfiltered
113 Vel Outer Err mm/sec Outer velocity regulator error
114 Vel Obser Out mm/sec Velocity Observer Output
115 Vel Track Err mm/sec Tracking error between velocity feedback and observer output
116 Vel Notch In mm/sec Velocity notch filter 1 input
117 Vel Notch Out mm/sec Velocity notch filter 1 output
118 Vel Notch2 In mm/sec Velocity notch filter 2 input
119 Vel Notch2 Out mm/sec Velocity notch filter 2 output
120 VFbkFil[mm/s] mm/sec Velocity feedback, filtered
121 VFbkRaw[mm/s] mm/sec Velocity feedback, unfiltered
122 Vel Ref[mm/s] mm/sec Velocity reference
Pretorque
123 Pretorque Amps Pretorque current reference
124 HitchLoad[kg] Kg
125 InCarLoad[%] %
126 LoadInfoTimer 10ms
Fan Control
127 Fan PWM Count PU Fan PWM duty count
128 Fan PWM Duty PU Fan PWM duty cycle command, PU
129 Fan PWM Out PU Fan PWM signal
BRK Control
130 BRK State PU Brake state
131 BRK_PWM_DUT PU BRK PWM duty cycle command, PU
Y
132 BRK_PWM_OUT PU BRK PWM signal
Discretes
133 ESTOP Flag PU Flag to indicate ESTOP
134 Drive Fault PU Flag to indicate drive fault
135 Brk Lifted PU Flag to indicate Brake lifted (BL)
136 Safety Faults PU Flag to indicate S1 and S2 relays are picked
Task Counters
137 Task 1MS PU 1 ms task counter
Drive State
140 Drive State PU Enumerated drive state:
DriveState_NotAvailable 0
DriveState_Shutdown 1
DriveState_PowerDown 2
DriveState_Init 3
DriveState_IdleUnavailable 4
DriveState_IdleAvailable 5
DriveState_PreparingToRun 6
DriveState_ReadyToRun 7
DriveState_Running 8
DriveState_Stopping 9
DriveState_AtTarget 10
DriveState_Calibration 11
DriveState_WaitForSafety 12
DriveState_DDP 13

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 161 of 183

141 Drive Substate PU Enumerated drive sub-state:
DriveSubState_NotAvailable 0
DriveSubState_Init 8
DriveSubState_LineFail 12
DriveSubState_Shutdown 16
DriveSubState_PowerDown 24
DriveSubState_WaitForSafety 32
DriveSubState_RescueOnly 40
DriveSubState_EroOnly 43
DriveSubState_EroTciOnly 45
DriveSubState_IdlePreLearn 48
DriveSubState_IdleOrWaitForSafety 52
DriveSubState_IdleAvailable 56
DriveSubState_PreparingToRun 64
DriveSubState_PerformingLrt 72
DriveSubState_ReadyToRun 80
DriveSubState_Pretorquing 88
DriveSubState_BrakeLifting 96
DriveSubState_BrakeLifted 104
DriveSubState_Accelerating 112
DriveSubState_Constant 120
DriveSubState_Decelerating 128
DriveSubState_StoppingNormal 136
DriveSubState_StoppingTimedDecelCreep 144
DriveSubState_StoppingTimedDecelStop 152
DriveSubState_Stopped 160
DriveSubState_BrakeDropping 168
DriveSubState_BrakeDropped 176
DriveSubState_Untorquing 184
DriveSubState_UnpreparingToRun 192
DriveSubState_Undefined 255
Internal Profile
Generator
142 Profile Pos m Profile generator relative position (CAN and Manual Mode only)
143 Profile Vel m/s Profile generator velocity (CAN and Manual Mode only)
144 Profile Acc m/s^2 Profile generator acceleration (CAN and Manual Mode only)
145 Profile Jerk m/s^3 Profile generator jerk (CAN and Manual Mode only)
146 Profile SD m Profile generator stopping distance (CAN and manual mode only)
147 Profile DTG m Profile generator distance to go (CAN and manual mode only)
Automatic Load Weigh Adjustment (ALWA)
148 Alwa Gain % Automatic Load Weigh Adjustment Gain
149 Alwa Offset % Automatic Load Weigh Adjustment Offset
Internal Profile
Generator
150 ProAdv Pos m Profile generator relative position advanced by 250ms.
151 ProAdv Vel m/s Profile generator velocity advanced by 250ms.
152 ProAdv SD m/s^2 Profile generator acceleration advanced by 250ms.
153 ProAdv FLAG m/s^3 Profile generator advanced state valid flag.
Position Regulator (Applicable only to CAN mode)
154 Position Ref 0.1 mm Position regulator reference (CAN and Manual Mode only)
155 Position Fbk 0.1 mm Position regulator feedback (CAN and Manual Mode only)
156 Position Err 0.1 mm Position regulator error (CAN and Manual Mode only)
157 Position Dtg 0.1 mm Distance to go to target (CAN and Manual Mode only)
158 Pos Ref (ac) 0.1 mm Position regulator reference, AC-coupled for frequency test
159 Pos Fbk (ac) 0.1 mm Position regulator feedback, AC-coupled for frequency test
160 Pos Track Err 0.1 mm Position tracking error (CAN and Manual Mode only)
161 Pos Direction PU Direction command that is latched at the beginning of the run
Secondary Magnet Position
Estimator
162 vdeEst
163 vqeEst
164 vMagSqrEst
165 vMagEst
166 tanAngErrEst

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 162 of 183

Power Calculations
167 Inv power W Inverter power estimate
168 Cnv power W Converter power estimate
169 Drive p loss W Power loss estimate (2Hz filtered)
170 Drive p loss2 W Power loss estimate (10Hz filtered)
171 DC Link Pwr W Transient power into DC capacitors C*V*dv/dt
172 Pre chrg Pwr W Power in precharge resistors
173 Balance R Pwr W Power in balance resistors
174 Reactor Pwr W Transient power in line reactor L*di/dt
175 PLoss Thrsh W Power loss threshold for DC capacitor failure detection
Power Factor Control
(PFC)
176 Pfc ref Duty(%) Power Factor Control reference
177 Pfc fbk Duty(%) Power Factor Control feedback
178 Pfc err Duty(%) Power Factor Control error
179 Pfc out A Power Factor Control output
Field Weakening Control (FWC)
180 Fwc ref Duty(%) Field Weakening Control reference
181 Fwc fbk Duty(%) Field Weakening Control feedback
182 Fwc err Duty(%) Field Weakening Control error
183 Fwc out A Field Weakening Control output
Field Orientation
184 Enc theta(e) rad Encoder electrical angle
185 Inv theta rad Field Orientation angle (induction motor only)
186 Inv thetaSlip rad Slip angle (induction motor only)
187 Inv we mm/s Motor Electrical frequency (based on encoder feedback)
188 Flux estimate A Rotor flux estimate (induction motor only)
Vanes (applicable only to CAN
mode)
189 Vane TransOcc PU Flag to indicate PRS transition occurred (CAN Mode only)
190 PrsSpikesFltd PU Count of filtered PRS states, see description in SVT monitor M-1-7
191 Last SpikeLen Samples Length of last filtered PRS state, see description in SVT monitor M-1-7
192 Vane Last Dev 0.1 mm Difference between detected and expected transitions (CAN Mode only)
193 Vane Last Cor 0.1 mm Last correction made to position feedback (CAN Mode only)
194 VaneExpValid PU Flag indicating that a valid expectation for the next PRS vane transition exists
195 VaneTrnsLoLim 0.1 mm Lower position limit [0.1mm] for next expected PRS vane transition
196 VaneTrnsUpLim 0.1 mm Upper position limit [0.1mm] for next expected PRS vane transition
Hoistway Signals
197 HwySigUnfiltd PU
198 HwySigLpFiltd PU
199 HwySig10msTsk PU Filtered HwySig_1msTsk used by control functions in 10ms task. Only valid
combinations are accepted.
200 HSVT Flags Bitfield High Speed Vane Tracking states, bit significance: See code
201 HsBufIndxRead PU Hoistway Signal Buffer: Pointer to next read element
202 HsBufIdxWrite PU Hoistway Signal Buffer: Pointer to next write element
203 ZoneMainVane PU PRS zone on vane overlapping PRS sensor head most
204 ZoneOtherVane PU PRS zone on potential other vane overlapping PRS sensor head
205 ZonesAreValid PU Flag indicating that PRS signals indicate valid vane zones
206 DoorZoneSignl PU lag indicating to control functions that car is in door zone (active if both LV1 and
LV2 are active). Only updated for valid hwy signal combinations.
207 1LS PU The 1LS signal that is receieved over CAN.
208 2LS PU The 2LS signal that is receieved over CAN.
209 FbkPosErrMarg PU Error margin for drive's feedback position in 1/10mm, e.g. set to 20cm (200) for well
known position (NORMAL runs).
210 SS EncPos 0.1mm Single sensor encoder position, relative to last PRS transition (:=0 at transition).
211 SS maxPosWoTr 0.1mm Maximum value of "SS EncPos" since last PRS transition.
212 SS minPosWoTr 0.1mm Minimum value of "SS EncPos" since last PRS transition.
213 SS uprZoneLim 0.1mm Upper limit mm-position of current vane zone, i.e. of position range w/o PRS
transition.
214 SS lwrZoneLim 0.1mm Lower limit mm-position of current vane zone, i.e. of position range w/o PRS
transition.
215 SS Flags PU Codes flags and states of Single-Sensor algorithms, see source code.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 163 of 183

Floor Information
216 Floor.current PU Indicates the current floor
217 Floor.nxtComm PU Indicates the next committable floor
218 Floor.accpTgt PU Indicates the accepted target floor
CAN Information
219 CanRun.mode PU Describes the type of run that is currently executed
220 CanRun.cmd PU Accepted, currently valid run command.
221 CanRun.status PU Status of ongoing run.
222 CanRun.requst PU Request from within the drive to execute a run.
223 CanRn.ablSta PU Advanced Brake Lift: 0=ABL_INACTIVE, 1= ABL_ACTIVE, 2= REMOVING_ABL.
224 RunHdl.cmd PU Command from RunHandler to StateMachine controlling ABL, EndRun.
225 newMsgFlags PU
226 CanStopCmd PU Flag indicating that the drive has received a CAN command to stop or that the
state of the limit switches 1LS, 2LS is not known
OPB Information
227 Opb.stopCmd PU Flag indicating that the drive has received a CAN command to stop. Reset when
status is STOPPED
228 Opb.endRunCmd PU Flag indicating that the drive has received a CAN command to end the run with
profiled deceleration. Reset when status is STOPPED
229 OpbDRC.mode PU Mode parameter from DriveRunCommand message received.
230 OpbDRC.dir PU Direction parameter from DriveRunCommand message received
231 OpbDGL.tgtLdg PU Target landing received in a DriveGoToLanding message
232 OpbDGL.prof PU Profile index received in a DriveGoToLanding message
233 OpbDC.cmd PU Command in DriveCommand message received.
234 OpbDC.option PU Option in DriveCommand message received.
CAN Communications
235 SpeedCheckFlg PU Flag for speed check to TCBC (CAN Mode only)
236 RlevPermitTcb PU Flag for relevel permissive from TCBC (CAN Mode only)
237 LoadDataNotOk PU Flag for load weigh data invalid from TCBC (CAN Mode only)
238 RlevAbortRun PU
239 Rlev\Nrz@Decl PU
240 HovRlev State PU
Velocity Loop
241 velOuterKp PU Proportinal gain for outer vel loop
242 velOuterKi PU Integral gain for outer vel loop
243 velInnerKp PU Inner velocity loop gain
244 velLoopA1 PU Vel loop filter A1 coefficint
Phase Lock Loop (PLL)
245 PLL Vde Latch PU PLL error variable latched before noise injected to it in testmode 4001
246 PLL Vmag Flt PU PLL voltage magnitude squared, low-pass filter output at 0.8 Hz.
247 PLL Line2Neut Volts PLL line to line voltage in units of volts (rms).
248 PLL Line2Line Volts PLL line to neutral voltage in units of volts (peak).
Rms
Discretes
249 UIB PU UIB Signal State
250 DIB PU DIB Signal State
Shock Detection
251 InvIqRefMax Amps Max of Inv Iq Ref for shock detection
252 InvIqRefMin Amps Min of Inv Iq Ref for shock detection
253 AbsInvIqDeff Amps Difference of InvIqRefMax and InvIqRefMin
254 shockDetected PU Flag of shock detection
Misc
255 Vel fbk Out mm/sec Filtered velocity feedback
256 FlightLength 0.1mm Flight length
257 BY Relay NC PU BY relay feedback (0-dropped/1-picked)
258 Power Supply V Power supply voltage
Brak
e
259 BrkCurFbk Amps Brake Current Feedback
260 BrkCurRef Amps Brake Current Reference
Temperature
261 Temp Cnv C Converter heatsink temperature

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 164 of 183

262 Temp Inv C Inverter heatsink temperature
Sixth Harmonic Current regulator
263 Vd 6th sin component of d- axis voltage needed to achieve 6th harmonic inverter current
regulation
264 Vd 6th cos component of d- axis voltage needed to achieve 6th harmonic inverter current
regulation
265 Vq 6th sin component of q- axis voltage needed to achieve 6th harmonic inverter current
regulation
266 Vq 6th cos component of d- axis voltage needed to achieve 6th harmonic inverter current
regulation
Gain Scheduling for Current
Regulators
267 Inv Id Kg2 The amount of gain reduction in the 6th harmonic inverter current regulator as a
function of gain scheduling tuning parameters (see Ld sat/ sat slope in M(4)34)
268 Inv Iq Kg2 The amount of gain reduction in the 6th harmonic inverter current regulator as a
function of gain scheduling tuning parameters (see Lq sat/ sat slope in M(4)34
Self Commissioning
269 Self Result1 various These and the next 3 parameters take on different meanings depending on which
self commissioning test is running. See Section 7.2 for further details.
270 Self Result2 various
Software Test
273 Ref(ac) PU Regulator reference variable with major dc component removed, when the drive in
in the associated test mode.
274 Err(ac) PU Regulator error variable, when the drive in in the associated test mode. The ac
signifier is for consistency in the notation.
275 Fbk(ac) PU Regulator feedback variable with major dc component removed, when the drive in
in the associated test mode.
276 Cmd(ac) PU Regulator output when the drive in in the associated test mode. The ac signifier is
for consistency in the notation.
277 Test Frac 1 PU Test variable for fractional data type
283 Test Long 1 PU Test variable for long data type
289 Test Flag 1 PU Test variable for flag data type
295 Debug Long 1 PU Debug variable long type
301 Debug Frac 1 PU Debug variable for flag data type

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 165 of 183
7.2 Self Commissioning DAT variables
The self commissioning DAT variables take on different meanings depending upon which self
commissioning test is running. The table below summarizes the meanings for each test.
Test Self Result 1 Self Result 2 Self Result 3 Self Result 4

Kp Test gain motorL (mH)
Ki Test gain motorR (Ohm)
Lsigma Test lsigma (mH)
Sweep Test freq (Hz) Re Z (Ohm) Im Z (mH) Im Z - lsigma (mH)
RTC via Re Z
RTC via Re Z freq (Hz) Re Z (Ohm) (sec)
RTC via Im Z freq (Hz) RTC via Im Z (sec) Im Z - lsigma (mH)
Fine tune Vd Vd err Self.filt.out Fine tune state
Inertia MRAS Out MRAS err MRAS x Vel.outer.fbk
7.3 Signal Groups

It is often desired to observe one signal simultaneously with several other closely related signals.
The most common groupings of signals can be selected using the signal groups box on the DAT,
and are listed in the following table.
Signal Group Name Description

Inv Ixyz Inverter stationary current feedbacks: ix, iy, iz
Inv Id Inverter synchronous d-axis regulator: idref, idfbk, iderr, idout
Inv Iq Inverter synchronous q-axis regulator: iqref, iqfbk, iqerr, idout
Inv Vdq Inverter synchronous voltage commands: vde, vqe, vds
Inv PWM Inverter PWM voltage commands: vx, vy, vz
Cnv Ixyz Converter stationary current feedbacks: ix, iy, iz
Cnv Id Converter synchronous d-axis regulator: idref, idfbk, iderr
Cnv Iq Converter synchronous q-axis regulator: iqref, iqfbk, iqerr
Cnv Vdq Converter synchronous voltage commands: vde, vqe, vds,
Cnv PWM Converter PWM voltage commands: vx, vy, vz
Vbus Bus voltage regulator: vref, vfbk, verr
PLL Phase Lock Loop (PLL) stationary voltage: vds, vqs, pllsin
LRT Lock Rotor Test (LRT): smsg_angle, smsg_sin, Ld_theta, Ld
Inner Vel Inner velocity regulator: vref, vfbk, verr
Outer Vel Outer velocity regulator: vref, vfbk, verr
Vel Notch Velocity notch filter #1: in, out
Cnv Notch Converter notch filter: in, out
PLL LPF Phase Lock Loop (PLL) low pass filter: in, out
Fan PWM Fan PWM variables: count_duty, duty, out
DBR PWM Not used (was applicable only for non-regen drives).
Inv Dead Comp Inverter dead-time compensation: vx, vy, vz
Cnv Dead Comp Converter dead-time compensation: vx, vy, vz
Test Frac IO General test signals for software development: ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4
Test Int IO General test signals for software development: ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4
Test Long IO General test signals for software development: ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4
Test Flag IO General test signals for software development: ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4
LRT Id DFT Locked Rotor Test (LRT) Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) Coefficients for id: a1, b1
LRT Ld DFT Locked Rotor Test (LRT) Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) Coefficients for Ld: a1, b1
MCSS Commands Signals from MCSS: Vel, Acc, LW
Encoder Encoder related signals
Brk PWM Brake PWM variables: count_duty, duty, out
Pretorque Pretorque command, brake lifted, velocity regulator output, inv iq fbk
Inv IMAGSQRT Inverter current magnitude
SX SX pick command, DBD, S1_NO, Safety chain

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 166 of 183

Profile Gen Profile Generator: pos, vel, accel, jerk
Position Position regulator: reference, feedback and error
Magnet Pos Magnet Position Estimator: Vd, Vq, we
Drive Pow Power estimates: Inv, Cnv, Loss
Pfc Power Factor Controller: reference, feedback, error, out
Fwc Field Weakening Controller: reference, feedback, error, out
Vane Correction-to-Vane related signals
Rlev+SpdChk Releveling and speed check related signals
Self Comm Self Result1, Self Result2, Self Result3, Self Result4
Freq Test Used for loop tuning
User 1 User-Defined Group #1 (See Document #55744 for additional details)
8 Engineering Test Modes

Several test modes are available that are useful in the development and tuning of drives. The
test modes are expected to be used by Otis Engineering personnel only.
8.1 Overview
Test modes provide the capability to measure and adjust the performance of the drive control
loops as well as perform other tests. The test modes are activated by using the engineering
version of the Data Acquisition Tool (DAT), Software Configuration Number AAA30959AAA.
• The engineering version of the Data Acquisition Tool (DAT) allows special commands to be
sent to the drive. The DAT must be active in order to enable the test modes.
• In certain test modes, an internal white noise generator is used to generate a test signal with
broadband frequency content. It is injected into the control loop under test as determined by
the test mode setting. The amplitude of the test signal is controlled by REF 1 in the DAT.
Certain test modes also have additional offset signals controlled by REF 2 and REF 3.
• Test signals can be displayed in one of two ways. First, they can be displayed at full
bandwidth (10kHz) on an oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer using the D/A converters on the
Option Board. Alternatively, the signals can be digitally saved to a binary file using the DAT,
but at reduced bandwidth (1kHz). The signals to be displayed are automatically determined
by the test mode selected.
A list of available test modes is shown in Table 8-1.

Test Mode Description
Normal Mode (MCSS or TCB-CAN)
Torque Test Mode
Rotating Current Vector Test Mode
Inner Velocity Test Mode
Outer Velocity Test Mode
Position Loop test mode
Magnetizing Current Test Mode (inv d –axis)
PWM Open-Loop Test Mode
Converter -Current Test Mode
DC Bus Voltage Test Mode
Power Factor Control (PFC) Test Mode
Field Weakening Control (FWC) Test Mode
Manual mode
Profile test mode
Magnet alignment test mode
Velocity notch filter test mode

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 167 of 183

Table 8-1 Test Modes
8.2 Enabling and Changing Test Modes
Special care must be taken when enabling a test mode or equipment damage may result!
For example, feeding a constant torque current to an unloaded machine can cause the
speed to increase out of control!!
1. Attach a RS232-to-RS422 converter cable from the host PC to the drive service tool port.
2. Run the Data Acquisition Tool (DAT) on the host PC and verify communication.
3. Verify that both the PREPARE TO RUN and LIFT BRAKE switches are OFF. The drive will
not enter test mode unless both of these commands are OFF.
4. Set the desired test mode by changing the test mode setting in the DAT.
When in a test mode, the safety chain is monitored and must be established. Jumpers
may have to be added to allow the drive to run in test mode.
8.3 Exiting Test Modes
To terminate test mode operation, set the drive mode setting to normal. Discontinuing use of the
Data Acquisition Tool (DAT) will also disable any of the test modes.
8.4 Test Mode I/O
Table 8-2 provides a reference of the test mode I/O. In the Table, the following abbreviations are
used:
REF - Data Acquisition Tool (DAT) reference
CH - data logger channel or D/A channel
ref - control loop reference signal
fbk - control loop feedback signal
err - control loop error signal
out - control loop output signal
Test Mode Inputs Outputs
REF 1 REF 2 REF 3 CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4
NORMAL - - - - - - -
Noise
Torque (Iq) Iq Offset Id ref Iq ref Iq fbk Iq err Iq out
Amplitude
Motor Current
Amplitude Frequency - Ix Iy Iz Id
Rotating Vector
Noise Vinner Vinner Vinner Vinner
Inner Velocity - Id ref
Amplitude ref fbk err out
Noise Vouter Vouter Vouter Vouter
Outer Velocity - -
Noise
Position Pos offset - Pos ref Pos fbk Pos err Pos out
Amplitude
Magnetizing Noise Inv Id
- Id ref Id fbk Id err Id out
Current (Id) Amplitude Offset
Open-Loop X-phase Y-phase Z-phase
X duty Y duty Z duty -
PWM duty duty duty
Converter Noise Cnv Id Cnv Id Cnv Id Cnv Id Cnv Id
-
d-axis Current Amplitude Offset ref fbk err out

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 168 of 183
Noise
Bus Voltage Offset - Vb ref Vb fbk Vb err Vb out
Amplitude
Noise PFC PFC PFC PFC
PFC Offset -
Noise FWC FWC FWC FWC
FWC Offset -
Manual - - - - - - -
Profile Profile Profile Profile
PROFILE - - -
Pos vel Acc Jerk
Align Magnet - Id Offset - Id ref Id fbk Id err Vd
Vel Vel
Noise Inv Iq
Velocy Notch offset Notch 1 Notch 1 Inv Iz
Amplitude Fbk
In Out
Noise Gain
PLL - - - - -
Amplitude Selection
Table 8-2 Test Mode I/O
8.5 Test Mode Descriptions
Test Mode Description
NORMAL
In this mode, the current in the motor is regulated, but the speed is not. The torque control
of the system can be tuned by using white noise as the torque reference and measuring
Torque the frequency response of the control loop. A torque offset may be specified, as well as a
d-axis current offset. The currents produced by the drive are limited to the current limit of
the drive.
Rotating In this mode, a rotating current vector is produced. The amplitude and frequency are
Current independently adjustable. The currents produced by the drive are limited to the current
Vector limit of the drive.
In this mode, the inner velocity loop can be tuned by adding white noise to the inner
Inner velocity reference. The reference for the inner velocity loop is the sum of the normal
Velocity velocity reference and the internal white noise source. A d-axis current may also be
specified. The outer velocity loop is bypassed.
In this mode, the outer velocity regulator can be tuned by adding white noise to the outer
Outer
velocity regulator reference. The reference for the outer velocity loop is the sum of the
Velocity
normal velocity reference and the internal white noise source.
In this mode, the position regulator can be tuned by adding white noise to the position
Position reference. An offset can also be specified. The reference for the Position loop is the sum
of the internal white noise source and the normal reference.
In this mode, the current in the motor is regulated, but the speed is not. The current
Magnetizing regulator can be tuned by using white noise as the magnetizing current reference. A
Current current offset may also be specified. The currents produced by the drive are limited to the
current limit of the drive.
In this mode, the inverter and converter operate in open loop, i.e. currents are not
regulated. The PWM duty cycle of each phase is independently adjustable.
Open-Loop This mode should NEVER be used with voltage on the DC link or damage to the
PWM IGBT’s may result from uncontrolled output currents!
The PWM duty cycles for inverter X, Y, Z and converter R, S, T phases are obtained from
Data Acquisition Tool (DAT) REF 1, 2, and 3, respectively.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 169 of 183
In this mode, the converter current regulator can be tuned by adding white noise to the d-
Converter
axis current reference. The reference for the d-axis converter current regulator is the sum
d-axis
of the normal reference and the internal white noise source. An offset current can also be
Current
specified.
In this mode, the voltage regulator can be tuned by adding white noise to the bus voltage
Bus Voltage reference. The reference for the bus voltage regulator is the sum of the normal reference
and the internal white noise source.
In this mode, the power factor control (PFC) can be tuned by adding a white noise to the
PFC PFC reference. The reference for the PFC is the sum of the internal white noise source
and the offset reference.
In this mode, the field weakening control can be tuned by using white noise as the FWC
FWC reference. The reference for the FWC is the sum of the internal white noise source and
the offset reference.
This modes allows the drive to run in a simulated manula mode where the up down
MANUAL
buttoms are commanded via the DAT up/down arrows buttoms
This test modes tests the drive profile generator where the distance to travel is entered via
PROFILE the SVT engineering menu (Target) in M462. The run command is initiated similar to the
MANUAL mode above.
In this test mode the drive applies d-axis current to the motor phases (basically x-phase
current while y and z phases half of the current with reversed polarity) to align the magnets
Align with the x-phase such that the locked rotor angle offset Mag Pos Err eDeg in menu 1-8 is
Magnet calculated to be 0 degrees. This test mode is used to verify the locked rotor test. After
169pplication of d-axis current to the motor in this test mode while brake is lifted will result
in a locked rotor test result of zero degrees (MagPos /LRT eDeg).
This test mode is not DAT initiated test mode. To initiate this test mode the engineering
parameter in M(4)62 "Engineering Test" is set to 4001 (4 for inverter, 0 for convertere
PWM disabled, 0 for inverter PWM disabled, 1 for PLL test mode). After setting this DAT
PLL
REF 1 controls noise into the loop. DAT REF3 controls high and low gain selection.
Positive entry for DAT REF3 selects high bandwidth gains for the PLL loop while negative
entry selects low bandwidth gains.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 170 of 183
9 Pre-Defined Motor Parameters

When the parameter Motor Type is set to a pre-defined motor type (other than 901 or 902), the
subsequent motor parameters are automatically set as shown in the following table and cannot
be modified.
Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2

Motor Model R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2
1.5T 1.5T 1.5T 2.5T 2.5T 2.5T 2.5T 2.5T 2.5T
AV303-AV306
AV102 AV104
AV313-AV316
AV112 AV114 AV301, AV302
AV324
AV121 AV122 AV311, AV312
AV343
AV141 AV143 AV322, AV341
AV344
AV142 AV144 AV342, AV351
AV353
AV151 AV153 AV352, AV372
Otis P/N AV354
AV152 AV154 AV401, AV402
Proto AK AV374 Proto Proto Proto
A*A20220- AV202 AV204 AV407
AV403-AV406
AV212 AV214 AV411, AV412
AV408, AV409
AV241 AV243 AV422
AV413-AV416
AV242 AV244 AV441, AV442
AV424
AV251 AV253 AV446, AV447
AV443, AV444
AV252 AV254 AV451, AV452
AV448, AV449
AV453, AV454
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 101 102 191 202 203 204 290 291 293
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Rated Trq Nm 106 106 105 165 170 170 165 165 165
Rated Trq I A 7.3 12 13 30 12.8 19.3 21 28 19.4
Ld mH 112 46.5 36 11.7 54.9 27.5 28 11 22
Lq mH 144 59 45 14 65.1 30.0 33 11.5 30.5
R Ohm 1 0.7 1 0.7 1 0.7 0.395 0.7 0.7
T/A Slope % 23 26.89 35.4 47.8 20 18.66 0 0 48.0
T/A Offset A 0 1.3 6 12 0 2.2 0 0 4.7
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 2.53 1.28 0 0 0 0 1.25
Id Saturation A 2.29 6.5 5 20 7.4 11.0 12.5 20 12
Iq Saturation A 0 0 2.5 0 2.0 3.5 3.13 15 0
Ld Slope mH/A 11.89 2.26 1.98 0.216 3.53 0.73 0.828 0.156 0.678
Lq Slope mH/A 7.52 1.56 1.26 0.128 2.47 0.71 0.9 0.157 0.523
Lq0 mH 148.3 62.7 45 14 87.9 37 33 11.5 30.5
Lq1 1/mA 38.3 43.9 0 0 50.9 24.3 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 5 400 0 0 700 200 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 70.7 29 36 11.7 45.4 20 28 11 22
Rated Motor rpm 371 661 661 661 371 661 377 661 661
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 40 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Machine Parameters
not in SVT
Turns Per Coil (TPC) 52 33 31 14 30 21 21 14 20
2
Machine Inertia (kg-m ) 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
Sheave Diametr (mm) 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 171 of 183

Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Test
Motor Model R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 IM
Winding designation: W1 W2 W4 W5
Otis – W# W3 (G/G2/G3)
(Kollmorgan letter) 5TA 5TA (E) (H) (F/F2/F3) (J) 27KW
5TB, C & D
Otis machine name 5TA 5TB 5TC & D 5TA
AS3, AS13
AS23, AS33
AS51, AS53 AS52, AS54
AS55 AS56
AS1 AS5
AS61, AS63 AS62, AS64
AS11 AS2 AS15
AS71, AS73 AS72, AS74
Otis P/N AN- AS21 AS12 AS25
AS75, AS77 AS76, AS78
AS31 AS22 AS26
AAA20220- 3SP Proto
AS101
AS81, AS83
AS32
AS82, AS84
AS105
Proto
ABA20220 - Proto AS103 AS152, AS154
AS122 AS102 AS126
AS136 AS156
AS133 AS135 AS131
AS151, AS153 AS172, AS174
AS134 AS132
AS155 AS176, AS178
AS171, AS173 AS182, AS184
AS175, AS177
AS181, AS183
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 391 392 393 394 395 396 398 491
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4
Rated Trq Nm 310 310 310 392 394 302 310 129
Rated Trq I A 63 33.9 30 41 32.3 39 16.9 57
Ld mH 6.5 21 28 15 21.8 10.2 69 1
Lq mH 8.5 27 40 22 35.7 14.5 85.8 1
R Ohm 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.8 1
T/A Slope % 37.4 56.7 51.45 31.9 32.1 33.82 46.5 1
T/A Offset A 12 15 9 2 1.4 10 5 1
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0.69 0.57 0.65 0.57 0.84 0 0.001
Id Saturation A 10 10 5 15 7 15 5 0
Iq Saturation A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ld Slope mH/A 0.105 0.465 0.629 0.22 0.47 0.18 2.8 0
Lq Slope mH/A 0.042 0.247 0.343 0.19 0.35 0.11 1.31 0
Lq0 mH 8.5 33.1 69 38 45.2 19 121.5 1
Lq1 1/mA 0 10.69 34.7 28 28.7 14.5 33.9 10
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 38.33 138.8 100 200 60 200 20
Ld0 mH 6.5 21 20 11 23 9.5 50 1
Rated Mag I A - - - - - - - 22.4
Peak Mag I A - - - - - - - 50
Rtr Time Const s - - - - - - - 0.28
Rated Motor rpm 576 576 576 648 518 822 324 1489
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 -
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 -
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -
Machine Parameters
not in SVT
Turns Per Coil (TPC) 20 36 17 12 15 10 30 ?
2
Machine Inertia (kg-m ) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.48 0.48 0.4 0.4 0.25
Sheave Diametr (mm) 118 118 118 118 118 118 118 -
Note 1: Set to 902 for the user defined motor type and enter parameters in menu 3-4 since a predefined
motor type does not yet exist in the software baseline for this machine.

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 172 of 183

Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Gen2
Motor Model light light light light light R2
3T 3T 5T 6T 6T 5T
Otis P/N
B17 B19 C1 D3 D1 Proto
DAA20220-
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 205 206 301 401 402 397
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 20 20 20 20 20 8
Rated Trq Nm 665 665 700 1280 1280 310
Rated Trq I A 11.5 21.3 29.7 31.8 48.1 66
Ld mH 116 35.6 26.5 36.8 17.9 3.62
Lq mH 105 32.6 21 32.9 17 5.2
R Ohm 4.95 1.65 0.92 0.62 0.32 0.6
T/A Slope % 29.1 16 23 21.5 24 25.3
T/A Offset A 2 4 6 6 10 2
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 10 15 35 30 30 20
Iq Saturation A 3 15 30 25 30 0
Ld Slope mH/A 3.55 1.2 0.37 0.48 0.22 0.03
Lq Slope mH/A 0.91 0.23 0.2 0.25 0.07 0.01
Lq0 mH 105 32.6 19.2 35.1 18 8.3
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0 0 11.1
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 0 20
Ld0 mH 85 26 18.58 23.17 12 3.62
Rated Motor rpm 96 168 234 139 199 809
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 173 of 183

Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 2T5148 2T5181 Gen2 Gen2
Green Green Green Green D D Green Green
Power Power Power Power Gen2 Gen2 Power Power
(GGP) (GGP) (GGP) (GGP) Green Green (GGP) (GGP)
Motor Model Vector Vector Comfrt Comfrt Power Power Premir Comfort
480kg 630kg 630kg 630kg (GGP) (GGP) 630kg 1000kg
1.0m/s 1.0m/s 1.75m/s 1.0m/s Comfrt Premir 1.75m/s 1.6/1.7
1000kg 630kg 5 m/s
1.0m/s 1.0m/s
Z1, Z11, X201 S252, AJ1 AJ11
Z4, Z14 X251, S552, AJ2, AJ12,
V251,
Z6, Z16, X252, S253, AJ502, AJ512,
Otis P/N V255, TAA20
Z7 Z17 X253, S572 AJ3, AJ13,
V551, 220
TAA20220- X551, AJ503, AJ513,
V571, V256
X571, AJ4, AJ14,
V574
AX1, AJ504 AJ514
AX2
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 103 104 105 201 207 208 209 210
3-4 Machine Params
Number of Poles 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Rated Trq Nm 59.3 77.8 83.3 83.3 126.0 106.6 106.6 126.0
Rated Trq I A 6.65 7.4 14 7.8 13.60 7.6 13.6 22.5
Ld mH 108 105 36 87 62.92 108 40 22
Lq mH 146 150 46 110 78.22 147 53 28
R Ohm 7.7 5.1 1.8 5 1.25 5.5 1.9 1.4
T/A Slope % 0 30 0 35 27.91 65 40 44
T/A Offset A 0 0 0 2.57 2.90 6 8 9
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0 0.00 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 2.2 0 6 4 3.0 2.2 4 0.0
Iq Saturation A 1.5 3.5 1 3 1.50 1.9 2.8 6.3
Ld Slope mH/A 4.6 0 1.2 3.09 0.46 5.9 1.5 0.00
Lq Slope mH/A 9.4 4.5 1.15 4.8 2.66 6.3 1.28 0.55
Lq0 mH 146 150 46 118.54 111.9 147 53 36
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 43.25 56 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 900 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 98 105 36 58 56.14 86 32 22
Rated Motor rpm 477 477 835 477 477 371 649 835
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20.00 20 20 20.00
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10 10 10 10 10.00 10 10 10.00
3-3 Brake Params
Brk Cnt Type 0-3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
Brk Pick Time ms 500 2500 2500 2500 2500 500 500 2500
Brk Setl Time ms 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
Lft Brk Delay ms 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Brk Lftd Dely ms 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Brk ramp up t ms 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Brk ramp dn t ms 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
Brk Pick A 1 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.8 1.6
Brk Pick % 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67
Brk Hold A 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.8 0.8 1.2
Brk Drop % 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Brk OCT A 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
Brk R 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Brk L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Reivaj Reivaj Reivaj 1.3T0348B 1.7T5124B

Motor Model 380 V 380 V 380 V Gen2 Green 1.3T0348A Gen2
320kg 450kg 630kg Power Gen2 Green Green

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 174 of 183

1.0m/s 1.0m/s 1.0m/s (GGP) Power (GGP) Power
Comfort Switch (GGP-6P)
630 kg 450 kg 450 kg
0.63 m/s 0.63 m/s
1.0 m/s
S101, S406, TBA20220 TAA20220-
S111, S407 Z206 AX21
S121, TBA20220 Z216 TBA20220-
Otis P/N S501,
S521,
- Z208, AX21
TAA20220- Z218,
S251,
S551, AX407,
S571 AX417
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 520 521 522 106 107 108
3-4 Machine Params
Number of Poles 10 10 10 10 10 10
Rated Trq Nm 45 63.4 83.3 83.3 68.4 113.3
Rated Trq I A 7.48 10.6 14.12 102 92.5 6.6
Ld mH 30 43.2 17 0.33 0.52 150
Lq mH 62 55.3 36 0.49 0.58 185
R Ohm 3.7 2.5 1.58 0.01 0.01 8
T/A Slope % 40 36.6 21 21 47.0 34.6
T/A Offset A 0.0 3.5 0.0 0 50.0 2.7
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.002 2 0
Id Saturation A 0.0 4.4 0.0 30.0 70.0 2.6
Iq Saturation A 4.0 2.3 2.8 50.0 10.0 1.5
Ld Slope mH/A 0.0 1.37 0.0 0.0023 0.0021 7
Lq Slope mH/A 3.076 1.78 1.305 0.0018 0.0022 7
Lq0 mH 62 55.3 36 0.46 0.58 310
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 30 43.2 17 0.3 0.4 265
Rated Motor rpm 480 477 480 477 477 239
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10 10 10 2 2 10
3-3 Brake Params
Brk Cnt Type 0-3 2 3 3 1 1 3
Brk Sw Type 0-7 1 1
Brk Pick Time ms 500 2500 2500 1500 1500 2500
Brk Setl Time ms 500 500 500 500 500 500
Lft Brk Delay ms 200 200 200 100 100 200
Brk Lftd Dely ms 200 200 200 30 30 200
Brk ramp up t ms 100 100 100 n/a n/a 100
Brk ramp dn t ms 400 400 400 n/a n/a 400
Brk Pick A 0.8 1.6 1.6 n/a n/a 1.6
Brk Pick % 67 67 67 n/a n/a 69
Brk Hold A 0.8 1.2 1.2 n/a n/a 1.2
Brk Drop % 20 20 20 n/a n/a 20
Brk OCT A 1.9 1.9 1.9 4 4 1.9
Brk R 30 30 30 n/a n/a 29
Brk L 1 1 1 n/a n/a 1

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 175 of 183

PM138 PM138 PM138 PM138 PM138 PM138 BOMCO
Motor Model 3
15T-
1800kg
D_A
Otis P/N
20220
DAA20220- AK
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 711 712 713 714 715 716 721
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 24 24 24 24 24 24 30
Rated Trq Nm 1107 1470 1303 1107 1470 1303 1750
Rated Trq I A 62.9 81 95.9 62.9 81 95.9 79.2
Ld mH 5.5 2.6 1.98 4.8 3.9 2.3 4.2
Lq mH 4.9 4.1 2.3 4.65 3.85 2.22 4.2
R Ohm 0.16 0.153 0.05 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.3
T/A Slope % 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
T/A Offset A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 55 65 65 45 55 70 0
Iq Saturation A 65 65 65 22 10 20 50
Ld Slope mH/A 0.02 0 0 0.02 0.01 0.01
Lq Slope mH/A 0.01 0.01 0 0.01 0 0
Ld Slope uH/A 17 3.1 2.8 18 11.3 5.7 23
Lq Slope uH/A 9.5 6.9 3.0 7.5 4.1 1.3 8.5
Lq0 mH 4.9 4.1 2.3 4.65 3.85 2.3 4.2
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 5.5 2.6 1.98 4.8 3.9 2.22 4.2
Rated Motor rpm 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20 8
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10 10 10 10 10 10 2.5

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 176 of 183
Motor Model 30T 30T 30T 30T
Otis P/N
DAA20220-
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 731 732 733 734
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 36 36 36 36
Rated Trq Nm 3724 3724 4655 4655
Rated Trq I A 131.9 131.9 160 160
Ld mH 2.02 2.02 1.70 1.70
Lq mH 2.11 2.11 1.72 1.72
R Ohm 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.13
T/A Slope % 0 0 0 0
T/A Offset A 0 0 0 0
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 65 65 0 0
Iq Saturation A 86 86 80 80
Ld Slope mH/A 0.0026 0.0026 0.0030 0.0030
Lq Slope mH/A 0.0016 0.0016 0.0009 0.0009
Lq0 mH 2.11 2.11 1.72 1.72
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 2.02 2.02 1.70 1.70
Rated Motor rpm 176 176 176 176
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10 10 10 10

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 177 of 183

2.6T5137A 2.6T5137C 2.6T5165B 2.6T5165C 3.2T5137D
Motor Model 2.6T-54X1 2.6T-54X2 2.6T-57X1 2.6T-57X2 3.2T-54X3
T_A T_A T_A T_A
T_A
AAA2 20220 20220 20220 20220
20220AB3
0220A AB7 AB2 AB6 AB4
AB503
W AB5 AB502 AB1 AB504
AB13
Otis P/N AB505 AB12 AB501
AB513
AB14
71 & AB15 AB512 AB11 AB514
AB23
81 AB515 AB22 AB511 AB24
AB523
AB25 AB522 AB21 AB524
AB525 AB521
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 302 211 212 213 214 303
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 10 14 14 14 14 14
Rated Trq Nm 210 160 200 160 200 255
Rated Trq I A 19.5 12.2 13.4 19.4 25 17.1
Ld mH 52.00 45 41 14 13 32
Lq mH 67.00 70 48.5 17 17 41
R Ohm 3.00 3 3 2 2 3
T/A Slope % 41.3 22.9 76.5 43.8 47 33
T/A Offset A 0.99 3.7 12 13.5 15 7.5
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0.00 0 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 6.00 2.2 5 9 8 9
Iq Saturation A 0.00 2.4 5 9 5 5
Ld Slope mH/A 2.43 1.80 0.94 0.27 0.21 0.74
Lq Slope mH/A 1.36 1.95 0.87 0.21 0.19 0.6
Lq0 mH 90.0 70 48.5 17 17 41
Lq1 1/mA 36 0 0 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 300 0 0 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 40.00 45 41 5 5 32
Rated Motor rpm 371.0
371 378 649 660 378
0
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
3-3 Brake Params See Note 1) See Note 1) See Note 1) See Note 1) See Note 1)
Brk Cnt Type 0-3 3 3 3 3 3
Brk Pick Time ms 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
Brk Setl Time ms 500 500 500 500 500
Lft Brk Delay ms 200 200 200 200 200
Brk Lftd Dely ms 200 200 200 200 200
Brk ramp up t ms 100 100 100 100 100
Brk ramp dn t ms 400 400 400 400 400
Brk Pick A 2.6 2.9 2.6 2.9 2.9
Brk Pick % 69 62 69 62 62
Brk Hold A 1.5 1.6 1.5 1.6 1.6
Brk Drop % 20 20 20 20 20
Brk OCT A 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1
Brk R 18.4 16.5 18.4 16.5 16.5
Brk L 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 178 of 183
2.6T- 2.6T at 3 m/s

Motor Model 2.6T-5198F
58x1
T_A TAA20220
Otis P/N 20220 AB566_3m/s
AB562
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 215 216
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 14 14
Rated Trq Nm 200 200
Rated Trq I A 28.8 34.7
Ld mH 8.2 5.2
Lq mH 11.6 6.8
R Ohm 0.4 0.2
T/A Slope % 22.5 24.2
T/A Offset A 9.9 13.3
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0
Id Saturation A 7.5 14.5
Iq Saturation A 6.0 14
Ld Slope mH/A 0.09 0.04
Lq Slope mH/A 0.11 0.04
Lq0 mH 11.6 6.8
Lq1 1/mA 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0
Ld0 mH 8.2 5.2
Rated Motor rpm 818 982
Mag err thr eDeg 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10.00

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 179 of 183
Test 5.2T-
4.1T- 4.1T- 5.0T- 5.0T- 5.2T – 5.2T –
Motor Model Motor
53X1 56X1 53X2 56X2 58x1 58x2
54X1
at Jabil
A*A A*A A*A
A*A A*A A*A A*A
20220 20220 20220
20220 20220 20220 20220
Otis P/N BD1 BD11 BD21
BD31 BF1
BF21
BF12
BD32 BF11
BE1 BE11 BE21 BG11
BE31 BG1
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 292 403 404 501 502 503 504 505
3-4 Machine Params
Number of Poles 4 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Rated Trq Nm 70 300 300 420 420 300 365 300
Rated Trq I A 30 16 28 21.7 36.2 37 50 34
Ld mH 10.0 52 20 44 15.5 9.5 6.5 42
Lq mH 10.0 90 29 73 20 12.3 8.75 59
R Ohm 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.7 1.6 1 0.35 0.35
T/A Slope % 0 37.4 40 37 39 40.6 34 39.7
T/A Offset A 0 4.8 9.5 7.39 11.6 13.4 19 5.78
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 0.0 3 7 3.4 5 10 15 5
Iq Saturation A 0.0 16 5 4 5.3 11.1 5 5
Ld Slope mH/A 0.0 0.9 0.2 0.7 0.17 0.1 0.04 0.8
Lq Slope mH/A 0.0 0.5 0.33 1 0.18 0.12 0.07 1.15
Lq0 mH 10 75 32 73.8 22 11 11 65
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.59
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.02
Ld0 mH 10 60 10 35.6 10 6.5 4.8 45
Rated Mag I A 12 - - - - -
Peak Mag I A 20 - - - - -
Rtr Time Const s 0.22 - - - - -
Rated Motor rpm 1000 330 576 330 576 822 822 405
Mag err thr eDeg - 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % - 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz - 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 180 of 183

GGP
GGP 3.2T5157E
3.2T557 GGP GGP
GGP GGP GGP
3.2T558 4.1T581A 5.0T532A
4.1T5132E 5.0T552A 5.0T557B 5.2T581C
4.1T5152E 4.1T582A 5.0T533A
MACHRAT 4.1T532D 4.1T5157E 5.0T558B 5.2T582C
4.1T533D
4.1T558E
1600kg 1600kg 1600kg 2268kg 2000kg 2268kg 2268kg

1.02m/s 1.78m/s 2.54m/s 1.02m/s 1.60m/s 1.78m/s 2.54m/s
TA*20220 TA*20220 TA*20220
TA*20220 TA*20220 TA*20220 TA*20220
Otis P/N AR1/11/511
AR2/3/12/ AT11
AT12 AT13
AT14
AT32
512/522 AT15
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 405 406 407 507 508 509 510
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Rated Trq Nm 300 300 300 435 375 420 410
Rated Trq I A 18.2 32 44 26.3 35.5 43.6 62
Ld mH 39.4 16.5 7.5 46.9 18.3 14.7 5.3
Lq mH 52.0 22.8 10.2 64.8 27.3 19.7 7.4
R Ohm 1.57 0.7 0.18 1.0 0.42 0.31 0.11
T/A Slope % 38.1 32.3 32.9 42.3 35 25.7 27.4
T/A Offset A 6.2 8.9 15.1 7.1 9 9.2 17.1
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 6.1 7 7.3 11.5 3 3 7.5
Iq Saturation A 4.4 7 17.2 6.2 3.6 12.3 5.0
Ld Slope mH/A 0.67 0.17 0.06 0.61 0.32 0.20 0.04
Lq Slope mH/A 0.8 0.23 0.09 1.00 0.27 0.22 0.03
Lq0 mH 52.0 22.8 10.2 64.8 27.3 19.7 7.4
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 39.4 16.5 7.5 46.9 18.3 14.7 5.3
Rated Motor rpm 324 576 809 330 518 576 822
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
3-3 Brake Params See Note 1) See Note 1)
Brk Cnt Type 0-3 3 3
Brk Pick Time ms 1500 1500
Brk Setl Time ms 500 500
Lft Brk Delay ms 200 200
Brk Lftd Dely ms 200 200
Brk ramp up t ms 100 100
Brk ramp dn t ms 400 400
Brk Pick A 2.9 3.75
Brk Pick % 69 69
Brk Hold A 1.6 2.1
Brk Drop % 20 20
Brk OCT A 4.1 5.25
Brk R 16.5 12.8
Brk L 1.2 0.9
Note1) Reference brake parameter settings for application in the GCS222LVA controller. Other/older
controllers may use different Brk Cnt Type and different settings

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 181 of 183

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 182 of 183

BOMCOW BOMCOW BOMCOW BOMCOW BOMCOW BOMCOW
Motor Model 630Kg 630Kg 800Kg 800Kg 1000Kg 1000Kg
AJ1, AJ2, AJ4, AJ5, AJ7, AJ8,
T1, AJ3, T4, AJ6, T7, AJ9,
T10 T2, T13 T5, T16 T8,
Otis P/N
T3, T6, T9,
DAA20220-
T11, T14, T17,
T12 T15 T18
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 321 322 323 324 325 326
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20
Rated Trq Nm 460 460 550 550 665 665
Rated Trq I A 8.4 15.6 9.7 18 11.3 21
Ld mH 228.1 75 172.1 56.2 130.8 44
Lq mH 203.8 67 156.2 51.0 118.9 40
R Ohm 9.39 3.14 7.04 2.34 4.88 1.66
T/A Slope % 0.273 0.15 0.2 0.11 0.273 0.15
T/A Offset A 2.0 2 2 4 2 4
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0 0 0 0 0
Id Saturation A 6.7 10 10 15 10 15
Iq Saturation A 2.1 7 4.5 15 3 10
Ld Slope mH/A 5.5 1.86 3.96 1.34 3.55 0.78
Lq Slope mH/A 2.3 0.57 0.79 0.2 0.91 0.33
Lq0 mH 203.8 67 156.2 51 118.9 40
Lq1 1/mA 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ld0 mH 229 75 172 56.2 85 30
Rated Motor rpm 96 168 96 168 96 168
Mag err thr eDeg 20 20 20 20 20 20
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100 100 100 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 183 of 183

3.0T5103A, 3.0T5107A,
MACHRAT 3.0T5102A 3.0T5104A
BOMCOW BOMCOW
320Kg 630Kg
Motor Model 1.0m/s, 1.0m/s,
0.63m/s 0.63m/s
CH1, CH3,
Otis P/N DAA20220- CH2 CH4
3-1 CONTRACT
Motor Type 310 311
3-4 MACHINE
Number of Poles 20 20
Rated Trq Nm 665 665
Rated Trq I A 6.1 9.2
Ld mH 616 209
Lq mH 616 209
R Ohm 24.5 8.3
T/A Slope % 0 0
T/A Offset A 0 0
Kt Slope 1/kNm 0 0
Id Saturation A 0 0
Iq Saturation A 0 0
Ld Slope mH/A 0 0
Lq Slope mH/A 0 0
Lq0 mH 616 209
Lq1 1/mA 0 0
Lq2 1/mA^2 0 0
Ld0 mH 616 209
Rated Motor rpm 33 66
Mag err thr eDeg 40 20
LRT DC Level PU 0.1 0.1
LRT mot err eDeg 10.0 10.0
Fld Wkn Lvl % 100 100
Fld Wkn BW Hz 1.5 2

Rev. 2009-01-15
Document: 31400_UG
Sheet: 184 of 184
Inertia Calculations
9.1 System Inertia Formula
For larger systems (usually gearless systems, or systems with compensation ropes), the following
formula should be used:
J = J1 + J2 + J3
 d2  M 
J1 =  shv  Mcar + duty + Mcwt + Mcomp  + Jmachine
2 2 
 4r gr  2 
 d2shv 
J2 =  M
2  rope
 4rg r 
 d2shv 
J3 =  2 2 2 Jcomp
r g d 
 r comp 
where:
dshv diameter of drive sheave (m)
r roping ratio (1= 1:1, 2= 2:1, etc.)
gr gear ratio of gearbox (if any) (1= 1:1, 17 = 17:1 etc.)
Mcar mass of empty car (kg)
Mcwt mass of counterweight (kg)
Jmachine total rotating inertia of all sheaves, including rotor inertia and drive sheave inertia,
excluding Comp Sheave inertia, (kg-m2)
Mrope mass of ropes (kg)

Mcomp mass of compensation ropes (kg)
Jcomp inertia of Compensation Rope Sheave (kg-m2)
dcomp diameter of Compensation Rope Sheave (m)
9.2 System Inertia Approximation

For smaller systems (usually geared systems, or systems without compensating ropes), the
following approximation for inertia may be satisfactory:
 d 2  M 
J =  shv  Mcar + duty + Mcwt  + Jmachine
2 2 
 4r gr  2 
This approximation is derived by assuming Jcomp = Mcomp = Mrope = 0 .

Rev. 2009-01-15

Ultra Drive User Guide: Engineering Center Five Farm Springs Farmington, CT 06032

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ultra Drive User Guide: Engineering Center Five Farm Springs Farmington, CT 06032

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ultra Drive User Guide: Engineering Center Five Farm Springs Farmington, CT 06032

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engineering Center

Five Farm Springs

Original Date: 2010-09-10 Document: 31400_UG

Ultra Drive User Guide

DISTRIBUTION: Per notification document PDP00161.

REVISION APPROVAL RECORD:

Rev Date Project/ Revised By: Approved By: Signature and

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

6.2.1 Display Format ..................................................................................................................... 40

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

7 Data Acquisition Tool ..................................................................................... 156

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

2 Software Release Notes

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

CONSTRUCTION RUN BOX Regen Drive GDCB Wiring

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

This state is entered after certain faults have

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

3.2.1 Drive State Sequence

RTR Lift Brake Delay(E2_LIFT_BRAKE_DELAY]) Zero speed (E2_ZERO_SPEED_TIME])

BL Profile Delay (E2_PROFILE_DELAY])

Ramp down ~200msec

Brake settle Time

Brake Lift Delay

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

• Hovering is not included

4 Installation and Startup

4.3 Parameter Setup

• All parameters in service tool menu 3-1 CONTRACT

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

4.4 Encoder Adjustment

Figure 1 Timing Diagram Showing Encoder Calibration (PM motors only)

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

4.5 Check of Direction

501 Pos Tracking 502 Vel Tracking 100 Inv SW Oct

After changing this parameter, repeat the test.

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

4.7 Check of 1LS/2LS

Nom Speed Decel Minimal 1LS / 2LS distance

400 800 200

400 1000 185

400 1200 175

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Configuration #4: Configuration #3: Configuration #1:

Vane Vane Minimum 3 Toleran

3 RPD-P2, 1Sens, 250mm 1 250 50 - 15 N.C.

CEDES Photo, 1Sens, 9

7 PRS5 1 170 50 - 30 N.O.

8 PRSxx, 1Sens, 130mm 1 130 50 - 30 N.O.

RPD-P7A, 4Sens, A=15

13 PRSxx, 1Sens, 140mm 1 140 50 - 30 N.O.

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company

4.8.1 Example PRS configuration: PRS2

Form PA1021 Unpublished Work - Copyright © Otis Elevator Company